1. Fanuc
  2. PMC Ladder Language

PMC Ladder Language Programming manual Page 963

Programming manual
B–61863E/15
6. SIGNAL TRACE
FUNCTION (PMC–SB7)
FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION
929
g) STOP CONDITION/ TRIGGER/ MODE
When ”TRIGGER” is set on ”STOP CONDITION”, this parameter is
enabled. Determine the trigger mode when the trace is stopped.
– RISING EDGE: Stops the tracing automatically by rising up of
the trigger signal.
– FALLING EDGE: Stops the tracing automatically by falling
down of the trigger signal.
– BOTH EDGE: Stops the tracing automatically by rising up or
falling down of the trigger signal.
h) STOP CONDITION/ TRIGGER/ POSITION
When ”TRIGGER” is set on ”STOP CONDITION”, this parameter is
enabled. Input the ratio of the sampling time or number which
specifies the position where specified trigger condition is on. If you
would like to examine the transitions of the signal before the trigger
condition, you should set a big value in this parameter. If you would
like to examine the transitions of the signal after the trigger condition,
you should set a small value in this parameter.
Example: The case that sampling time is 10 second and trigger
position is set as ”10%”.
Trigger position
–1 0 9 (SEC)
1sec
9sec
i) SAMPLING CONDITION
When ”SIGNAL TRANSITION” is set on ”TRACE MODE”, this
parameter is enabled. Determine the sampling condition.
– TRIGGER: Samples the status of specified signals when
the specified sampling condition is on.
– ANY CHANGE: Samples the status of specified signals when
the signals change.
j) SAMPLING CONDITION/ TRIGGER/ ADDRESS
When ”SIGNAL TRANSITION” is set on ”TRACE MODE”, and
”TRIGGER” is set on ”SAMPLING CONDITION”, this parameter is
enabled. Input signal address or symbol name as sampling trigger.
k) SAMPLING CONDITION/ TRIGGER/ MODE
When ”SIGNAL TRANSITION” is set on ”TRACE MODE”, and
”TRIGGER” is set on ”SAMPLING CONDITION”, this parameter is
enabled. Input trigger mode that determines the condition of specified
trigger.
– RISING EDGE: Samples the status of specified signals by
rising up of the trigger signal.
– FALLING EDGE: Samples the status of specified signals by
falling down of the trigger signal.
– BOTH EDGE: Samples the status of specified signals by
rising up or falling down of the trigger signal.
– ON: Samples the status of specified signals during
the trigger signal is on.
– OFF: Samples the status of specified signals during
the trigger signal is off.
Previous page
Next page

Contents Summary of PMC Ladder Language Programming manual

  • Page 1                                 
  • Page 2Ȧ No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form. Ȧ All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters. However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be
  • Page 3B–61863E/15 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety. Also, suppleme
  • Page 4
  • Page 5B–61863E/15 PREFACE PREFACE This programming manual describes the method of generating ladder sequence programs for PMC. It also describes the operation methods of CRT/MDI and SYSTEM P series for sequence programming. Renaming of PMC This manual presents programming descriptions for the PMC Models m
  • Page 6PREFACE B–61863E/15 Product Name Abbreviations Applicable CNC FANUC PMC–MODEL SB4 (Note 1) PMC–SB4 FANUC Series 16–MODEL B (Old Name : FANUC PMC–MODEL RB4) (PMC–RB4) FANUC Series 18–MODEL B FANUC PMC–MODEL SB5 (Note 1) PMC–SB5 FANUC Series 16–MODEL C (Old Name : FANUC PMC–MODEL RB5) (PMC–RB5) FANUC
  • Page 7B–61863E/15 PREFACE Other manuals However, it does not include all items required for sequence programming. For those required for sequence programming refer to the following manuals. Name of manual Reference items Application FANUC Power Mate-MODEL D/F Interface between PMC and CNC PMC-PA1 CONNECTI
  • Page 8
  • Page 9B–61863E/15 Table of Contents Volume 1 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S–1 PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P–I I. PMC SEQ
  • Page 10Table of contents B–61863E/15 3.2.7 Distribution I/O Connection I/O Module and Distribution I/O Operator’s Panel I/O Module Assignment Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 3.2.8 Assignment of Built–in I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
  • Page 11B–61863E/15 Table of contents 5.17 MOVOR (DATA TRANSFER AFTER LOGICAL SUM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 5.18 COM (COMMON LINE CONTROL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 5.19 COME (COMMON LINE CON
  • Page 12Table of contents B–61863E/15 5.64 END (END OF A LADDER PROGRAM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 5.65 CALL (CONDITIONAL SUBPROGRAM CALL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 5.66 CALLU (UNCONDITIONAL
  • Page 13B–61863E/15 Table of contents 11.2 SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 11.3 INTERRUPT PROCESSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
  • Page 14Table of contents B–61863E/15 3.8 DISPLAYING AND SETTING THE CONFIGURATION STATUS OF I/O DEVICES (IOCHK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 3.8.1 I/O Link Connecting Check Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
  • Page 15B–61863E/15 Table of contents 2.2 CONNECTING COMPONENT UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517 3. SELECTION OF PROGRAMMER MENUS BY SOFTKEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518 4. SPECIFYING AND DISPLAYING SYSTEM PARAMETERS (SYSP
  • Page 16Table of contents B–61863E/15 6.2 STARTING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565 6.3 FORCIBLY STOPPING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565 7. WRITING, READING, AND VERIFYIN
  • Page 17B–61863E/15 Table of contents 8.4.3 Step Operation [STEP] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604 8.4.4 Stop Function of Break with Condition [BRKCTL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605 8.5 ONL
  • Page 18Table of contents B–61863E/15 2.2 PMC SCREEN TRANSITION AND RELATED SOFT KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645 3. DISPLAYING PMC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND INTERNAL RELAY (PMCDGN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647 3
  • Page 19B–61863E/15 Table of contents 6.1.1 Screen Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701 6.1.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
  • Page 20Table of contents B–61863E/15 8.4 OUTPUTTING TO AND INPUTTING FROM FLASH ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788 8.5 OUTPUTTING TO AND INPUTTING FROM FLOPPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791 8.6 FLOPPY LIST SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . .
  • Page 21B–61863E/15 Table of contents Volume 2 V. FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION 1. SCREEN OPERATION FOR FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837 1.1 SCREEN OPERATION FOR PMC–SA1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
  • Page 22Table of contents B–61863E/15 3.2.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883 3.3 PROGRAM LIST VIEWER SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
  • Page 23B–61863E/15 Table of contents 10.2 SETTING OF ONLINE CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 955 10.2.1 How to Set at PMC Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 955 10
  • Page 24Table of contents B–61863E/15 6.1.1 Program Configuration List (Main Screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015 6.1.2 Step Sequence Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016
  • Page 25B–61863E/15 Table of contents 3.2 CONNECTIONS OF UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1060 3.3 KEYBOARD OF SYSTEM P SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1063 3.3
  • Page 26Table of contents B–61863E/15 4.9.7 Deleting a Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1116 4.9.8 Searching a Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
  • Page 27B–61863E/15 Table of contents B.4.12 Reading the CNC Alarm Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1171 B.4.13 Reading the Current Program Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1176 B.4.
  • Page 28Table of contents B–61863E/15 B.4.56 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Offset Number (2) : Tool Operation Sequence Number) (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1265 B.4.57 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Compensation Number (1) : Tool Num
  • Page 29B–61863E/15 Table of contents B.4.93 Shift of Tool Management Data (:Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1366 C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1368 C.1 FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
  • Page 30Table of contents B–61863E/15 C.3.34 Reading the Machining Time (Low–speed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1411 C.3.35 Reading the Load Current (A/D Conversion Data) for the Spindle Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1412 C.3.36 Reading the Tool Offset Data Accor
  • Page 31B–61863E/15 Table of contents E.2 WRITING THE WIRE DIAMETER OFFSET (:LOW–SPEED RESPONSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1462 E.3 READING THE PARAMETER (:LOW–SPEED RESPONSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1464 E.4 WRITING THE PARAMETER (:LOW–SPEED RESPONSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
  • Page 32Table of contents B–61863E/15 I.3.1.1 Component units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1510 I.3.1.2 Connection of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
  • Page 33B–61863E/15 Table of contents M.6 PMC SYSTEM ALARM MESSAGES (PMC–SB7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1570 N. EXAMPLE OF STEP SEQUENCE PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1572 O. STEP SEQUENCE CORRESPONDED C LANGUAGE . . . . .
  • Page 34
  • Page 35I. PMC SEQUENCE PROGRA
  • Page 36
  • Page 371. SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATING PROCEDURE 1 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATING PROCEDURE The procedure for creating the sequence program when the CNC machine tool is controlled by use of the PMC is shown in Fig. 1. Proceed according to the flow shown in Fig. 1. The procedure is
  • Page 381. SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATING PROCEDURE PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 A Correct with Perform system operation Debugging RAM 7 the keys of the CRT/MDI Yes Should the program be corrected? Write into the ROM using the ROM writer 8 Perform system operation 9 Yes Should the program be corrected? No 10
  • Page 391. SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATING PROCEDURE 1.1 Table 1.1 shows the specification of PMCs. Note that the program size, processing speed, available function SPECIFICATION OF commands, internal addresses, and nonvolatile memory addresses of PMCs some PMCs are different from
  • Page 401. SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATING PROCEDURE PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 NOTE 1 This is the number of ladder steps for the program only with basic instructions. The use of functional instructions may vary the number of ladder steps. 2 The size of a symbol and that of a comment are fixed to 1KB. The s
  • Page 411. SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATING PROCEDURE Table 1.1 PMC specifications (2) Type of PMC PMC–SA1 PMC–SA2 PMC–SA3 Specification of PMC Program method language Ladder Ladder Ladder Number of ladder level 2 2 2 1st level execution period 8 ms 8 ms 8 ms Mean processing time o
  • Page 421. SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATING PROCEDURE PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Table 1.1 PMC specifications (3) Type of PMC Specification PMC–SB1 PMC–SB2 PMC–SB3 of PMC Program method language Ladder Ladder Ladder Number of ladder level 2 2 2 1st level excution period 8 ms 8 ms 8 ms Mean processing time of
  • Page 431. SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATING PROCEDURE Table 1.1 PMC specifications (4) Type of PMC Specification PMC–SC PMC–SC3 PMC–NB of PMC Program method language Ladder Ladder Ladder C-language C-language C-language Number of ladder level 3 3 3 1st level execution period 8 ms 8
  • Page 441. SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATING PROCEDURE PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 NOTE 1 This is the number of ladder steps for the program only with basic instructions. The use of functional instructions may vary the number of ladder steps. 2 The size of a symbol and that of a comment of PMC-SC/SC3 are fixed
  • Page 451. SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATING PROCEDURE Table 1.1 PMC specifications (5) Series 18– Series 16–MODEL B/Series 18–MODEL B Model MODEL B PMC–SB3 PMC–SC3 PMC–SB4 PMC–SC4 PMC–SA1 Programming method Ladder Ladder Ladder Ladder C–language Ladder language C–language Step sequ
  • Page 461. SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATING PROCEDURE PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 NOTE 1 This is the number of ladder steps for the program only with basic instructions. The use of functional instructions may vary the number of ladder steps. 2 The size of a symbol and that of a comment are fixed 32KB. The siz
  • Page 471. SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATING PROCEDURE Table 1.1 PMC specifications (6) Series 16–MODEL C/Series 18–MODEL C Model PMC–SB5 PMC–SC3 PMC–SB6 PMC–SC4 Programming method Ladder Ladder Ladder Ladder C–language language C–language Step sequence Step sequece Number of ladder
  • Page 481. SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATING PROCEDURE PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 NOTE 1 This is the number of ladder steps for the program only with basic instructions. The use of functional instructions may vary the number of ladder steps. 2 The size of a symbol and that of a comment are fixed 32KB. The siz
  • Page 491. SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATING PROCEDURE Table 1.1 PMC specifications (7) Series 21–MODEL B/ Model Series 210–MODEL B PMC–SA1 PMC–SA3 Programming method Ladder Ladder language Number of ladder level 2 2 1st level excution period 8 ms 8 ms Mean processing time of basic
  • Page 501. SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATING PROCEDURE PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 NOTE 1 This is the number of ladder steps for the program only with basic instructions. The use of functional instructions may vary the number of ladder steps. 2 The size of a symbol and that of a comment are fixed 32KB. The siz
  • Page 511. SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATING PROCEDURE Table 1.1 PMC specifications (8) FANUC Series 16i/160i/18i/180i Model PMC–SA5 PMC–SB5 PMC–SB6 (Loader control) Programmingmethod Ladder Ladder Ladder step sequence Number of ladder levels 2 2 2 First–level execution period 8 ms
  • Page 521. SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATING PROCEDURE PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 NOTE 1 This is the number of ladder steps for the program only with basic instructions. The use of functional instructions may vary the number of ladder steps. 2 These have no limit of size for each. However, the total size of s
  • Page 531. SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATING PROCEDURE Table 1.1 PMC specifications (9) FANUC Series 21i/210i Model PMC–SA1 PMC–SA5 PMC–SA5 PMC–SB6 (Loader control) Ladder Programmingmethod Ladder Ladder Ladder Step sequence Number of ladder levels 2 2 2 2 First–level execution peri
  • Page 541. SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATING PROCEDURE PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 NOTE 1 This is the number of ladder steps for the program only with basic instructions. The use of functional instructions may vary the number of ladder steps. 2 These have no limit of size for each. However, the total size of s
  • Page 551. SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATING PROCEDURE Table 1.1 PMC specifications (10) FUNAC Power Mate i–MODEL D/H Model PMC–SB5 PMC–SB6 Programmingmethod Ladder Ladder step sequence Number of ladder levels 2 2 Level–1 cycle time 8 ms 8 ms Basic instruction execution time 0.085 0
  • Page 561. SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATING PROCEDURE PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Table 1.1 PMC specifications (11) Series 15–MODEL B Model PMC–NB PMC–NB2 (4048 Series) Programmingmethod language Ladder Ladder C–language C–language Step sequence Number of ladder level 3 3 Level–1 Cycle Time 8 ms 8 ms Basic in
  • Page 571. SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATING PROCEDURE NOTE 1 This is the number of ladder steps for the program only with basic instructions. The use of functional instructions may vary the number of ladder steps. 2 These have no limit of size for each. However, the total size of s
  • Page 581. SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATING PROCEDURE PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Table 1.1 PMC specifications (12) FANUC Series 15i Model PMC–NB6 Programmingmethod Ladder C–language Number of ladder levels 3 First–level execution period 8 ms Basic instruction processing time 0.085 µ sec/step Program capacity
  • Page 591. SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATING PROCEDURE Table 1.1 PMC specifications (13) Series 21i–B Series 16i/18i/21i–B Model PMC–SA1 PMC–SA1 PMC–SB7 (Loader control) Programmingmethod Ladder Ladder Ladder C–language Step sequence (Note 4) Number of ladder levels 2 2 3 First–leve
  • Page 601. SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATING PROCEDURE PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 NOTE 1 This is the number of ladder steps for the program only with basic instructions. The use of functional instructions may vary the number of ladder steps. 2 These have no limit of size for each. However, the total size of s
  • Page 611. SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATING PROCEDURE Table 1.1 PMC specifications (14) Series 0i–A Model PMC–SA1 PMC–SA3 Programmingmethod Ladder Ladder Number of ladder levels 2 2 Level–1 cycle time 8 ms 8 ms Basic instruction execution time 5.0 µ sec/step 0.15 µ sec/step Program
  • Page 621. SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATING PROCEDURE PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Table 1.1 PMC specifications (15) Series 0i–B Series 0i Mate–A/B Model PMC–SA1 PMC–SB7 PMC–SA1 Programmingmethod Ladder Ladder Ladder Number of ladder levels 2 3 2 First–level execution period 8 ms 8 ms 8 ms Basic instruction pr
  • Page 631. SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATING PROCEDURE 1.2 SUMMARY OF SPECIFICATION OF LADDER PROGRAM Table 1.2 Summary of specification of ladder program (1) Model PMC–PA1 PMC–PA3 PMC–P PMC Interfaces between the PMC and CNC Compatible Incompatible address (F and G) (Note 2) Interf
  • Page 641. SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATING PROCEDURE PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Table 1.2 Summary of specification of ladder program (2) PMC– PMC– SB3/ PMC– PMC– PMC– PMC– PMC– PMC– Model SA3/ SB4/ SC3/ SA1 SA2 SB SB2 SC SA5 SB5/ SC4 SB6 PMC address Interfaces between the PMC and CNC (F and Compatible (Note
  • Page 651. SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATING PROCEDURE NOTE 1 The internal relay and the data table in nonvolatile memory for the PMC-SB3, SC, SC3 are extended, compared with those for other models. 2 The same ROM cannot be shared by different models. The ROM must be rewritten using
  • Page 661. SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATING PROCEDURE PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Table 1.2 Summary of specification of ladder program (3) Model PMC– PMC– PMC– NA NB NB2 Series (4046) (4047) (4048) (4048) PMC address Interfaces between the PMC and CNC (F and G) Incompatible Interfaces between the PMC and mach
  • Page 671. SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATING PROCEDURE Table 1.2 Ladder Compatibility (4) FANUC Series 15–B FANUC Series 15i Model PMC–NB PMC–NB2 PMC–NB6 PMC address PMC–CNC interface (F, G) Compatible(NOTE 1) PMC–machine interface (X, Y) Compatible Area used by management software
  • Page 681. SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATING PROCEDURE PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Table 1.2 Ladder Compatibility (5) 16i/18i/21i–A 16i/18i/21i–B Model SA5 SB5 SB6 SB7 PMC address PMC–CNC interface (F, G) F0 to F255 Expanded to F0 Expanded to F0 G0 to G255 to F511 and G0 to F767 and G0 to G511 to G767 PMC–mach
  • Page 691. SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATING PROCEDURE CAUTION 1 The above table does not contain simple addition of reserved areas for PMC addresses that are not used by the ladder. 2 Execution time–dependent ladder As instruction execution becomes faster, the following changes may
  • Page 701. SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATING PROCEDURE PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 1.3 This is paragraph outlines functions of a sequence program before explaining the programming work. WHAT IS A SEQUENCE A sequence program is a program for sequence control of machine tools and other systems. PROGRAM? A progra
  • Page 711. SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATING PROCEDURE PMC (Programmable Machine Controller) CPU Sequence program memory A B D W RD X0.0 Sequence AND R10.1 X0.0 R10.1 R20.3 Y0.0 program input C OR X6.1 AND.NOT R20.3 X6.1 WRT Y0.0 Controlled system, such as machine tools and other sy
  • Page 721. SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATING PROCEDURE PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 1.4 After deciding the control object specifications and calculating the number of input/output signal points, create the interface specifications. CREATION OF Use the input/output signal interface tables in the CONNECTION INTER
  • Page 731. SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATING PROCEDURE 1.6 In the coding, the contents of control expressed in the ladder diagram are converted into PMC instructions. In the case of using the offline CODING (STEP 5) programmer or ladder diagram editting, since sequence program entry
  • Page 741. SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATING PROCEDURE PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 1.7 The sequence program can be entered in five ways as follows: SEQUENCE (1) Entry with CRT/MDI keys PROGRAM ENTRY The sequence program is entered in the ladder diagram format by pressing the keys of the CRT/MDI. (STEPS 6, 7) (
  • Page 751. SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATING PROCEDURE 1.9 (1) Storage and control of sequence program After debugging, the sequence program should be stored and STORAGE AND controlled by the machine tool builder. It can be stored in the CONTROL OF following ways: SEQUENCE (a) Stori
  • Page 762. SEQUENCE PROGRAM PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 2 SEQUENCE PROGRAM Since PMC sequence control handled by software and operates on principles different from a general relay circuit, the sequence control method must be fully understood in order to design the PMC sequence. 42
  • Page 77B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 2. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 2.1 In a general relay sequence circuit, each relay operates at approximately the same time. In the figure below for example, when relay A operates, EXECUTION the relay D and E operate at approximately the same time. (When both PROCEDURE OF contac
  • Page 782. SEQUENCE PROGRAM PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 2.2 The sequence program is executed from the beginning of coding to the end of coding of the ladder diagram in the sequence written. When the REPETITIVE sequence program ends, the program starts over from the beginning. This OPERATION is called r
  • Page 79B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 2. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 2.3 A sequence program consists of three parts: 1st level sequence, 2nd level sequence and 3rd level sequence. The 3rd level sequence part is added PRIORITY OF to the models usable the 3rd level sequence. (see Fig. 2.3 (a)). EXECUTION Sequence pro
  • Page 802. SEQUENCE PROGRAM PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 8ms 8ms 8ms 1st level 1.25ms 1.25ms 1.25ms Division 1 Division 2 Division n Division 1 2nd level NC processing Fig. 2.3 (b) Sequence in which the Sequence Program Is Executed (PMC–SA1, –SA2, –SB and –SB2) 8ms 8ms 8ms 1st level 5ms 5ms 5ms 2nd leve
  • Page 81B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 2. SEQUENCE PROGRAM operated under the undivided system. A Functional instruction B Functional instruction C Functional instruction The ladder program is divided if all functional instructions are executed regardless of execution of an actual ladder program. Fig. 2.3
  • Page 822. SEQUENCE PROGRAM PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 (5) Construction of sequence program in the case of using Sub–program. 1st level sequence part END1 (SUB 1) 2nd level sequence part END2 (SUB 2) 3rd level sequence part (Only about the PMC model usable the 3rd level sequence) END3 (SUB 48) SP D Su
  • Page 83B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 2. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 2.4 Ę : Can be used SEQUENCE : Cannot be used PROGRAM PA1 PA3 SA1 SA2 SA3 SA5 SB SB2 SB3 SB4 SB5 SB6 SB7 SC SC3 SC4 NB NB2 NB6 Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę STRUCTURING With the conventional PMC, a ladder program is described sequentially. By employin
  • Page 842. SEQUENCE PROGRAM PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 (3) Conditional branch The main program loops and checks whether conditions are satisfied. If a condition is satisfied, the corresponding subprogram is executed. If the condition is not satisfied, the subprogram is skipped. Main Program Sub Progra
  • Page 85B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 2. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 2.5 Input signals (M function, T function, etc.) from the CNC and those (cycle start, feed hold, etc.) from the machine tool are sent to the PMC. PROCESSING I/O SIGNALS Signals for the CNC (cycle start, feed hold, etc.) and those for the machine t
  • Page 862. SEQUENCE PROGRAM PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 2.5.1 (1) Input memory of CNC Input Signal The input signals from CNC are loaded in memory of CNC and are Processing transferred to the PMC at intervals of 8 ms. Since the 1st level and the 3rd level sequence part directly refer to these signals a
  • Page 87B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 2. SEQUENCE PROGRAM NOTE The status of the CNC input memory, input signals from machine, CNC output memory and output signals to machine can be checked by using the PC self–diagnosis function. The self–diagnosis number specified is the address number used by the sequ
  • Page 882. SEQUENCE PROGRAM PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 2.5.4 The status of the same input signal may be different in the 1st level and Difference of Status of 2nd level sequences. That is, at 1st level, processing is performed using input signal memory and at 2nd level, processing is performed using t
  • Page 89B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 2. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 2.5.5 Input/output signals (assignment to the R, D, and E addresses) over a Notes on Input/Output network (such as the Ethernet, I/O Link–II, PROFIBUS, DEVICENET, and FL–NET) are updated asynchronously with the execution of the PMC Signals Over a
  • Page 902. SEQUENCE PROGRAM PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 2.6 Interlocking is externally important in sequence control safety. Interlocking with the sequence program is necessary. However, INTERLOCKING interlocking with the end of the electric circuit in the machine tool magnetics cabinet must not be for
  • Page 91B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 2. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 2.7 The exact sequence processing time is displayed on the CRT screen when the sequence programs have been completed. The time is 2nd level SEQUENCE sequence division number n x 8 ms. PROGRAM This section explains how to estimate processing times
  • Page 922. SEQUENCE PROGRAM PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 (3) Processing time calculation example (for PMC–SB) (a) 1st level sequence Basic instruction: 100 steps Functional instruction: CTR: 2 times, COMPB: 2 times CTR execution time constant: 26 COMPB execution time constant: 24 END.1 execution time co
  • Page 93B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 2. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 2.8 The following tables list memory capacities required for a sequence program. Create a sequence program so that the total capacity of these SEQUENCE items does not exceed the sequence program memory capacity. PROGRAM MEMORY CAPACITY Table 2.8 (
  • Page 942. SEQUENCE PROGRAM PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Table 2.8 (d) PMC–SA1/SA3/SA5/SB/SB2/SB3/SB5/SC/SC3/PA1/PA3/NB Memory capacity Type Item (Note 1) Ladder (Note 2) Basic instruction 4 bytes Functional instruction 4 bytes Functional instruction parameter 4 bytes Symbol/comment One symbol or commen
  • Page 95B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3. ADDRESS 3 ADDRESS An address shows a signal location. Addresses include input/output signals with respect to the machine, the input/output signals with respect to the CNC, the internal relays, the counters, the keep relays (PMC parameters), and data table. Each ad
  • Page 963. ADDRESS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 X 127. 7 Bit number (0 to 7) Address number (within four numerics after alphabet) An alphabet must be specified at the beginning of the address number to indicate the type of the signal as shown in Table 3. When specifying the address in the byte unit by t
  • Page 97B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3. ADDRESS Table 3 Alphabetic characters in address numbers (2) Model Character Signal description FS20A FS18A PMC-SA1 PMC-SA3 PMC-SA1 PMC-SA2 PMC-SA3 X Signal from the machine to the X0 to X127 X0 to X127 PMC (MT to PMC) X1000 to X1013 (Caution 1) X1000 to X1019 Y S
  • Page 983. ADDRESS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Table 3 Alphabetic characters in address numbers (3) Chara– Model Signal description cter PMC-SB PMC-SB2 PMC-SB3 PMC-SC PMC-SC3 PMC-NB X Signal from the machine to the X0 to X127 X0 to X127 PMC (MT to PMC) X1000 to X1039 Y Signal from the PMC to the Y0 to
  • Page 99B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3. ADDRESS Table 3 Alphabetic characters in address numbers (4) Model Signal descrip- Series Character Series 16-MODEL B/Series 18-MODEL B tion 18-MODEL B PMC-SB3 PMC-SC3 PMC-SB4 PMC-SC4 PMC-SA1 X Signal from the X0 to X127 machine to the PMC X1000 to X1019 (MT to PM
  • Page 1003. ADDRESS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Table 3 Alphabetic characters in address numbers (5) Model Character Signal description Series 16-MODEL C/Series 18-MODEL C PMC-SB5 PMC-SC3 PMC-SB6 PMC-SC4 X Signal from the machine to the PMC (MT to X0 to X127 PMC) X1000 to X1019 X1020 to X1039 Y Signal f
  • Page 101B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3. ADDRESS Table 3 Alphabetic characters in address numbers (6) Model Character Signal description Series 21/210-MODEL B PMC-SA1 PMC-SA3 X Signal from the machine to the X0 to X127 PMC (MT to PMC) X1000 to X1011 Y Signal from the PMC to the Y0 to Y127 machine (PMC to
  • Page 1023. ADDRESS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Table 3 Alphabetic characters in address numbers (7) Model Sym- Type of signal FANUC Series 16i/160i/18i/180i–A bol PMC–SB5 PMC–SB6 X Signal from the machine to PMC X0 to X127 X0 to X127 (MT ³ PMC) (Note 1) X200 to X327 (Note 2) (Note 1) Y Signal from the
  • Page 103B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3. ADDRESS Table 3 Alphabetic characters in address numbers (8) Model Sym- Type of signal FANUC Series 21i/210i–A bol PMC–SA1 PMC–SA5 PMC–SB6 X Signal from the machine to PMC X0 to X127 (Note 1) X0 to X127 (Note 1) (MT ³ PMC) X200 to X327 (Note 2) Y Signal from the P
  • Page 1043. ADDRESS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Table 3 Alphabetic characters in address numbers (9) Model Sym- Signal description FANUC Power Mate i–MODEL D/H bol PMC–SB5 PMC–SB6 X Input signal from the machine to the X0 to X127 (I/O Link Master) PMC (MT to PMC) X1000 to X1003 (Built–in I/O) X1020 to X
  • Page 105B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3. ADDRESS Table 3 Alphabetic characters in address numbers (10) Model Series 15-MODEL B Character Signal description PMC-NB PMC-NB2 (4048) X Input signal from the machine to X0 to X127 the PMC (MT to PMC) Y Output signal from the PMC to Y0 to Y127 the machine (PMC t
  • Page 1063. ADDRESS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Table 3 Alphabetic Characters for PMC Address Number (11) Model Character Signal description FANUC Series 15i PMC–NB6 X Input signal from machine to PMC X0 to X127 (MT³PMC) Y Output signal from PMC to machine Y0 to Y127 (PMC³MT) F Input signal from the NC
  • Page 107B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3. ADDRESS Table 3 Alphabetic Characters for PMC Address Number (12) Control type Address Type of signal Series 16i/18i/21i–B PMC–SA1 PMC–SB7 X Input signal from machine tool to X0 to X127 X0 to X127 PMC (MT→PMC) X200 to X327*1 X1000 to X1127*2 Y Output signal from P
  • Page 1083. ADDRESS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 CAUTION 1 These addresses are used for channel 2 of I/O Link. I/O link expansion option is necessary. 2 This area is reserved for PMC. I/O can not be assigned in it. Don’t use it in sequence program. 3 This area contains PMC reserve. Actual available addre
  • Page 109B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3. ADDRESS Table 3 Alphabetic Characters for PMC Address Number (13) FANUC Series 0i–A Character Signal description PMC–SA1 PMC–SA3 X Signal from machine to PMC X0 to X127 (MTP→MC) X1000 to X1011 Y Signal from PMC to machine Y0 to Y127 (PMCMT) Y1000 to Y1008 F Signal
  • Page 1103. ADDRESS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Table 3 Alphabetic Characters for PMC Address Number (14) Control type Address Type of signal Series 0i–B PMC–SA1 PMC–SB7 X Input signal from machine tool to X0 to X127 X0 to X127 PMC (MT→PMC) X200 to X327*1 X1000 to X1127*1 Y Output signal from PMC to Y0
  • Page 111B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3. ADDRESS CAUTION 1 This area is reserved for PMC. I/O can not be assigned in it. Don’t use it in sequence program. 2 This area contains PMC reserve. Actual available addresses depend on the configuration of CNC system. 3 This area is for PMC reserve. Don’t use it i
  • Page 1123. ADDRESS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Table 3 Alphabetic Characters for PMC Address Number (15) Control type Address Type of signal Series 0i Mate–A/B PMC–SA1 X Input signal from machine tool to PMC X0 to X127 (MT³PMC) Y Output signal from PMC to machine Y0 to Y127 tool (PMC³MT) F Input signal
  • Page 113B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3. ADDRESS 3.1 Addresses of the interfaces are outlined below. For details, see CONNECTION MANUAL of Series 16. ADDRESSES BETWEEN PMC AND (1) Basic machine interface CNC (PMC´NC) (a) PMCzCNC related signals The addresses for Series 15 are from F0 to F511, for the oth
  • Page 1143. ADDRESS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 3.2 ADDRESSES BETWEEN PMC AND MACHINE TOOL (PMC´MT) 3.2.1 (1) When the FANUC I/O Link is used Addresses Between (a) PMC ← MT PMC and Machine Tool Addresses of channel 1 are from X0 to X127. Addresses of channel 2 are from X200 to X327. (PMC–SB6/SB7 for Ser
  • Page 115B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3. ADDRESS Table 3.2.1 (a) Input signals whose addresses are fixed (Series 16/Series 18) Address Signal Symbol When the I/O Link When the built–in is used I/O card is used T series Signal indicating that X–axis measurement position is reached XAE X4.0 X1004.0 Signal
  • Page 1163. ADDRESS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Table 3.2.1 (c) Input signals whose addresses are fixed (Series 15) Emergency Skip signal Measurement position reached signal Type of I/O unit stop address address AE1 (XAE) AE2 (ZAE) Connection unit X6.4 X11.6 X8.3 X8.4 I/O unit X6.4 X11.6 X8.3 X8.4 3.2.2
  • Page 117B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3. ADDRESS PMC I/O control Group unit I/O Unit I/O Unit #0 AIF01A AIF01B Base#0 Base#1 Group I/O Unit I/O Unit #1 AIF01A AIF01B Base#0 Base#1 Power Group Mate #2 Base#0 Connection unit Group #3 Base#0 Possible to connect max. 16 groups Max. 2 Base/Group Max. 10 Slot/
  • Page 1183. ADDRESS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 (4) Module name For module names, see Table 3.2.2 (a) to (c). An actual module name begins with A. When specifying a module, omit the first letter A from the module name. Example) When specifying module AID16D, enter ID16D. Table 3.2.2 (a) Input modules Nu
  • Page 119B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3. ADDRESS Table 3.2.2 (c) Other modules Module name Occupied Name Specifications (actual module name) address FANUC CNC SYSTEM FS04A Input: 4 bytes FANUC Series 0–C FANUC Power Mate Output: 4 bytes (with FANUC I/O Link supported) FANUC Power Mate–MODEL FS08A Input:
  • Page 1203. ADDRESS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Module name Occupied Name Specifications (actual module name) address Distribution I/O connector panel I/O CM03I (/3) Input 3 bytes Basic unit only modules(NOTES 3, 4) CM06I (/6) Input 6 bytes Expansion unit 1 is used. CM09I Input 9 bytes Expansion unit 2
  • Page 121B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3. ADDRESS NOTE 1 See Section 3.2.3, “I/O Link connection unit assignment method,” for how to assign the I/O Link connection unit. 2 See Section 3.2.4, “I/O Link MODEL B assignment method,” for how to assign the I/O Link MODEL B. 3 See Section 3.2.7, “Distribution pa
  • Page 1223. ADDRESS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 (5) How to set address to each module The character and the mount position of each module is now decided with the group number, base number, slot number, and module name, so the address of each module can now be decided, corresponding these data and the in
  • Page 123B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3. ADDRESS (6) Notes when setting addresses (a) The head bytes of the analog input module (AD04A) and analog output module (DA02A) must be assigned to even number addresses of input address (XVVV), and output address (YVVV) each. When reading the A/D–converted digita
  • Page 1243. ADDRESS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 CNC A I/ O Unit I/ O Unit CNC B Model A Model A ²This portion is replaced by an I/O link connection unit. (a) I/ O Unit Model A $ I/ O Unit Model A I/ O Unit I/ O Unit Model A Model A Consequently, when the I/O link connection unit is used, the connections
  • Page 125B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3. ADDRESS 3.2.4 D Related hardware publications: I/O Unit MODEL B FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL B Connection and Maintenance Manual (B–62163E) Assignment I/O Unit MODEL Bs can be used together with a Power Mate operator panel interface unit, connection unit, and I/O Unit MOD
  • Page 1263. ADDRESS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Method of assignment: Specify a group number in [GROUP]. Always specify 0 in [BASE]. Specify the unit number of an I/O unit model B in [SLOT]. But when you assign the power–on/off intormation, specify 0 in [SLOT]. The data specified by [SLOT] and [NAME] is
  • Page 127B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3. ADDRESS Method of assignment: Specify a group number in [GROUP]. Always specify 0 in [BASE]. Always specify 1 in [SLOT]. The data specified by [NAME] is as follows: I/O points Input unit name at the Output unit name at the (input/output) time of assignment time of
  • Page 1283. ADDRESS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Method of Assignment Specify 0 to 12 in [GROUP]. For details on how to assign [BASE] and [SLOT], see 3.2.2 Assignment of I/O Module Addresses. CAUTION 1 Addresses X96 to X127 and Y96 to Y127 cannot be used in ladder diagrams. 2 When addresses X96 to X127 a
  • Page 129B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3. ADDRESS Group Base Slot Name X004 0 0 1 CM14I X020 1 0 1 CM12I X100 2 0 1 CM03I Y000 0 0 1 CM08O Y010 1 0 1 CM08O Y100 2 0 1 CM02O Assignment name To assign the connection panel I/O and operator’s panel I/O modules for the I/O Link, it is necessary to use programm
  • Page 1303. ADDRESS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 (a) If DO alarm detection is not used D No manual pulse generator: Input X = “CM03I” and output Y = “CM02O” D One manual pulse generator: Input X = “CM13I” and output Y = “CM02O” (b) If DO alarm detection is used D Input X = “CM16I” and output Y = “CM02O”
  • Page 131B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3. ADDRESS (a) If DO alarm detection is not used D No manual pulse generator: Input X = “CM12I” and output Y = “CM08O” D One manual pulse generator: Input X = “CM13I” and output Y = “CM08O” D Two manual pulse generators: Input X = “CM14I” and output Y = “CM08O” D Thr
  • Page 1323. ADDRESS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 48 input points 32 output points Operator’s panel I/O module JD1B JD1A (a) If DO alarm detection is not used D No manual pulse generator: Input X = “CM06I” and output Y = “CM04O” D One manual pulse generator: Input X = “CM13I” and output Y = “CM04O” D Two
  • Page 133B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3. ADDRESS Compatible names for If your programming unit does not support the connection I/O or assignment operator’s panel I/O module, use the following compatible names for I/O Link assignment. Assignment name Compatible name CM03I /3 CM06I /6 CM09I OC01I CM12I OC0
  • Page 1343. ADDRESS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 3.2.8 Series 0i–MODEL B has a built–in I/O card as basic function. This I/O Assignment of Built–in card has 96/64 I/O points and is needed following I/O Link assignment. I/O Card Method of assignment: Always specify 0 in [GROUP]. Always specify 0 in [BASE]
  • Page 135B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3. ADDRESS 3.3 In each model, the following signals (bytes) can be used as internal relays. This area is cleared to zero when the power is turned on. INTERNAL RELAY ADDRESSES (R) Model PA1 PA3 Number of 1100 1118 bytes Model SA1 SA2 SA3/SA5 Number of 1100 1118 1118 b
  • Page 1363. ADDRESS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Address number ± 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R0 PMC–PA1 PMC–SB3 PMC–SB4 PMC–SB7 PMC–PA3 PMC–SB5 PMC–SB6 R1 PMC–SA1 PMC–SC PMC–SC4 ⋅ PMC–SA2 PMC–SC3 PMC–NB2 ⋅ PMC–SA3 PMC–NB PMC–NB6 ⋅ PMC–SA5 PMC–SB PMC–SB2 R999 ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ R1499 ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ R2999 . . R7999 R9099 PMC–PA1 PMC–PA3
  • Page 137B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3. ADDRESS 3.3.1 (1) R9000 (Operation output register for the ADDB, SUBB, MULB, Area Managed by the DIVB, and COMPB functional instructions) System Program 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R9000 The result is 0. The result is a negative value. The result overflows. (2) R9000 (Error o
  • Page 1383. ADDRESS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 (5) R9100 to R9117 (Interface area for the FNC9x functional instruction) (PMC–SC3/SC4/NB/NB2 only) The area is provided as an interface between the FNC9x functional instruction to be executed and a desired function. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Contents of the command
  • Page 139B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3. ADDRESS R9091. 5 104ms 96ms 200ms R9091. 6 504ms 496ms 1 second (7) RUN to STOP Transition Signal, STOP to RUN Transition Signal and RUN Status Signal (PMC–SB7) (a) Overview (i) “RUN to STOP transition signal” and ”STOP to RUN transition signal” The “RUN to STOP t
  • Page 1403. ADDRESS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 (c) Behavior LADDER execution RUN STOP R9015.0 1 “STOP to RUN signal” 0 R9015.1 1 “RUN to STOP signal” 0 R9091.2 1 “RUN status signal” 0 One Scan of LADDER (i) “STOP to RUN transition signal” (R9015.0) When a STOP to RUN event is detected on system softwar
  • Page 141B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3. ADDRESS – Pressing a ”EDIT”–>”IOMDL” soft–key on a PMC screen – Pressing a ”EDIT”–>”MESAGE” soft–key on a PMC screen – Pressing a ”EDIT”–>”SYMBOL” soft–key on a PMC screen – Pressing a ”EDIT”–>”CLEAR” soft–key on a PMC screen – Pressing a ”SYSPRM” soft–key on a PM
  • Page 1423. ADDRESS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 3.4 This area is used as message display request. In each model, the following number of messages can be used. Where “Number of Messages” = ADDRESSES FOR “Number of Bytes”  8 MESSAGE This area is cleared to zero when the power is turned on. For informatio
  • Page 143B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3. ADDRESS Address number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 A0 PMC–PA1 PMC–SB4 PMC–SB7 PMC–PA3 PMC–SB6 PMC–SA1 PMC–SC4 A1 PMC–SA2 PMC–NB2 PMC–SA3 PMC–NB6 PMC–SA5 PMC–SB PMC–SB2 PMC–SB3 PMC–SB5 PMC–SC PMC–SC3 PMC–NB A24 A124 A249 Fig. 3.4 Address of message display reguest 109
  • Page 1443. ADDRESS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 3.5 This area is used as counters. In each model, the following number of counters can be used. Where “Number of Counters” = “Number of Bytes” ADDRESS OF /4 COUNTER (C) Since this area is nonvolatile, the contents of the memory do not disappear even when t
  • Page 145B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3. ADDRESS Address number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PMC–PA1 PMC–SB4 PMC–SB7 C0 Preset value PMC–PA3 PMC–SB6 C1 PMC–SA1 PMC–SC4 Counter PMC–SA2 PMC–NB2 No. 1 PMC–SA3 PMC–NB6 C2 current value PMC–SA5 C3 PMC–SB PMC–SB2 PMC–SB3 PMC–SB5 PMC–SC PMC–SC3 C76 Preset value PMC–NB C77 Co
  • Page 1463. ADDRESS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 3.6 The area is used as keep relays and PMC parameters. In each model, the following number of bytes can be used. Since this area is nonvolatile, the ADDRESS OF KEEP contents of the memory do not disappear even when the power is turned RELAY AND off. NONVO
  • Page 147B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3. ADDRESS Address number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 K0 PMC–PA1 PMC–SB4 PMC–SB7 PMC–PA3 PMC–SB6 PMC–SA1 PMC–SC4 K1 PMC–SA2 PMC–NB2 PMC–SA3 PMC–NB6 PMC–SA5 PMC–SB PMC–SB2 PMC–SB3 PMC–SB5 PMC–SC PMC–SC3 PMC–NB K19 K39 K99 K900 PMC–SB4 PMC–SB7 PMC–SB6 PMC–SC4 PMC–NB2 PMC–NB6 K909
  • Page 1483. ADDRESS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 3.7 Data table is the area of nonvolatile memory. In each model, the following number of bytes can be used. ADDRESS OF DATA TABLE (D) Model PA1 PA3 Number of bytes 1860 1860 SA3/ Model SA1 SA2 SA5 Number of bytes 1860 1860 1860 SB3/ SB4/ Model SB SB2 SB7 S
  • Page 149B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3. ADDRESS Address number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 D0 PMC–PA1 PMC–SB3 PMC–SB4 PMC–SB7 PMC–PA3 PMC–SB5 PMC–SB6 D1 PMC–SA1 PMC–SC PMC–SC4 PMC–SA2 PMC–SC3 PMC–NB2 PMC–SA3 PMC–NB PMC–NB6 PMC–SA5 PMC–SB PMC–SB2 D1859 D2999 D7999 D9999 Fig. 3.7 Address of data table 115
  • Page 1503. ADDRESS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 3.8 This area is used by TMR instruction as variable timers. In each model, the following number of timers can be used. Where “Number of timers” TIMER ADDRESSES = “Number of Bytes” / 2 (T) Since this area is nonvolatile, the contents of the memory do not d
  • Page 151B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3. ADDRESS Address number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Timer PMC–PA1 PMC–SB4 PMC–SB7 T0 No. 1 PMC–PA3 PMC–SB6 T1 PMC–SA1 PMC–SC4 PMC–SA2 PMC–NB2 Timer PMC–SA3 PMC–NB6 T2 No. 2 PMC–SA5 T3 PMC–SB PMC–SB2 PMC–SB3 PMC–SB5 PMC–SC PMC–SC3 Timer PMC–NB T78 No. 40 T79 Timer T298 No. 150
  • Page 1523. ADDRESS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 3.9 Label addresses are used to specify jump destination labels (positions in a sequence program) in the JMPB and JMPC instructions. The same label LABEL ADDRESSES number can appear in different LBL instructions in the same sequence (JMPB, JMPC, LBL) progr
  • Page 153B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3. ADDRESS 3.10 Subprogram numbers are used to specify jump destination subprogram labels in the CALL and CALLU instructions. Subprogram number must SUBPROGRAM be unique in the entire sequence program. In each model, the following NUMBERS (CALL, number of subprograms
  • Page 1544. PMC BASIC INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 4 PMC BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Designing a sequence program begins with writing a ladder diagram. The ladder diagram is written using relay contact symbols and functional instruction code. (These will be described later.) Logic written in the ladd
  • Page 155B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 4. PMC BASIC INSTRUCTIONS (2) Type There are two types of PMC instructions, basic and functional. (a) Basic instruction Basic instructions are most often used when designing sequence programs. They perform one–bit operations, such as AND, or OR. There are 14 types. (
  • Page 1564. PMC BASIC INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 4.1 The type of instructions and contents of processing are listed in the Table 4.1 (a). DETAILS OF BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Information format 1: This is used when writing instructions on a coding sheet, punching out them on a paper tape or displ
  • Page 157B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 4. PMC BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Basic instructions available on each models are as shown in the “Table 4.1 (b)”. Table 4.1 (b) Basic instruction Model PMC- PMC- PMC- PMC- PMC- PMC- PMC- PMC- PMC- PA1 PA3 SA1/ SB/ SC SA3/ SB3/ SC3/ NB/ No. Instruction SA2 SB2 SA5 SB4/ SC4 N
  • Page 1584. PMC BASIC INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 4.1.1 (1) Format RD (Address) Bit number Address number (2) Reads the status (1 or 0) of a signal at a specified address and sets it in ST0. (3) Is used when beginning coding with contact A ( ). See the ladder diagram of Fig. 4.1.1 and entri
  • Page 159B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 4. PMC BASIC INSTRUCTIONS 4.1.2 (1) Format RD. NOT (Address) Bit number Address number (2) Inverts the status of a signal at a specified address and set it in ST0. (3) Is used when beginning coding with contact B ( ). See the ladder diagram of Fig. 4.1.2 and entries
  • Page 1604. PMC BASIC INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 4.1.3 (1) Format WRT (Address) Bit number Address number (2) Outputs the results of logical operations, that is, the status of ST0 to a specified address. (3) The results of one logical operation can also be output to two or more addresses.
  • Page 161B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 4. PMC BASIC INSTRUCTIONS 4.1.4 (1) Format WRT. NOT (Address) Bit number Address number (2) Inverts the results of logical operations, that is, the status of ST0 and outputs it to a specified address. Fig. 4.1.4 and Table 4.1.4 show an example on using the WRT.NOT in
  • Page 1624. PMC BASIC INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 4.1.5 (1) Format AND (Address) Bit number Address number (2) Induces a logical product. (3) See Fig. 4.1.1 and Table 4.1.1 for an example of using the AND instruction. 4.1.6 (1) Format AND. NOT (Address) Bit number Address number (2) Inverts
  • Page 163B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 4. PMC BASIC INSTRUCTIONS 4.1.9 (1) Format RD. STK (Address) Bit number Address number (2) Stacks the intermediate results of a logical operations. After shifting the stack register left one bit, sets a signal at a specified address to ST0. (3) Is used when the signa
  • Page 1644. PMC BASIC INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 4.1.10 (1) Format RD. NOT. STK (Address) Bit number Address number (2) Stacks the intermediate results of a logical operations. Shifts the stack register left one bit, inverts the status of a signal at a specified address and sets it in ST0.
  • Page 165B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 4. PMC BASIC INSTRUCTIONS 4.1.11 (1) Format AND. STK (2) Induces a logical product from the operation results in ST0 and ST1, sets the result in ST1, and shifts the stack register right one bit. (3) See Fig. 4.1.10 and Table 4.1.10 for an example of using the AND.STK
  • Page 1664. PMC BASIC INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Table 4.1.13 Coding for Fig. 4.1.13 Coding sheet Status of operating result Step Instruction Address No. Bit No. Remarks ST2 ST1 ST0 Number 1 RD R0 . 0 A A C 2 OR X0 . 0 B A+B C Y0.0 3 SET Y0 . 0 – (A+B) +C output (4) Remarks The use of the
  • Page 167B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 4. PMC BASIC INSTRUCTIONS 4.1.14 (1) Format RST (Address) Bit No. Address No. (2) Logical product of inverted logical operation result ST0 with the content of the specified address is outputted to the same address. (3) Refer to the figure below for an example of usin
  • Page 1684. PMC BASIC INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 (4) Remarks The use of the PMC–PA3, SA2, SA3, SB2, SB3, and SC3 is restricted as follows: (a) Restriction of using Do not use RST like the following example 1, use them alone like the following example 2. R0.0 Y0.0 R0.0 Y0.0 (S) (S) X0.0 Y0.
  • Page 169B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS In preparing a sequence program, some functions such as the function for controlling rotation via the shorter path, are difficult to program with basic instructions, which perform only one–bit logical operations. T
  • Page 1705. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Table 5 (a) Types and processing of functional instructions (1) Part 2 Instruction Model Format 2 Processing Format 1 Format 3 PMC– PMC– (paper tape (Ladder) (program input) PA1 PA3 punch program) COME SUB29 S29 End of common line control f
  • Page 171B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS Table 5 (a) Types and processing of functional instructions (1) Part 3 Instruction Model Format 2 Processing Format 1 Format 3 PMC– PMC– (paper tape (Ladder) (program input) PA1 PA3 punch program) PSGNL SUB50 S50 Position signal output f f
  • Page 1725. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Table 5 (a) Types and processing of functional instructions (2) Part 1 Model Instruc- SUB Processing PMC– tion number PMC– PMC– PMC– PMC– PMC– PMC– PMC– PMC– PMC– NB/ SA1 SA2 SA3 SB SB2 SB3 SC SC3 NB6 NB2 END1 1 End of a first–level ladder
  • Page 173B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS Table 5 (a) Types and processing of functional instructions (2) Part 2 Model Instruc- SUB Processing PMC– tion number PMC– PMC– PMC– PMC– PMC– PMC– PMC– PMC– PMC– NB/ SA1 SA2 SA3 SB SB2 SB3 SC SC3 NB6 NB2 XMOV 18 Indexed data transfer f f f
  • Page 1745. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Table 5 (a) Types and processing of functional instructions (2) Part 3 Model Instruc- SUB Processing PMC– tion number PMC– PMC– PMC– PMC– PMC– PMC– PMC– PMC– PMC– NB/ SA1 SA2 SA3 SB SB2 SB3 SC SC3 NB6 NB2 AXCTL 53 PMC axes control f f f f f
  • Page 175B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS Table 5 (a) Types and processing of functional instructions (3) Part 1 Model SUB Series 16/18-MODEL Series 18- Name Processing Series 16/18-MODEL B number B/C MODEL B PMC-SB3 PMC-SB4 PMC-SC3 PMC-SC4 PMC-SA1 END1 1 First level program end f
  • Page 1765. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Table 5 (a) Types and processing of functional instructions (3) Part 2 Model SUB Series 16/18-MODEL Series 18- Name Processing Series 16/18-MODEL B number B/C MODEL B PMC-SB3 PMC-SB4 PMC-SC3 PMC-SC4 PMC-SA1 ADDB 36 Binary Addition f f f f f
  • Page 177B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS Table 5 (a) Types and processing of functional instructions (4) Part 1 Model SUB Name Processing Series 16-MODEL C/Series 18-MODEL C number PMC-SB5 PMC-SB6 END1 1 First level program end f f END2 2 Second level program end f f END3 48 Third
  • Page 1785. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Table 5 (a) Types and processing of functional instructions (4) Part 2 Model SUB Name Processing Series 16-MODEL C/Series 18-MODEL C number PMC-SB5 PMC-SB6 ADDB 36 Binary Addition f f SUB 20 Subtraction f f SUBB 37 Binary subtraction f f MU
  • Page 179B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS Table 5 (a) Types and processing of functional instructions (5) Part 1 Model SUB Series 21-MODEL B Name Processing number Series 0i-MODEL A PMC-SA1 PMC-SA3 END1 1 First level program end f f END2 2 Second level program end f f END3 48 Third
  • Page 1805. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Table 5 (a) Types and processing of functional instructions (5) Part 2 Model SUB Series 21-MODEL B Name Processing number Series 0i-MODEL A PMC-SA1 PMC-SA3 ADDB 36 Binary Addition f f SUB 20 Subtraction f f SUBB 37 Binary subtraction f f MU
  • Page 181B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS Table 5 (a) Types and Processing of Functional Instructions (6) Part 1 Model SUB Name Processing Series 16i MODEL A/Series 18i MODEL A number PMC–SB5 PMC–SB6 END1 1 First level program end f f END2 2 Second level program end f f END3 48 Thi
  • Page 1825. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Table 5 (a) Types and Processing of Functional Instructions (6) Part 2 Model SUB Name Processing Series 16i MODEL A/Series 18i MODEL A number PMC–SB5 PMC–SB6 ADDB 36 Binary addition f f SUB 20 BCD subtraction f f SUBB 37 Binary subtraction
  • Page 183B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS CAUTION With PMC–SB5/SB6 of the Series 16i/18i MODEL A, the DISP instruction can be used only to ensure compatibility with the Series 16 MODEL A/B. With the Series 16i/18i MODEL A, FANUC recommends the use of the DISPB instruction that prov
  • Page 1845. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Table 5 (a) Types and Processing of Functional Instructions (7) Part 1 Model SUB Name Processing Series 21i MODEL A number PMC–SA1 PMC–SA5 END1 1 First level program end f f END2 2 Second level program end f f END3 48 Third level program en
  • Page 185B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS Table 5 (a) Types and Processing of Functional Instructions (7) Part 2 Model SUB Name Processing Series 21i MODEL A number PMC–SA1 PMC–SA5 ADDB 36 Binary addition f f SUB 20 BCD subtraction f f SUBB 37 Binary subtraction f f MUL 21 BCD mult
  • Page 1865. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Table 5 (a) Types and Processing of Functional Instructions (8) Part 1 Model Com- SUB Series 16i /18i /21i – mand Description Series 21i–MODEL B Name Number MODEL B PMC–SA1 PMC–SB7 END1 1 1st Level program end f f END2 2 2nd Level program e
  • Page 187B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS Table 5 (a) Types and Processing of Functional Instructions (8) Part 2 Model Com- SUB Series 16i /18i /21i – mand Description Series 21i–MODEL B Name Number MODEL B PMC–SA1 PMC–SB7 XMOV 18 Indexed data transfer f f XMOVB 35 Binary indexed d
  • Page 1885. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Table 5 (a) Types and Processing of Functional Instructions (8) Part 3 Model Com- SUB Series 16i /18i /21i – mand Description Series 21i–MODEL B Name Number MODEL B PMC–SA1 PMC–SB7 SPE 72 End of subprogram f NOP 70 No operation (Net comment
  • Page 189B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS Table 5 (a) Types and Processing of Functional Instructions (9) Part 1 Type Comm- SUB mand Description Series 0i–MODEL B Name Number PMC–SA1 PMC–SB7 END1 1 1st Level program end f f END2 2 2nd Level program end f f END3 48 3rd Level program
  • Page 1905. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Table 5 (a) Types and Processing of Functional Instructions (9) Part 2 Type Com- SUB mand Description Series 0i–MODEL B Name Number PMC–SA1 PMC–SB7 XMOVB 35 Binary indexed data transfer f f ADD 19 Addition f f ADDB 36 Binary addition f f SU
  • Page 191B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS NOTE 1 These are new functions that are added to PMC–SB7. Refer to following description. 2 These specifications are improved for PMC–SB7. Refer to following description. 3 These are ignored like NOP if these are programmed in ladder. There
  • Page 1925. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Table 5 (a) Types and Processing of Functional Instructions (10) Part 1 Type Com- SUB mand Description Series 0i Mate–MODEL A/B Name Number PMC–SA1 END1 1 1st Level program end f END2 2 2nd Level program end f END3 48 3rd Level program end
  • Page 193B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS Table 5 (a) Types and Processing of Functional Instructions (10) Part 2 Type Com- SUB mand Description Series 0i Mate–MODEL A/B Name Number PMC–SA1 XMOV 18 Indexed data transfer f XMOVB 35 Binary indexed data transfer f ADD 19 Addition f AD
  • Page 1945. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Table 5 (a) Types and Processing of Functional Instructions (10) Part 3 Type Com- SUB mand Description Series 0i Mate–MODEL A/B Name Number PMC–SA1 SPE 72 End of subprogram NOP 70 No operation (Net comment) f : Not available f : Available T
  • Page 195B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS Table 5 (b) Execution Time Constants of Functional Instructions (2) Instruc- SUB Model Processing tion Number PMC–SB PMC–SC DSCH 17 Data search 237 287 DSCHB 34 Binary data search 351 596 XMOV 18 Indexed data transfer 26 38 XMOVB 35 Binary
  • Page 1965. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Execution time constant: This constant represents how many times the execution time of a functional instruction corresponds to the execution time of 10 basic instructions (about 1.5µs) . The execution time of a basic instruction is about 0.
  • Page 197B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS Table 5 (c) Coding of function instruction Coding sheet Status of operating result Step Address Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0 Number No. 1 RD R1 . 0 A A 2 AND R1 . 1 B A@B 3 RD. STK R2 . 4 C A@B C 4 AND. NOT R3 . 1 D A@B C@D 5
  • Page 1985. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 (5) W1 The operation results of a functional instruction, when represented with one bit of 1 or 0, is output to W1 whose address can be determined freely by the programmer. Its meaning varies with each functional instruction. Note that some
  • Page 199B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS (b) Binary code data The basic data handled with the binary code is of 1 byte (–128 to +127), 2 bytes (–32,768 to +32,767) and 4 bytes (–99,999,999 to +99,999,999). The data is stored at addresses R200, R201, R202 and R203 as shown below. 1
  • Page 2005. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 * When 2–byte or 4–byte data is handled, assigning even addresses to addresses marked with * reduces the time required to execute functional instructions. A + B = C Error output RST ADDB * * * ffff ffff ffff ffff W1 ACT Address Address Addr
  • Page 201B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.1 END1 (1ST LEVEL SEQUENCE PROGRAM END) 5.1.1 Must be specifies once in a sequence program, either at the end of the 1st Function level sequence, or at the beginning of the 2nd level sequence when there is no 1st level sequence. 5.1.2 Fig
  • Page 2025. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.2 END2 (2ND LEVEL SEQUENCE PROGRAM END) 5.2.1 Specify at the end of the 2nd level sequence. Function 5.2.2 Fig.5.2.2 shows the expression format and Table 5.2.2 shows the coding Format format. END2 (SUB 2) Fig. 5.2.2 Format of END.2 Table
  • Page 203B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.3 END3 (END OF 3RD LEVEL SEQUENCE) (PMC–SC/SC3/SC4/ NB/NB2/NB6/NB7 ONLY) 5.3.1 Specify this command at the end of the 3rd level sequence program, i.e. it indicates the end of the sequence program. If there is no 3rd level Function sequenc
  • Page 2045. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.4 TMR (TIMER) 5.4.1 This is an on–delay timer. Function 5.4.2 Fig.5.4.4 (a) shows description format and Table 5.4.4 shows coding Format format. 5.4.3 ACT=0: Turns off the timer relay (TMff). Control Condition ACT=1: Initiates the timer.
  • Page 205B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.4.5 The timer can be set via the CRT/MDI unit of the CNC (See Chapter II). Setting Timers The setting time is every 48 ms for timer number 1 to 8 and every 8 ms for timer number 9 to 40. A time less than 48 ms is discarded for timer numbe
  • Page 2065. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.5 TMRB (FIXED TIMER) 5.5.1 This timer is used as a fixed on–delay timer. The variable timer in section Function 5.4 sets time of the timer into the nonvolatile memory, and can be reset via the CRT/MDI when necessary. Time present in this
  • Page 207B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS (b) Preset time is 8 to 262,136 ms. Processing is done every 8 ms in this fixed timer. The preset time is therefore integral times of 8 ms and the odds are omitted. For example, when set 38 ms, 38=8 4+6, the odd 6 is omitted, and the preset
  • Page 2085. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.6 TMRC (TIMER) 5.6.1 This is the on–delay timer. A timer setting time is set at an arbitrary address. The selection of an Function address determines whether the timer is a variable timer or fixed timer. No limit is imposed on the number
  • Page 209B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS For PMC–SB7 : Timer accuracy Setting number The range of setting time (Note) Margin of error 8msec 0 8msec to about 262.1sec 0 to + Level 1 Sweep Interval 48msec 1 48msec to about 26.2 min 0 to + Level 1 Sweep Interval 1sec 2 1sec to about
  • Page 2105. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.6.7 As shown in Fig. 5.6.7, after ACT is set to 1, the timer relay is turned on Timer Relay (TMff) once the time specified in this command has elapsed. ACT TM ff T T indicates the time set in this timer command. Fig. 5.6.7 Timer operation
  • Page 211B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.7 DEC (DECODE) 5.7.1 Outputs 1 when the two–digit BCD code signal is equal to a specified Function number, and 0 when not. Is used mainly to decode M or T function. 5.7.2 Fig.5.7.2 and Table 5.7.2 show the expression format and Table 5.7.
  • Page 2125. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.7.5 There are two paths, the number and the number of digits. Decode Specification Decode specification f f f f Number of digits specification Number specification (i) Number: Specify the decode number. Must always be decoded in two digit
  • Page 213B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.8 DECB (BINARY DECODING) 5.8.1 DECB decodes one, two, or four–byte binary code data. When one of the Function specified eight consecutive numbers matches the code data, a logical high value (value 1) is set in the output data bit which co
  • Page 2145. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 DECB ffff Decode result output ffff 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Code data (SUB 25) Decode designating number +0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 1, 2 or 4–byte binary code data Decode designating number +8 8n–1 8(n–1) Decode designating number +(8n–1) Decode desi
  • Page 215B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.8.3 (a) Command (ACT) Control Conditions ACT=0 : Resets all the output data bits. ACT=1 : Decodes data. Results of processing is set in the output data address. 5.8.4 (a) Format specification Parameters Set the size of code data to the 1s
  • Page 2165. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.9 CTR (COUNTER) 5.9.1 CTR is used as a counter. Counters are used for various purposes for NC Function Machine tools. Numerical data such as preset values and count values can be used with either BCD format or binary format by a system pa
  • Page 217B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.9.2 Fig.5.9.2 show the expression format and Table 5.9.2 show the coding Format format. CN0 fff. f CTR ffff (SUB 5) UPDOWN Count up output fff. f W1 RST fff. f fff. f ACT fff. f Counter number Instruction (SUB 5) Control condition Fig. 5.
  • Page 2185. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.9.3 (a) Specify the initial value. (CN0) Control Conditions CN0=0: Begins the value of the counter with 0. 0, 1, 2, 3 ····· n. CN0=1: Begins the value of the counter with 1 (0 is not used). 1, 2, 3 ····· n. (b) Specify up or down counter.
  • Page 219B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.9.5 When the count is up to a preset value, W1=1. The address of W1 can be Countup Output (W1) determined arbitrarily. When the counter reaches the set value, W1 is set to 1. When the counter reaches 0 or 1, W1 is set to 1. 5.9.6 [Example
  • Page 2205. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 [Example 2] Use of the counter to store the position of a rotor. (See Fig.5.9.6 (b)) L1 “1” R200.1 R200.1 L1 R200.1 L1 (3) (CN0) R200.1 REV (2) (UPDOWN) CTR 0002 R200.1 L1 (SUB 5) (1) (RST) R200.0 R200.1 POS (0) (ACT) X36.0 Fig. 5.9.6 (b) L
  • Page 221B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS (d) Count signal The count signal POS turns on and off 12 times each time the rotor rotates once. (2) Counter number and W1 In this example, the second counter is used. The result of W1 is not used, but its address must be determined. (3) O
  • Page 2225. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.10 PMC–SB7 CTRB (FIXED O COUNTER) 5.10.1 CTRB is used as a counter. Numerical data such as preset values and count Functions values can be used with binary format. This counter has the following functions to meet various applications. (a)
  • Page 223B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS Table 5.10.2 CTRB cording format Step Address Bit Instruction Remarks number number number 1 RD OOOO.O CN0 2 RD.STK OOOO.O UPDOWN 3 RD.STK OOOO.O RST 4 RD.STK OOOO.O ACT 5 SUB 56 CTRB command 6 (PRM) OOOO Counter Number 7 (PRM) OOOO Preset
  • Page 2245. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.11 CTRC (COUNTER) 5.11.1 The numeral data of this counter are all binary. This counter has the following functions and can be used according to the application: Functions (a) Preset counter Preset the count value and if the count reaches
  • Page 225B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.11.3 (a) Specifying the initial value (CN0) Control Conditions CN0=0 : The count value starts with “0”. 0, 1, 2, 3, . . . n CN0=1 : The count value starts with “1”. 1, 2, 3, . . . n (b) Specifying up or down count (UPDOWN) UPDOWN=0: Up co
  • Page 2265. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.11.5 The first address of the counter register field is set. Counter Register The continuous 4–byte memory space from the first address is required for this field. Field D is normally used. Address Counter register +0 CTR Count value Coun
  • Page 227B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.12 ROT (ROTATION CONTROL) 5.12.1 Controls rotors, such as the tool post, ATC, rotary table, etc., and is used Function for the following functions. (a) Selection of the rotation direction via the shorter path (b) Calculation of the number
  • Page 2285. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Table 5.12.2 Coding for Fig.5.12.2 Coding sheet Status of operating result Step Instruc- Address Bit No. Remarks ST5 ST4 ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0 Number tion No. 1 RD ffff . f RN0 RN0 2 RD. STK ffff . f BYT RN0 BYT 3 RD. STK ffff . f DIR RN0 BYT DIR
  • Page 229B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.12.4 Specify the rotor indexing number. Rotor Indexing Number 5.12.5 Specify the address storing the current position. Current Position Address 5.12.6 Specify the address storing the goal position (or command value), for Goal Position Add
  • Page 2305. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.13 ROTB (BINARY ROTATION CONTROL) 5.13.1 This instruction is used to control rotating elements including the tool Function post, ATC (Automatic Tool Changer), rotary table, etc. In the ROT command (5.12) a parameter indicating the number
  • Page 231B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.13.4 (a) Format Parameters Specifies data length (1, 2, or 4 bytes). Use the first digit of the parameter to specify the number of bytes. 1 : 1 byte 2 : 2 bytes 4 : 4 bytes All numerical data (number of indexed positions for the rotating
  • Page 2325. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 A A Logic 1 R0228.0 R0228.0 A R0228.0 A (4) ROTB 4 D0000 X0041 F0026 R0230 (SUB 26) CR– Shorter R0228.0 CCW path or not A R0228.1 (3) Refer– Rotor Current Goal Calcula– ence indexing position position tion R0228.0 data number address addres
  • Page 233B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.14 COD (CODE CONVERSION) 5.14.1 Converts BCD codes into an arbitrary two– or four–digits BCD numbers. Function For code conversion shown in Fig.5.14.1 the conversion input data address, conversion table, and convert data output address mu
  • Page 2345. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.14.2 Fig.5.14.2 shows the format for the COD instruction and Table 5.14.2 Format shows the coding format. BYT ffff. f COD Error output RST (SUB 7) ffff ffff ffff W1 ffff. f ACT ffff. f Converted data output address Conversion input data a
  • Page 235B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.14.3 (a) Specify the data size. Control Conditions BYT=0 : Specifies that the conversion table data is to be BCD two digits. BYT=1 : Specifies that the conversion table data is to be BCD four digits. (b) Error output reset RST=0 : Disable
  • Page 2365. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.15 CODB (BINARY CODE CONVERSION) 5.15.1 This instruction converts data in binary format to an optional binary Function format 1–byte, 2–byte, or 4–byte data. Conversion input data address, conversion table, and conversion data output addr
  • Page 237B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.15.3 (a) Reset (RST) Control Conditions RST=0 : Do not reset. RST=1 : Reset error output W1 (W1=0). (b) Activate command (ACT) ACT=0 : Do not execute CODB instruction ACT=1 : Execute CODB instruction. 5.15.4 (a) Format designation Paramet
  • Page 2385. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.16 MOVE (LOGICAL PRODUCT TRANSFER) 5.16.1 ANDs logical multiplication data and input data, and outputs the results Function to a specified address. Can also be used to remove unnecessary bits from an eight–bit signal in a specific address
  • Page 239B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.16.3 ACT=0 : Move instruction not executed. Execution Command ACT=1 : Executed. 5.16.4 If a code signal and another signal co–exist at address X35 for an input Example of Using the signal from the machine tool, to compare the code signal
  • Page 2405. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.17 MOVOR (DATA TRANSFER AFTER LOGICAL SUM) 5.17.1 This instruction ORs the input data and the logical sum data and transfers the result to the destination. Function Input data Logical sum data OR Output data 5.17.2 Fig.5.17.2 shows the ex
  • Page 241B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.18 COM (COMMON LINE CONTROL) 5.18.1 Ę : Can be used COM (Common Line : Cannot be used Control) PA1 PA3 SA1 SA2 SA3 SA5 SB SB2 SB3 SB4 SB5 SB6 SB7 SC SC3 SC4 NB NB2 NB6 f f This function can be used for specifying the number of coils only
  • Page 2425. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.18.1.2 Fig.5.18.1.2 (a) shows the expression format of COM Format COM ffff SUB 9 Number of turned–off coils Fig. 5.18.1.2 (a) Expression format of COM ACT COM 2 (a) A B W1 ACT=1 11.0 11.1 (b) C W2 D (a) When COM ACT=1, execution B F G beg
  • Page 243B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.18.3 (a) Number of turned–off coils Parameter Specify 0 to 9999. 0 : Region specification Other than 0: Coil number specification ACT A B W1 ACT C W2 D E F G W3 Fig. 5.18.3 (a) Relay circuit example CAUTION 1 A functional instruction in a
  • Page 2445. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.18.4 Ę : Can be used COM (Common Line : Cannot be used Control) PA1 PA3 SA1 SA2 SA3 SA5 SB SB2 SB3 SB4 SB5 SB6 SB7 SC SC3 SC4 NB NB2 NB6 f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f 5.18.5 The COM instruction controls the coils in a range up to
  • Page 245B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.18.7 ACT = 0 : The coils in the specified range are unconditionally turned Control Conditions off (set to 0). ACT = 1 : The same operation as when COM is not used is performed. 5.18.8 (a) Specify 0. (Range specification only) Parameters N
  • Page 2465. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.18.9 Do not create a program in which a combination of JMP and JMPE Caution instructions is used to cause a jump to and from a sequence between the COM and COME instructions; the ladder sequence may not be able to operate normally after t
  • Page 247B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.19 COME (COMMON LINE CONTROL END) 5.19.1 This instruction indicates the division in the region specification of the Function common line control instruction (COM). This instruction cannot be used alone. It must he used together with the C
  • Page 2485. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.20 JMP (JUMP) 5.20.1 Ę : Can be used JMP (Jump) : Cannot be used PA1 PA3 SA1 SA2 SA3 SA5 SB SB2 SB3 SB4 SB5 SB6 SB7 SC SC3 SC4 NB NB2 NB6 f f This function can be used for specifying the number of coils only on the PMC–SB/SC. On other PMC
  • Page 249B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.20.3 Format ACT JMP ffff Number SUB 10 of jumped coils 5.20.4 ACT=0 : Nojump.Processing begins with the step after the JMP instruction. ACT=1 : The logic instructions contained within the specified number of Control Conditions coils or th
  • Page 2505. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.20.6 Fig.5.20.6 shows a ladder diagram for the JMP instruction. When Operation ACT=0, the next step to the JMP instruction is executed. When ACT=1, logical operations are skipped according to the specified number of coils. Note that, when
  • Page 251B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.20.7 Ę : Can be used JMP (Jump) : Cannot be used PA1 PA3 SA1 SA2 SA3 SA5 SB SB2 SB3 SB4 SB5 SB6 SB7 SC SC3 SC4 NB NB2 NB6 f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f 5.20.7.1 The JMP instruction causes a departure from the normal sequence to Fu
  • Page 2525. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.20.7.3 ACT=1 : The logical instructions (including functional instructions) in Control Conditions the specified range are skipped; program execution proceeds to the next step. ACT=0 : The same operation as when JMP is not used is performe
  • Page 253B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.21 JMPE (JUMP END) 5.21.1 This instruction indicates the division in the region specification of the Function jump instruction (JMP). It cannot be used alone. It must be used together with the JMP instruction. 5.21.2 Format JMPE SUB 30 21
  • Page 2545. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.22 PARI (PARITY CHECK) 5.22.1 Checks the parity of code signals, and outputs an error if an abnormality Function is detected. Secifies either an even– or odd–parity check. Only one–byte (eight bits) of data can be checked. 5.22.2 Fig.5.22
  • Page 255B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.22.3 (a) Specify even or odd. Control Conditions O.E=0 : Even–parity check O.E=1 : Odd–parity check (b) Reset RST=0 : Disables reset. RST=1 : Sets error output W1 to 0. That is, when a parity error occurs, setting RST to 1 results in rese
  • Page 2565. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.23 DCNV (DATA CONVERSION) 5.23.1 Converts binary–code into BCD–code and vice versa. Function 5.23.2 Fig.5.23.2 shows the expression format and Table 5.23.2 shows the Format coding format. BYT (3) (1) (1) fff. f DCNV CNV (2) (SUB 14) ffff
  • Page 257B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.23.3 (a) Specify data size. Control Conditions BYT=0 : Process data in length of one byte (8 bits) BYT=1 : Process data in length of two byte (16 bits) (b) Specify the type of conversion CNV=0 : Converts binary–code into BCD–code. CNV=1 :
  • Page 2585. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.24 DCNVB (EXTENDED DATA CONVERSION) 5.24.1 This instruction converts 1, 2, and 4–byte binary code into BCD code or Function vice versa. To execute this instruction, you must preserve the necessary number of bytes in the memory for the con
  • Page 259B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.24.4 (a) Format specification Parameters Specify data length (1,2, or 4 bytes). Use the first digit of the parameter to specify byte length. 1 : one byte 2 : two bytes 4 : four bytes (b) Input data address Specify the address containing t
  • Page 2605. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.25 COMP (COMPARISON) 5.25.1 Compares input and comparison values. Function 5.25.2 Fig.5.25.2 shows the expression format and Table 5.25.2 shows the Format coding format. BYT COMP f ffff ffff (SUB 15) Comparison fff.f result output W1 ACT
  • Page 261B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.25.3 (a) Specify the data size. Control Conditions BYT=0 : Process data (input value and comparison value) is BCD two digits long. BYT=1 : Process data (input value and comparison value) is four digits long. (b) Execution command ACT=0 :
  • Page 2625. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.26 COMPB (COMPARISON BETWEEN BINARY DATA) 5.26.1 This instruction compares 1, 2, and 4–byte binary data with one another. Function Results of comparison are set in the operation output register (R9000). Sufficient number of bytes are nece
  • Page 263B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.26.5 The data involved in the operation are set in this register. This register is Operation Output set with data on operation. If register bit 1 is on, they indicate the following: Register (R9000) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R9000 Zero (input data=
  • Page 2645. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.27 COIN (COINCIDENCE CHECK) 5.27.1 Checks whether the input value and comparison value coincide. Function This instruction is available with BCD data. 5.27.2 Fig.5.27.2 shows the expression format and Table 5.27.2 shows the Format coding
  • Page 265B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.27.3 (a) Specify the data size. Control Conditions BYT=0 : Process data (input value, and comparison values). Each BCD is two digits long. BYT=1 : Each BCD four digits long. (b) Execution command ACT=0 : The COIN instruction is not execut
  • Page 2665. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.28 SFT (SHIFT REGISTER) 5.28.1 This instruction shifts 2–byte (16–bit) data by a bit to the left or right. Note that W1=1 when data “1” is shifted from the left extremity (bit 15) Function in left shift or from the right extremity (bit 0)
  • Page 267B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Left shift 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 Each bit shifts leftward. Status 1 remains unchanged (c) Reset (RST) The shifted out data (W1=1) is reset (W1=0). RST=0 : W1 is not reset. RST=1 : W1 is reset
  • Page 2685. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.29 DSCH (DATA SEARCH) 5.29.1 DSCH is only valid for data tables (see section 6.3) which can be used by Function the PMC. DSCH searches the data table for a specified data, outputs an address storing it counting from the beginning of the d
  • Page 269B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS Table 5.29.2 DSCH instruction coding Coding sheet Memory status of control condition Step Instruc- Address Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0 Number tion No. 1 RD fff . f BYT BYT 2 RD. STK fff . f RST BYT RST 3 RD. STK fff . f ACT BYT RST ACT
  • Page 2705. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.29.7 If the data being searched for is found, the internal number of the table Search Result Output storing the data is output to this field. This address field is called a search result output address field. Address The search result out
  • Page 271B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.30 DSCHB (BINARY DATA SEARCH) 5.30.1 Alike the DSCH instruction of Section 5.29, this function instruction Function instructs data search in the data table. There are two differences; the numerical data handled in this instruction are all
  • Page 2725. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.30.3 (a) Reset (RST) Control Conditions RST=0 : Release reset RST=1 : Reset. W1=”0”. (b) Activation command ACT=0 : Do not execute DSCHB instruction. W1 does not change. ACT=1 : Execute DSCHB instruction. If the search data is found, tabl
  • Page 273B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.31 XMOV (INDEXED DATA TRANSFER) 5.31.1 Reads or rewrites the contents of the data table. Like the DSCH Function instruction, XMOV is only valid for data tables which can be used by the PMC. NOTE The data table heading address specified he
  • Page 2745. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Table 5.31.2 XMOV instruction coding Coding sheet Memory status of control conditions Step Instruc- Address Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0 Number tion No. 1 RD fff . f BYT BYT 2 RD. STK fff . f RW BYT RW 3 RD. STK fff . f RST BYT RW RST 4
  • Page 275B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.31.7 The table internal number storage address is the address storing the table Address Storing the internal number of the data to be read or rewritten. This address requires memory specified by the formaat designation Table Internal Numb
  • Page 2765. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.32 XMOVB (BINARY INDEX MODIFIER DATA TRANSFER) 5.32.1 Alike the XMOV instruction of Section 5.31, this function instruction Function instructs reading and rewriting of data in the data. There are two differences; the numerical data handle
  • Page 277B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS The number of data table elements : M (It specifies the storage address of number of data table elements) The number of index array elements : N (It specifies the format specification) DT[0] D I[0] 1 S[0] A DT[1] A I[1] 3 S[1] B DT[2] I[2]
  • Page 2785. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 The number of data table elements : M (It specifies the storage address of number of data table elements) The number of index array elements : N (It specifies the format specification) S[0] A I[0] 1 DT[0] D S[1] B I[1] 3 DT[1] A S[2] C I[2]
  • Page 279B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.32.3 (a) Read, write designation (RW) Control Conditions RW=0 : Read data from data table. RW=1 : Write data to data table. (b) Reset (RST) RST=0 : Reset release. RST=1 : Reset. W1=0. (c) Activation command (ACT) ACT=0: Do not execute XMO
  • Page 2805. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 (b) Storage address of number of data table elements Set to the memory at the byte length which set the number of the data table elements in “(a) Format specification” and set the address to this parameter. The effective range of number of
  • Page 281B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.32.5 W1=0 : No error Error Output (W1) W1=1 : Error found. In the case where the index value set in “(e) Index storage address” exceeds the value set in “(b) Storage address of number of data table elements”, it becomes W1=1. The reading
  • Page 2825. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 (b) Write data to data table (extended specification) The number of data table elements : R0=9 The number of index array elements : 4 RW=1 XMOVB 0041 R0 R200 R100 D0 RST=0 W1 ACT=1 R100 A D0 2 R200 D R101 B D1 5 R201 R102 C D2 8 R202 A R103
  • Page 283B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.33 ADD (ADDITION) 5.33.1 Adds BCD two–or four–digit data. Function 5.33.2 Fig.5.33.2 shows the expression format and Table 5.33.2 shows the Format coding format. A + B = C BYT (2) ADD (1) (2) (3) (4) ffff.f Error output RST (1) f ffff fff
  • Page 2845. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.33.3 (a) Specify the number of digits of data. Control Conditions BYT=0 : Data is BCD two digits long. BYT=1 : Data is BCD four digits long. (b) Reset RST=0 : Release reset. RST=1 : Resets error output W1, that is, sets W1 to 0. (c) Execu
  • Page 285B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.34 ADDB (BINARY ADDITION) 5.34.1 This instruction performs binary addition between 1–, 2–, and 4–byte Function data. In the operation result register (R9000), operating data is set besides the numerical data representing the operation res
  • Page 2865. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.34.4 (a) Format specification Parameters Specifies data length (1,2, and 4 bytes) and the format for the addend (constant or address). 0 0 Data length specification 1 : 1 byte length data 2 : 2 bytes length data 4 : 4 bytes length data Fo
  • Page 287B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.35 SUB (SUBTRACTION) 5.35.1 Subtracts BCD two–or four–digit data. Function 5.35.2 Fig.5.35.2 shows the expression format and Table 5.35.2 shows the Format coding format. BYT (2) SUB (1) ffff.f Error output RST (1) f ffff ffff ffff W1 ffff
  • Page 2885. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.35.3 (a) Specification of the number of digits of data. Control Conditions BYT=0 : Data BCD two digits long BYT=1 : Data BCD four digits long 5.35.4 RST=0 : Release reset. RST=1 : Resets error output W1, that is, sets W1 to 0. Reset 5.35.
  • Page 289B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.36 SUBB (BINARY SUBTRACTION) 5.36.1 This instruction subtracts one data from another, both data being in the Function binary format of 1, 2 or 4 bytes. In the operation result register (R9000), operation data is set besides the numerical
  • Page 2905. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.36.4 (a) Format specification Parameters Specifies data length (1, 2, and 4 bytes) and the format for the subtrahend (constant or address). 0 0 Data length specification 1 : 1 byte length data 2 : 2 bytes length data 4 : 4 bytes length da
  • Page 291B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.37 MUL (MULTIPLICATION) 5.37.1 Multiplies BCD two–or four–digit data. The product must also be BCD Function two–or four–digit data. 5.37.2 Fig.5.37.2 shows the expression format and Table 5.37.2 shows the Format coding format. A × B = C B
  • Page 2925. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.37.3 (a) Specify the number of digits of data. Control Conditions BYT=0 : Data is BCD two digits long. BYT=1 : Data is BCD four digits long. (b) Reset RST=0 : Releases reset. RST=1 : Resets error output W1, that is, sets W1 to 0. (c) Exec
  • Page 293B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.38 MULB (BINARY MULTIPLICATION) 5.38.1 This instruction multiplies 1–, 2–, and 4–byte binary data items. In the Function operation result register (R9000), operation data is set besides the numerical data representing the operation. A req
  • Page 2945. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.38.4 (a) Format specification Parameters Specifies data length (1, 2, and 4 bytes) and the format for the multiplier (constant or address). 0 0 Data length specification 1 : 1 byte length data 2 : 2 bytes length data 4 : 4 bytes length da
  • Page 295B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.39 DIV (DIVISION) 5.39.1 Divides BCD two–or four–digit data. Remainders are discarded. Function 5.39.2 Fig.5.39.2 shows the expression format and Table 5.39.2 shows the Format coding format. BYT (2) DIV (1) (2) (3) (4) ffff.f Error output
  • Page 2965. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.39.3 (a) Specify the number of digits of data. Control Conditions BYT=0 : Data is BCD two digits long. BYT=1 : Data is BCD four digits long. (b) Reset RST=0 : Releases reset. RST=1 : Resets error output W1, that is, sets W1 to 0. (c) Exec
  • Page 297B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.40 DIVB (BINARY DIVISION) 5.40.1 This instruction divides binary data items 1, 2, and 4 byte in length. In the Function operation result register (R9000), operation data is set and remainder is set to R9002 and following addresses. A requ
  • Page 2985. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.40.4 (a) Format specification Parameters Specifies data length (1, 2, and 4 bytes) and the format for the divisor (constant or address). 0 0 Data length specification 1 : 1 byte length data 2 : 2 bytes length data 4 : 4 bytes length data
  • Page 299B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.41 NUME (DEFINITION OF CONSTANT) 5.41.1 Defines constants, when required. In this case, constants are defined with this instructions. Function 5.41.2 Fig.5.41.2 shows the expression format and Table 5.41.2 shows the Format coding format.
  • Page 3005. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.42 NUMEB (DEFINITION OF BINARY CONSTANTS) 5.42.1 This instruction defines 1, 2, or 4–bytes long binary constant. Data Function entered in decimal during programming is converted into binary data during program execution. The binary data i
  • Page 301B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.42.4 (a) Format specification Parameters Specifies data length (1, 2, or 4 bytes). Use the first parameter digit to specify byte length: 0001 : Binary data of 1 byte length 0002 : Binary data of 2 byte length 0004 : Binary data of 4 byte
  • Page 3025. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.43 DISP (MESSAGE DISPLAY) (PMC–SB/SB2/SB3/ SB4/SB5/SB6/SC/ SC3/SC4 ONLY) 5.43.1 DISP is used to display messages on the CRT screen, CNC of which enters alarm status. Message data to be displayed is specified after the Function parameters
  • Page 303B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS (1) (2) (3) Process end DISP ACT (SUB 49) ffff ffff ffff W1 fff. f Message control address Control condition Number of data of one message data Instruction Total sum of data of message data Message data Message number 1 2 Message data 1 Mes
  • Page 3045. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Table 5.43.2 DISP instruction coding Coding sheet Memory status of control conditions Step Instruc- Address Bit No. Remarks ST2 ST1 ST0 Number tion No. RD fff . f ACT ACT SUB 49 DISP ACT (PRM) ffff Total sum of data of message data (PRM) ff
  • Page 305B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.43.3 ACT=0: Nothing is processed. W1 does not change. Control Condition ACT=1: The specified message data is displayed or cleared. ACT must remain 1 until processing end is reported by W1. 5.43.4 (a) Total sum of message data of data: Par
  • Page 3065. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.43.5 (a) Message number: Message Data The specified number produces an appropriate event as follows. 1000 to 1999 (alarm message): The CNC is put in alarm status and the number and following data are displayed. The maximum number of the d
  • Page 307B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.43.6 W1=0 : Processing ends. Normally, W1=0. If W1=0 after W1=1, Error Output (W1) processing ends. W1=1 : In process. W1=1 when ACT=1. Table 5.43.6 Correspondince between characters and specified numbers Specified Corresponding Specified
  • Page 3085. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.43.7 The parameters and message data used by this functional instruction are Parameters and as follows. Message Data SUB49 Total sum of data of message data Parameter Number of data of one message item R200 Message control address (Specif
  • Page 309B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS Note) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Message Message Message Message Message Message Message Message Specified data data data data data data data data address Display 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 request Message Message Message Message Message Message Message Message
  • Page 3105. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 (c) ACT and W1 of the DISP instruction (a) Timing of ACT ON If EPCB = 0, ACT may be set to 1 with any timing. For instance, when all display–request bits are off or when the status displayed on the screen and the display requests are the sa
  • Page 311B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.43.9 (a) Display three types of messages with the following conditions. Examples of Using The SPER = 1 and “SPINDLE ALARM” (Message data 1) ATCER = 1 and “ACT ALARM” (Message data 2) DISP Instruction WORK = 1 and “WORK SET UP” (Message da
  • Page 3125. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Step Instruc- Number tion Address No. Bit No. Remarks ST2 ST1 ST0 RD R201.2 ACT SUB 49 (PRM) 30 Total sum of data of message data (PRM) 10 Number of data of one message (PRM) R220 Message control address (PRM) (PRM) 1010 Message No. 8380 SP
  • Page 313B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS (b) Using three DISP instructions and one external tool offset EPCB ACT Set ACT to 1 whenever no external tool offset is being precessed (EPCB=0) DISP ACT W1 1st DISP instruction DISP ACT W2 2nd DISP instruction DISP ACT W3 3rd DISP instruc
  • Page 3145. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.43.10 Conform to the following instruction format. Variable data, i.e., any Variable Data Display numeric value of up to four BCD digits, can be displayed. by Specifying Variable Data SUB49 Instruction format ffff Total number of steps in
  • Page 315B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS (2) Variable data address VVVV: Address of the area in which variable data is stored (3) Variable data Specify variable data consisting of up to four BCD digits (the number of digits specified for m) to be displayed at the address specified
  • Page 3165. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.44 DISPB 5.44.1 This instruction displays messages on the CNC screen. You can also Function specify the message number to generate an alarm in the CNC. This instruction supports special functions (numerical data display and kanji characte
  • Page 317B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS Message display request memory Message data table 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 A000.0 (Message data corresponding A0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 to address A000.0) A1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 A000.1 (Message data corresponding A2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 to address A000.1) | | =====
  • Page 3185. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 CRT/MDI keys requires two bytes (a half–width kana character) or four bytes (a kanji character or other full–width character). For details, see Section 5.44.6. (iv) Message number This message number consisting of 4 digits must always be de
  • Page 319B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS D Power Mate–D (two–path control) Message CNC Display contents number screen 1000 to 1999 Alarm message Alarm message screen (The 1st D The 1st path side of CNC is turned to alarm state. path side) 2000 to 2099 Operator Operator message mes
  • Page 3205. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 NOTE 1 The number of message number which you can display at the same time to the alarm screen on DPL/MDI is up to 3. 2 The number of character which you can display to the operator message screen on DPL/MDI is up to 32 characters. The mess
  • Page 321B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.44.2 Format DISPB fff ACT (SUB 41) Number of message 5.44.3 ACT=0 : Do not display messages on the CRT. Conditions ACT=1 : Display the messages on the CRT. 5.44.4 (a) Number of messages Specifies the total number of messages (up to 200).
  • Page 3225. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.44.6 Message characters not covered by the CRT/MDI keys (kanji and Defining Characters half–width kana characters) can be input as follows: not found in the (a) Half–width kana characters CRT/MDI (i) Data format Numerical code enclosed by
  • Page 323B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS (iii) Example To input ATC? OK when characters A, T, C, O, and K are registered in the CRT/MDI unit, enter the following: 4434 3A3A 01 NOTE 1 To define @, enter @40...@, where 40 is the code corresponding to @40 . . . . . @ Code for @ 2 To
  • Page 3245. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.44.7 See I–9.3 for details. Notes when this Functional Instruction is Used in Subroutine 5.44.8 Foreign Language Display Power Mate/ FS20/ FS18A FS16A FS16B FS16C FS21i FS16i FS15B FS15i FS21A FS21B/ FS18B FS18C FS18i/ FS0iA FS0iB PA1 SA1
  • Page 325B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS Message table A0.0 Japanese 1 When A0.0 is turned on, Italian 1 is A0.1 English 1 displayed. (The message data is A0.2 Italian 1 shifted by 2 bits). A0.3 German 1 A0.4 Japanese 2 When A0.4 is turned on, Italian 2 is A0.5 English 2 displayed
  • Page 3265. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Example 3: As common alarm messages, English message data is displayed with A0.0 through A9.7. Operator messages are set starting at A10.0 in the order of Japanese, English, Italian, German and so on, with 40 successive messages assigned to
  • Page 327B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.45 EXIN (EXTERNAL DATA INPUT) 5.45.1 This instruction is used for external data (external tool compensation, Function external message function, external program number search, external workpiece coordinates shift, etc.) input. You must u
  • Page 3285. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.45.2 Format ACT EXIN ffff W1 (SUB 42) Control data address Fig. 5.45.2 EXIN instruction format 5.45.3 ACT=0 : Do not process external data input/output. ACT=1 : Process external data input/output. Control Conditions ACT is to be maintaine
  • Page 329B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.45.4 (a) Control data (except PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) Parameter The control data needs 4 continuous bytes from the specification address. The path is specified to the 1st byte. The addresses G0 to G2 of the interface from PMC to NC are specified
  • Page 3305. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 (ii) 2nd path CTL+0 : 2 CTL+1 to CTL+3 : Data to be specified for G1000 to G1002 In case of the extended specification (program number O8 digits etc.), it sets CTL+1 to CTL+5 as follows. CTL+1 to CTL+2 : Data to be specified for G1000 to G1
  • Page 331B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS In 15–TT, set command data in first CTL+0 – +7 by the same data form as G112–119 of BMI interface. The data output from NC is written in CTL+8 – +15 in the same data form as BMI interface F112–119. CTL+0 to to EISTB, EOREND etc CTL+8 +1 EOS
  • Page 3325. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.45.6 If any of the following errors occurs during external data input, the bit in Operation Output the operation output register is set. In this case, external data transfer ends (W1 = 1). Register 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R9000 EXIN error (Descri
  • Page 333B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.46 WINDR (READING CNC WINDOW DATA) 5.46.1 This function reads various data items via the window between the PMC Function and the CNC. The “WINDR” is classified into two types. One type completes reading a data during one scan time. Anothe
  • Page 3345. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.46.5 Control Data CTL+0 Function code * Set the control data area by sequence program before executing the “WINDR” +2 Completion code or “WINDW”. +4 Data length +6 Data number +8 Data attribute * Only the size of the read data is +10 Read
  • Page 335B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.46.6 W1=0 : “W1” is usually reset. The “W1=0” indicates that the “WINDR” Reading Completion is not executed or the ”WINDR” being executed now. W1=1 : “W1” is set when the reading a data is completed by the reading (W1) command (ACT=1). If
  • Page 3365. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.47 WINDW (WRITING CNC WINDOW DATA) 5.47.1 This function writes various data items via the window between the PMC Function and the CNC. 5.47.2 Format ACT W1 WINDW Control data (SUB 52) address Fig. 5.47.2 5.47.3 ACT=0 : The WINDW function
  • Page 337B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.47.5 Control Data * Set the control data area by sequence CTL+0 Function code program before executing the +2 Completion code ”WINDR” or ”WINDW”. +4 Data length +6 Data number +8 Data attribute +10 Writing data +42 See Appendixies NO TAG
  • Page 3385. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.47.6 W1=0 : “W1” is usually reset. The “W1=0” indicates that the Writing Completion “WINDW” is not executed or the “WINDW” being executed now. (W1) W1=1 : “W1” is set when the writing a data is completed by the writing command (ACT=1). As
  • Page 339B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.48 ARBITRARY FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.48.1 FNC 90 to 97 (Arbitrary Functional Instructions) (Only for PMC–SC/SC3/NB/NB2) 5.48.1.1 These functional instructions (SUB90 to SUB97) are used to execute the Function arbitrary functional instru
  • Page 3405. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.48.1.5 Set the control data to be used by an arbitrary functional instruction. Control Data If the control data is determined as follows, for example, the person who created the ladder program determines a control address to set the contr
  • Page 341B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.48.2 Creating an Arbitrary Function 5.48.2.1 (a) Execution command (ACT) Arbitrary Functional The contents of the execution command can be referenced by bit 1 at R9010. Instruction and Interface (b) Control data address The address where
  • Page 3425. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.49 MMCWR (READING MMC WINDOW DATA) (OTHER THAN PMC–PA1/PA3) 5.49.1 This command reads up to 32 bytes of data via the window between PMC and MMC. The data can be determined as required between the PMC Function ladder program and MMC applic
  • Page 343B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.49.4 (a) Input data length address (two bytes) Parameters Specifies the length of input data transferred from MMC. When transfer is completed, the length of data actually transferred is stored. The maximum data length is 32 bytes. (b) Inp
  • Page 3445. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.50 MMCWW (WRITING MMC WINDOW DATA) (OTHER THAN PMC–PA1/PA3) 5.50.1 This command writes data containing up to 32 bytes via the window between PMC and MMC. The data can be determined as required Function between the PMC ladder program and M
  • Page 345B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.50.4 (a) Output data length address (two bytes) Parameters Specifies the length of output data transferred to MMC. The maximum data length is 32 bytes. (b) Output data address Specifies the area storing data to be transferred to MMC. An a
  • Page 3465. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.51 f : Can be used : Cannot be used MOVB (TRANSFER PA1 PA3 SA1 SA2 SA3 SA5 SB SB2 SB3 SB4 SB5 SB6 SB7 SC SC3 SC4 NB NB2 NB6 OF 1 BYTE) f f f f f f f f f f f f f 5.51.1 The MOVB instruction transfers 1–byte data from a specified source add
  • Page 347B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.52 f : Can be used : Cannot be used MOVW (TRANSFER PA1 PA3 SA1 SA2 SA3 SA5 SB SB2 SB3 SB4 SB5 SB6 SB7 SC SC3 SC4 NB NB2 NB6 OF 2 BYTES) f f f f f f f f f f f f f 5.52.1 The MOVW instruction transfers 2–byte data from a specified source ad
  • Page 3485. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.53 f : Can be used : Cannot be used MOVN (TRANSFER PA1 PA3 SA1 SA2 SA3 SA5 SB SB2 SB3 SB4 SB5 SB6 SB7 SC SC3 SC4 NB NB2 NB6 OF AN ARBITRARY f f f f f f f f f f f f f NUMBER OF BYTES) 5.53.1 The MOVN instruction transfers data consisting o
  • Page 349B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.54 f : Can be used : Cannot be used MOVD (TRANSFER PA1 PA3 SA1 SA2 SA3 SA5 SB SB2 SB3 SB4 SB5 SB6 SB7 SC SC3 SC4 NB NB2 NB6 OF 4 BYTES) f 5.54.1 The MOVD instruction transfers 4 bytes data from a specified source address to a specified de
  • Page 3505. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.55 f : Can be used : Cannot be used DIFU (RISING EDGE PA1 PA3 SA1 SA2 SA3 SA5 SB SB2 SB3 SB4 SB5 SB6 SB7 SC SC3 SC4 NB NB2 NB6 f f f f f f f f f f f f f DETECTION) 5.55.1 The DIFU instruction sets the output signal to 1 for one scanning c
  • Page 351B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.56 f : Can be used : Cannot be used DIFD (FALLING EDGE PA1 PA3 SA1 SA2 SA3 SA5 SB SB2 SB3 SB4 SB5 SB6 SB7 SC SC3 SC4 NB NB2 NB6 DETECTION) f f f f f f f f f f f f f 5.56.1 The DIFD instruction set the output signal to 1 for one scanning p
  • Page 3525. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.57 f : Can be used : Cannot be used EOR PA1 PA3 SA1 SA2 SA3 SA5 SB SB2 SB3 SB4 SB5 SB6 SB7 SC SC3 SC4 NB NB2 NB6 (EXCLUSIVE OR) f f f f f f f f f f f f f 5.57.1 The EOR instruction exclusive–ORs the contents of address A with a constant (
  • Page 353B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.57.5 When address A and address B hold the following data: Operation Address A 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 Address B 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 The result of the exclusive OR operation is as follows: Address C 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 319
  • Page 3545. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.58 f : Can be used : Cannot be used AND (LOGICAL AND) PA1 PA3 SA1 SA2 SA3 SA5 SB SB2 SB3 SB4 SB5 SB6 SB7 SC SC3 SC4 NB NB2 NB6 f f f f f f f f f f f f f 5.58.1 The AND instruction ANDs the contents of address A with a constant (or Functio
  • Page 355B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.58.5 When address A and address B hold the following data: Operation Address A 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 Address B 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 The result of the AND operation is as follows: Address C 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 321
  • Page 3565. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.59 f : Can be used : Cannot be used OR (LOGICAL OR) PA1 PA3 SA1 SA2 SA3 SA5 SB SB2 SB3 SB4 SB5 SB6 SB7 SC SC3 SC4 NB NB2 NB6 f f f f f f f f f f f f f 5.59.1 The OR instruction ORs the contents of address A with a constant (or the Functio
  • Page 357B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.59.5 When address A and address B hold the following data: Operation Address A 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 Address B 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 The result of the OR operation is as follows: Address C 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 323
  • Page 3585. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.60 f : Can be used : Cannot be used NOT (LOGICAL NOT) PA1 PA3 SA1 SA2 SA3 SA5 SB SB2 SB3 SB4 SB5 SB6 SB7 SC SC3 SC4 NB NB2 NB6 f f f f f f f f f f f f f 5.60.1 The NOT instruction inverts each bit of the contents of address A, and stores
  • Page 359B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.60.5 When address A holds the following data: Operation Address A 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 The result of the NOT operation is as follows: Address B 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 325
  • Page 3605. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.61 f : Can be used ∆ : Can be used (with some restrictions) MMC3 R : Cannot be used (MMC–III WINDOW PA1 PA3 SA1 SA2 SA3 SA5 SB SB2 SB3 SB4 SB5 SB6 SB7 SC SC3 SC4 NB NB2 NB6 DATA READ) ∆ f f f f f f f f f f f NOTE This functional instructi
  • Page 361B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.61.4 (a) Address for storing buffer specifications (2 bytes) Parameters A buffer from which data is to be read is specified. Up to 10 buffers can be specified. Specify the address where the buffer specification is held. NOTE For the metho
  • Page 3625. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.61.8 Refer to Sec. I–9.3. Notes when this Functional Instruction is Used in Subroutine 328
  • Page 363B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.62 f : Can be used ∆ : Can be used (with some restrictions) MMC3W : Cannot be used (MMC–III WINDOW PA1 PA3 SA1 SA2 SA3 SA5 SB SB2 SB3 SB4 SB5 SB6 SB7 SC SC3 SC4 NB NB2 NB6 DATA WRITE) ∆ f f f f f f f f f f f NOTE This functional instructi
  • Page 3645. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.62.4 (a) Address for storing buffer specifications (2 bytes) Parameters A buffer to which data is to be written is specified. Up to 10 buffers can be specified. Specify the address where the buffer specification is held. NOTE For the meth
  • Page 365B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.62.7 When ACT = 1, completion status information is set in the operation Completion Status register R9002. Information –11 : MMC initialization not completed (W1=0, R9000#0=0) 0 : Normal termination (W1=1, R9000#0=0) 2 : Data length error
  • Page 3665. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.63 f : Can be used : Cannot be used SPCNT PA1 PA3 SA1 SA2 SA3 SA5 SB SB2 SB3 SB4 SB5 SB6 SB7 SC SC3 SC4 NB NB2 NB6 (SPINDLE CONTROL) f f f 5.63.1 SPCNT performs the following processing using spindle speed data (32–bit binary data) that i
  • Page 367B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS (i) Spindle control with automatic gear selection This functional instruction uses spindle speed data (32–bit binary data) and the maximum spindle speeds set in parameters GR1 to GR4 of this functional instruction to select a gear, calculat
  • Page 3685. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.63.2 Format CIRC * * * SPCNT ffff ffff ffff OVRD (SUB46) Spindle speed data Spindle control Control data ACT address parameter address address 5.63.3 (a) Direct gear specification (CIRC) CIRC=0 : Disables direct gear specification. Contro
  • Page 369B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS (i) Lower spindle motor speed limit data Sets the lower spindle motor speed limit obtained from the following expression: Minimum speed (min–1) specified for Lower spindle motor the spindle motor speed limit data = 8191 Maximum speed (min–1
  • Page 3705. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 [For direct gear selection] The sequence program sets the gear to be used in GR1 to GR4. This functional instruction calculates the spindle motor rotation commands for all speeds from the upper motor speed limit to the lower speed limit (ex
  • Page 371B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS (c) Control the spindle in a tapping cycle In a tapping cycle, spindle rotation is reversed at the bottom of a hole. Using the HIGH gear to reverse the rotation requires a lower analog voltage than using the LOW gear. So, using the HIGH gea
  • Page 3725. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 (1) Create a functional instruction. R9091.1 MOVW F10 R10 SUB44 R9091.1 NUMEB 2 0 R12 SUB40 CIRC SPCNT R10 D10 R0 OVRD SUB46 ACT (2) Set the spindle speed data Expand the specified spindle speed signals (F10 and F11) to 4 bytes. R10 RO0 to
  • Page 373B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS Then, the spindle control parameters are set as follows: D10 toD13 204 Lower spindle motor speed limit data D14 to D17 7167 Upper spindle motor speed limit data D18 to D21 25000 Maximum spindle speed for gear 1 D22 to D25 40000 Maximum spin
  • Page 3745. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.64 f : Can be used : Cannot be used END (END OF A PA1 PA3 SA1 SA2 SA3 SA5 SB SB2 SB3 SB4 SB5 SB6 SB7 SC SC3 SC4 NB NB2 NB6 LADDER PROGRAM) f f f f f f f f f f f f f 5.64.1 The END functional instruction designates the end of a ladder prog
  • Page 375B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.65 f : Can be used : Cannot be used CALL (CONDITIONAL PA1 PA3 SA1 SA2 SA3 SA5 SB SB2 SB3 SB4 SB5 SB6 SB7 SC SC3 SC4 NB NB2 NB6 SUBPROGRAM f f f f f f f f f f f f f CALL) 5.65.1 The CALL functional instruction calls a subprogram. When a su
  • Page 3765. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.66 f : Can be used : Cannot be used CALLU PA1 PA3 SA1 SA2 SA3 SA5 SB SB2 SB3 SB4 SB5 SB6 SB7 SC SC3 SC4 NB NB2 NB6 (UNCONDITIONAL f f f f f f f f f f f f f SUBPROGRAM CALL) 5.66.1 The CALLU functional instruction calls a subprogram. When
  • Page 377B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.67 f : Can be used : Cannot be used SP (SUBPROGRAM) PA1 PA3 SA1 SA2 SA3 SA5 SB SB2 SB3 SB4 SB5 SB6 SB7 SC SC3 SC4 NB NB2 NB6 f f f f f f f f f f f f f 5.67.1 The SP functional instruction is used to create a subprogram. A subprogram numbe
  • Page 3785. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.68 f : Can be used : Cannot be used SPE (END OF A PA1 PA3 SA1 SA2 SA3 SA5 SB SB2 SB3 SB4 SB5 SB6 SB7 SC SC3 SC4 NB NB2 NB6 SUBPROGRAM) f f f f f f f f f f f f f 5.68.1 The SPE functional instruction is used to create a subprogram. SPE is
  • Page 379B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.69 f : Can be used : Cannot be used JMPB (LABEL JUMP) PA1 PA3 SA1 SA2 SA3 SA5 SB SB2 SB3 SB4 SB5 SB6 SB7 SC SC3 SC4 NB NB2 NB6 f f f f f f f f f f f f f 5.69.1 The JMPB functional instruction transfers control to a Ladder immediately afte
  • Page 3805. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.70 f : Can be used : Cannot be used JMPC (LABEL JUMP) PA1 PA3 SA1 SA2 SA3 SA5 SB SB2 SB3 SB4 SB5 SB6 SB7 SC SC3 SC4 NB NB2 NB6 f f f f f f f f f f f f f 5.70.1 The JMPC functional instruction returns control from a subprogram to the main
  • Page 381B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.71 f : Can be used : Cannot be used LBL (LABEL) PA1 PA3 SA1 SA2 SA3 SA5 SB SB2 SB3 SB4 SB5 SB6 SB7 SC SC3 SC4 NB NB2 NB6 f f f f f f f f f f f f f 5.71.1 The LBL functional instruction specifies a label in a Ladder program. It specifies t
  • Page 3825. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.72 f : Available : Unavailable AXCTL (AXIS PA1 PA3 SA1 SA2 SA3 SA5 SB SB2 SB3 SB4 SB5 SB6 SB7 SC SC3 SC4 NB NB2 NB6 f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f CONTROL BY PMC) NOTE 1 Option for Axis control by PMC function is required. 2 This functio
  • Page 383B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS CAUTION 1 When RST and ACT become 1 at the same time, RST is prior to ACT. 2 Stopping the ladder with ACT (or RST) set to 1 issues WN03 on the PMC alarm screen (low–speed type). In this case, the function command cannot be executed continuo
  • Page 3845. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 For 2nd path side of PMi–D/H 1001 : Group A (G1142 to G1149, F1130 to F1132) 1002 : Group B (G1154 to G1161, F1133 to F1135) 1003 : Group C (G1166 to G1173, F1136 to F1138) 1004 : Group D (G1178 to G1185, F1139 to F1141) 1005 : Group E (G14
  • Page 385B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS Operation Control Command data 1 Command data 2 External pulse 0BH Pulse weighting synchronization 0DH not used (Note 2) 0EH (Note 3) 0FH (Only M series) Speed command 10H Feedrate not used (Note 2) (Note 5) (Note 6) Machine coordinate 20H
  • Page 3865. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Example 1) In case of cutting feed (feed per min.) +0 0H Not used (Specify 0). 1 01H Command code for cutting feed. (feed per min.) 2 Feedrate unit : mm/min. 3 4 Total travel amount 5 unit : 0.001mm 6 (x=A / B / C / D) 7 Example 2) In case
  • Page 387B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.72.6 When error occurs by processing the axis control by PMC, the bit of the Operation Output operation output register will be set. At the same time, processing is over. Register (R9000) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R9000 Group number of DI/DO signal
  • Page 3885. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.73 f : Can be used ∆ : Usable in some PSGNL (POSITION CNC models SIGNAL OUTPUT) : Cannot be used PA1 PA3 SA1 SA2 SA3 SA5 SB SB2 SB3 SB5 SB6 SB7 SC SC3 NB NB2 NB6 SB4 SC4 f f × × × × × × × ∆ ∆ × × × × × × NOTE The PMC–SB5/SB6 can be used o
  • Page 389B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.73.4 (a) Area division specification data address Parameters Set the top address of area division specification data 29 bytes of continuous memory are necessary in nonvolatile memory area for area division specification data. Area divisio
  • Page 3905. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 I II III IV V VI VII (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) – ) Total stroke area As shown in the above diagram, check can be performed for the 8 areas (1) to (8) by dividing the total stroke area by 7 division points. C
  • Page 391B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.73.6 This example illustrates how to output the position signal of the current Example of Using position of the first axis of path 1 in the machine coordinate system (the area split specification data and current position area output addr
  • Page 3925. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.74 f : Can be used ∆ : Usable in some PSGN2 (POSITION CNC models : Cannot be used SIGNAL OUTPUT 2) PA1 PA3 SA1 SA2 SA3 SA5 SB SB2 SB3 SB5 SB6 SB7 SC SC3 NB NB2 NB6 SB4 SC4 f f ∆ ∆ NOTE The PMC–SB5/SB6 can be used only in the Power Mate i–
  • Page 393B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.74.4 (a) Control data address Parameters Please set the top address of control data. For the area specification data, 9bytes of continuous memory area in the nonvolatile memory is necessary. Control data+0 Axis No. (1 : 1st Axis, 2 : 2nd
  • Page 3945. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 D Path specification A path is specified. (One–byte data in binary form) (Example) Path specification = 0: Path 1 is specified. Path specification = 2: Path 2 is specified. Path specification = 3: Path 3 is specified. D Axis number specific
  • Page 395B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.74.7 D This example illustrates how to output the position signal for the Example of Using current position of the second axis of path 1 in the machine coordinate system if it is the position between –100.000 mm and 200.000 mm. Position S
  • Page 3965. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 5.75 f : Can be used ∆ : Can be used depending of the version of software NOP (NO : Cannot be used OPERATION) PM–D/H PA1 PA3 ∆ FS16/18A SA1 SA2 SA3 SB SB2 SB3 SC SC3 FS16/18B SA1 SB3 SB4 ∆ ∆ FS16/18 B/C SC3 SC4 ∆ ∆ FS16/18C SA1 SB5 SB6 ∆ ∆
  • Page 397B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 5.75.1 During creation of a ladder program using the offline programmer, if the Function program is compiled with specifying the setting with which a net comment or form feed code is used and the point of the net comment is output, position
  • Page 3986. NONVOLATILE MEMORY PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 6 NONVOLATILE MEMORY 364
  • Page 399B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 6. NONVOLATILE MEMORY 6.1 Nonvolatile memory is considered nonvolatile if its contents are not erased when the power is turned off. TIMER, COUNTER, KEEP RELAY, (1) Used for the timer NONVOLATILE Time can be set and displayed from the CRT/MDI panel. The set time can b
  • Page 4006. NONVOLATILE MEMORY PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 (4) Nonvolatile memory control (MWRTF, MWRTF2) (Address K16) This memory is used when the position of a moving part of the machine tool, such as a lathe turret, is stored in code (BCD, etc.) and to maintain it while power is off. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3
  • Page 401B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 6. NONVOLATILE MEMORY 6.2 All the nonvolatile memory data can be read and written by the sequence program. The memory read and written by the PMC sequence program READING AND is actually not a nonvolatile memory, but a nonvolatile memory image WRITING OF (RAM) storin
  • Page 4026. NONVOLATILE MEMORY PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 6.3 (1) Introduction PMC DATA TABLE PMC sequence control sometimes requires a sizable amount of numeric data (herein after referred to as data table. If contents of such data table are free to set or to read, they can be used as various PMC sequ
  • Page 403B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 6. NONVOLATILE MEMORY Table control data Data table number D0 D1 Basic data table (1860 bytes or 3000 bytes) Data table D1859 or D2999 Fig. 6.3 (a) General configuration of data table 369
  • Page 4046. NONVOLATILE MEMORY PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Number of tables Table parameter Table 1 Data type control data Number of data Data table head address Table parameter Table 2 Data type control data Number of data Table control data Data table head address Table parameter Table n Data type con
  • Page 405B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 6. NONVOLATILE MEMORY (3) Table control data The table control data controls a data table If the table control data is not properly set, a data table described in Item (4) cannot be properly created. Referring to the description in Item (3), set the table control dat
  • Page 4066. NONVOLATILE MEMORY PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Table number 0 1 2 Table 1 (1-byte data) 3 n 1 Table 2 (2-byte data) p Each data table can be used in 1, 2 or 4 byte data. Table parameter of table control data decides whether to use 1 or 2 byte data. Therefore, 1 table number is taken for a 1-
  • Page 407B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 7. LADDER DIAGRAM FORMAT 7 LADDER DIAGRAM FORMAT A designer examines and checks the ladder diagram in the process of design. However, it should be noted that other persons (maintenance servicemen, for example) read the ladder diagram far longer than the designer. Acc
  • Page 4087. LADDER DIAGRAM FORMAT PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 7.1 Addresses, signal names, comments, and line numbers must be inserted into a ladder diagram to enable all users to easily read the ladder diagram. ADDRESSES, SIGNAL NAMES, COMMENTS, AND LINE NUMBERS 7.1.1 Each address consists of an addres
  • Page 409B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 7. LADDER DIAGRAM FORMAT 7.1.2 Suitable symbols shall be attached to I/O signals as signal names Signal Names according to the following procedure. (1) The names of all signals containing CNC signals and machine tool signals are represented within 6 characters. Alpha
  • Page 4107. LADDER DIAGRAM FORMAT PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 7.2 Symbol Description SYMBOLS USED IN These are the contacts of relays in the PMC, and THE LADDER A contact are used for other input from the machine side DIAGRAM and CNC B contact These are input signals from the CNC. A contact B contact Th
  • Page 411B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 7. LADDER DIAGRAM FORMAT 7.3 (1) Format The size should be A3 or A4 (JIS standard). LADDER DIAGRAM (2) Columns are used for wiring. FORMAT 3A 3B Line number 3P Spindle control (3) Divide the circuits into several functions. And program the same function in a single p
  • Page 4127. LADDER DIAGRAM FORMAT PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 7.4 A general relay sequence circuit has a finite number of contacts, so several relays use one contact in common so as to reduce the number of contacts INFINITE NUMBER used as much as possible. OF RELAY CONTACTS A R1 B R2 The PMC is consider
  • Page 413B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM 8. MISCELLANEOUS ITEM 8 MISCELLANEOUS ITEM To create a ladder program related to the axis-control function by the PMC, refer to the subsection, ”Axis-control function by the PMC,” in the Connection Manual. 379
  • Page 4149. SEQUENCE PROGRAM STRUCTURING PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 9 SEQUENCE PROGRAM STRUCTURING f : Can be used : Cannot be used PA1 PA3 SA1 SA2 SA3 SA5 SB SB2 SB3 SB4 SB5 SB6 SB7 SC SC3 SC4 NB NB2 NB6 f f f f f f f f f f f f f With the conventional PMC, a Ladder program is described sequentially. B
  • Page 4159. SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM STRUCTURING 9.1 EXAMPLES OF STRUCTURED PROGRAMMING 9.1.1 Three major structured programming capabilities are supported. Implementation (1) Subprogramming Techniques A subprogram can consist of a Ladder sequence as the processing units. Job A ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
  • Page 4169. SEQUENCE PROGRAM STRUCTURING PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 9.1.2 (1) Example Applications Suppose that there are four major jobs. If Y0 is 1, a request to machine a workpiece is assumed, and A processing is performed (with a condition). A : 1 Pick up a workpiece from a pallet. (A1) 2 Machine t
  • Page 4179. SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM STRUCTURING Sub Program P2 (=A) SP A ȣ CALLU A1 Ȧ Pick up a workpiece from a pallet. Ȥ ȣ CALLU A2 Ȧ Machine the workpiece. Ȥ ȣ CALLU A3 Ȧ Return the workpiece to the pallet. Ȥ SPE Sub Program P3 (=A1) SP A1 ȣ Pick up a workpiece from a pallet. Ȧ L
  • Page 4189. SEQUENCE PROGRAM STRUCTURING PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Sub Program P6 (=B) SP B ȣ Move the pallet. Ȧ Ladder coding Ȥ SPE 9.1.3 (1) Main program Specifications The main program is the Ladder program consisting of the first- and second-level Ladder programs. One, but only one, main program c
  • Page 4199. SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM STRUCTURING 9.2 SUBPROGRAMMING AND NESTING 9.2.1 Conditional JUMP (or unconditional JUMP) is coded in the main Function program, and the name of a subprogram to be executed is specified. In the subprogram, the name of the subprogram and a Ladder s
  • Page 4209. SEQUENCE PROGRAM STRUCTURING PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 9.2.2 The main program is always active. Subprograms on the other hand, are Execution Method active only when called by another program. In the following example, subprogram SUBPRO is called by signal A. Main Program Sub Program ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
  • Page 4219. SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM STRUCTURING 9.2.3 Create subprograms in the same way as the first-, second-, and third-level Creating a Program Ladder programs. Example of creation ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ f END1 A CALL SUBPRO ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ f END2 SP SUBPRO ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ f ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ SPE SP
  • Page 4229. SEQUENCE PROGRAM STRUCTURING PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Inhibit items (1) Subprograms are nested. SP SUBPRO ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ f ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ SPE ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ SPE (2) A subprogram is created within the first-, second-, or third-level Ladder program. ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ f END1 ⋅ ⋅
  • Page 4239. SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM STRUCTURING 9.3 a) DISPB CAUTIONS FOR b) EXIN SUBROUTINES c) WINDR (only low-speed response) d) WINDW (only low-speed response) e) MMCWR f) MMCWW g) MMC3R h) MMC3W When you use the above-mentioned functional instructions, ACT=1 must be held until
  • Page 4249. SEQUENCE PROGRAM STRUCTURING PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Example) When subprogram is called from two places. (The WINDR instruction is used) Main program Subprogram 1 Subprogram 2 C1 C2 SP S-PRO1 SP S-PRO2 B C1 C2 C1 B A B JMPB L1 WINDR DATA B C1 C2 ON A SPE C2 C2–1 A DIFU 01 CALL S-PRO2 C2
  • Page 42510. JMP INSTRUCTIONS WITH B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM LABEL SPECIFICATION 10 JMP INSTRUCTIONS WITH LABEL SPECIFICATION f : Can be used : Cannot be used PA1 PA3 SA1 SA2 SA3 SA5 SB SB2 SB3 SB4 SB5 SB6 SB7 SC SC3 SC4 NB NB2 NB6 f f f f f f f f f f f f f 391
  • Page 42610. JMP INSTRUCTIONS WITH LABEL SPECIFICATION PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 10.1 (1) Relationship between JMPB/JMPC and LBL (Forward and backward jumps to the same label are possible.) SPECIFICATIONS JMPB A f : Possible f LBL A f f JMPB A JMPC A CAUTION The specifications allow backward jumps. A
  • Page 42710. JMP INSTRUCTIONS WITH B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM LABEL SPECIFICATION (2) Same label (A label can be used more than once as long as it is unique within the main program or each subprogram.) LBL A First level LBL B END1 Second level LBL C END2 SP A SP A LBL C SPE SP B SP B LBL B SPE CAUTION
  • Page 42810. JMP INSTRUCTIONS WITH LABEL SPECIFICATION PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 (4) Relationship between JMP/JMPE and JMPB/JMPC (JMPB and JMPC can be used with JMP and JMPE freely.) JMPB A f : Possible JMPE f LBL A JMPB D f JMPB B JMP f LBL B JMPB C f LBL C JMPE LBL D (5) Relationship between CALL/CA
  • Page 42910. JMP INSTRUCTIONS WITH B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM LABEL SPECIFICATION (6) Position of JMPC (JMPC coded between COM and COME can cause a jump.) LBL A f : Possible f Second level END2 SP B SP A COM JMPC A COME SPE 395
  • Page 43010. JMP INSTRUCTIONS WITH LABEL SPECIFICATION PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 10.2 (1) Jump destination of JMPB (1) (A jump over END1 or END2 is inhibited.) RESTRICTIONS f : Possible LBL A : Impossible JMPB B f First level LBL B JMPB C END1 Second level LBL C JMPB A END2 (2) Jump destination of JMP
  • Page 43110. JMP INSTRUCTIONS WITH B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM LABEL SPECIFICATION (3) Jump destination of JMPB (3) (A jump over COM or COME is inhibited.) JMPB A f : Possible : Impossible COME LBL A JMPB D f JMPB B COM LBL B JMPB C f LBL C COME LBL D 397
  • Page 43210. JMP INSTRUCTIONS WITH LABEL SPECIFICATION PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 (4) Jump destination of JMPC (1) (A jump to the first-level Ladder program is inhibited.) f : Possible LBL A : Impossible First level END1 Second level LBL B f END2 SP A SP A JMPC B JMPC A SPE 398
  • Page 43310. JMP INSTRUCTIONS WITH B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM LABEL SPECIFICATION (5) Jump destination of JMPC (2) (A jump to a label between COM and COME is inhibited.) : Impossible COM LBL A Second level COME END2 SP A SP A JMPC A SPE (6) Jump destination of JMPC (3) (Control must not be returned to
  • Page 43410. JMP INSTRUCTIONS WITH LABEL SPECIFICATION PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 (7) LBL for JMPB (1) (There is no LBL in the same subprogram.) LBL A Second level END2 SP A SP A JMPB A SPE (8) LBL for JMPB (2) (The same LBL is found in the first- and second-level Ladder programs.) JMPB A First level L
  • Page 43510. JMP INSTRUCTIONS WITH B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM LABEL SPECIFICATION (9) LBL for JMPC (There is no LBL in the second-level Ladder program.) LBL A Second level END2 SP A SP A JMPC B SPE 401
  • Page 43611. INTERRUPT–TYPE PMC FUNCTION PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 11 INTERRUPT–TYPE PMC FUNCTION NOTE This function is available only in the PMC–SB5/SB6 for the Power Mate i–H. It requires the interrupt–type PMC option. 402
  • Page 43711. INTERRUPT–TYPE B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM PMC FUNCTION 11.1 This function enables the discontinuation of the current sequence program (second–level sequence section) and the execution of another OVERVIEW sequence program (conventional first–level sequence section) when urgent execution of
  • Page 43811. INTERRUPT–TYPE PMC FUNCTION PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 11.2 The following NC parameters specify the conditions for the interrupt input signals. SETTING D NC parameters (bit type) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8731 EPMC7 EPMC6 EPMC5 EPMC4 EPMC3 EPMC2 EPMC1 EPMC0 EPMCn Whether to use bit n of X100
  • Page 43911. INTERRUPT–TYPE B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM PMC FUNCTION 11.3 INTERRUPT PROCESSING 11.3.1 This function uses a conventional first–level sequence section as an Interrupt Program interrupt program. Only one interrupt program is supported. More than one interrupt input condition (up to 8 points
  • Page 44011. INTERRUPT–TYPE PMC FUNCTION PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 11.3.2 Input/output signals (F, G, X, Y addresses) between the NC and machine Input/Output Signal are processed asynchronously except for built–in I/O units (X1000 to X1003, X1007, Y1000 to Y1002). (Usually, processing for NC <–> PMC P
  • Page 44111. INTERRUPT–TYPE B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM PMC FUNCTION 11.3.4 The execution time of the interrupt program must be within about 6 ms, Execution Time even in the worst case. If an interrupt program whose execution time is longer than 6 ms is executed, or if too many interrupt requests are ma
  • Page 44211. INTERRUPT–TYPE PMC FUNCTION PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 [Input data structure] Top address+0 (Function code) 10000 +2 (Completion code) – (Need not be set) +4 (Data length) – (Need not be set) +6 (Data number) N N=1 to 3 (N = data specification) 1: Enable interrupts. (All conditions) 2: Dis
  • Page 44311. INTERRUPT–TYPE B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM PMC FUNCTION 11.3.6 Machine instructions not usable in the interrupt program Cautions (1) TMR (timer), TMRB (fixed timer), and TMRC (timer) The least input increment for the timer values is 8 ms, so it may not be possible to measure time accurately
  • Page 44411. INTERRUPT–TYPE PMC FUNCTION PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 Continuous interrupt processing After the interrupt program has been started by a certain interrupt signal, if another interrupt signal occurs, it is processed after the current interrupt processing is completed. (Example) Rising edges
  • Page 44511. INTERRUPT–TYPE B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM PMC FUNCTION 11.4 (1) Interrupt program that handles interrupt requests separately Use of R9021 together with a label jump enables processing interrupt SEQUENCE requests separately as shown below. PROGRAM EXAMPLES R9021.0 JMPB L0001 SUB68 Sequence
  • Page 44611. INTERRUPT–TYPE PMC FUNCTION PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM B–61863E/15 (2) Enabling interrupts immediately when the power is applied MA(F1.7) DIFU 1 R0.0 MA SUB57 signal rising R0.0 NUMEB 2 SUB40 10000 R100 R0.0 NUMEB 2 SUB40 1 R106 R0.0 R1.0 WINDW R100 Interrupt SUB52 enable END2 SUB2 412
  • Page 44711. INTERRUPT–TYPE B–61863E/15 PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM PMC FUNCTION (3) Specifying an interrupt–disabled interval R9091.1 NUMEB 2 SUB40 10000 R100 R9091.1 NUMEB 2 SUB40 1 R106 R9091.1 NUMEB 2 SUB40 10000 R200 R9091.1 NUMEB 2 SUB40 2 R206 R9091.1 R2.0 WINDW R200 Interrupt SUB52 disable Interrupt–disable
  • Page 448
  • Page 449II. PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI
  • Page 450
  • Page 451B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) 1. GENERAL 1 GENERAL The following PMC data can be set and displayed by using the CRT/MDI panel. 1) PMC I/O signal display and internal relay display (PMCDGN) PMCDGN has following screens. a) Title data display b) Status screen c) Alarm screen d) Trace function e)
  • Page 4521. GENERAL PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 a) 9″ small monochrome/color CRT/MDI panel for 16–TA/18–TA (Horizontal type) Function keys Address/numeric keys SHIFT key Cancel key INPUT key Edit keys HELP key RESET key Soft keys Page keys Cursor control keys b) 9″ monochrome/color CRT/MDI panel for
  • Page 453B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) 1. GENERAL c) 10″ color LCD/MDI panel for 16–TA/18–TA (Horizontal type) Function keys Address/numeric keys Cancel key SHIFT key INPUT key HELP key RESET key Page keys Edit keys Soft keys Power on/off buttom Cursor control keys d) 10″ color LCD/MDI panel for 16–TA/
  • Page 4541. GENERAL PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 e) 14″ color CRT/MDI panel for 16–TA/18–TA (Horizontal type) RESET key Address/numeric keys HELP key SHIFT key Edit keys INPUT key Cancel key Function keys Cursor control keys Power on/off buttom Page keys Soft keys f) 14″ color CRT/MDI panel for 16–TA/
  • Page 455B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) 1. GENERAL g) 9″ small monochrome/color CRT/MDI panel for 16–MA/18–MA (Horizontal type) Function keys Address/numeric keys SHIFT key Cancel keys INPUT key Edit keys HELP key RESET key Page keys Soft keys Cursor control keys h) 9″ monochrome/color CRT/MDI panel for
  • Page 4561. GENERAL PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 i) 10″ color LDC/MDI panel for 16–MA/18–MA (Horizontal type) Function keys Address/numeric keys Cancel key SHIFT key INPUT key HELP key RESET key Page keys Edit keys Soft keys Cursor control keys Power on/off buttom j) 10″ color LCD/MDI panel for 16–MA/
  • Page 457B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) 1. GENERAL k) 14″ color CRT/MDI panel for 16–MA/18–MA (Horizontal type) RESET key Address/numeric keys HELP key SHIFT key Edit keys INPUT key Cancel key Function keys Cursor control keys Power on/off buttom Page keys Soft keys l) 14″ color CRT/MDI panel for 16–MA/
  • Page 4581. GENERAL PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 1.1 Note the followings when you input PMC–address on the original MDI boards made by MTBs without using Standard MDI Unit supplied by FOR MDI UNITS FANUC. OTHER THAN (1) If the MDI has the keys to input PMC–address (X, Y, F, G, R, A, C, STANDARD MDI K,
  • Page 459B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) 1. GENERAL 1.4 The PMC–PA1 and PA3 contained in the Power Mate have a sequence program called the “standard ladder” in their ROM to operate the Power LOADING THE Mate without creating a sequence program. STANDARD LADDER Operation) (FOR Power Mate–D/F Parameter in
  • Page 4601. GENERAL PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 1.7 A password can be specified for a ladder program. Specified passwords are stored as sequence program data. A ladder program for which the LADDER PASSWORD password has been specified cannot be displayed or edited. FUNCTION Symbols, comments and messa
  • Page 461B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) 1. GENERAL NOTE 1 See the following items for the selected screens listed in Table 1.7 (a). PMCLAD : 5. PMC LADDER DIAGRAM DISPLAY (PMCLAD) in Part II M.SRCH : 3.5 Display the Contents of Memory (M.SRCH) in Part II LADDER : 5.2 Sequence program generation (LADDER)
  • Page 4621. GENERAL PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 (c) When the password is correctly specified, the protection is released and the corresponding operation becomes available. See Table 1.7 (a). If the password is incorrectly specified, the message “FALSE PASSWORD” is displayed. NOTE The sequence program
  • Page 463B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) 1. GENERAL 1.8 Note the following when PMC of loader control function is operated. PMC OPERATION D Operate PMC after switching to the screen for the loader control. (The control of the main and the loader changes by pushing the SHIFT key FOR LOADER and the HELP ke
  • Page 4642. PMC MENU SELECTION PROCEDURE BY SOFTKEY PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 2 PMC MENU SELECTION PROCEDURE BY SOFTKEY Pressing the function key of CRT/MDI and the PMC soft key changes the screen to the PMC basic screen. The soft keys are displayed at the bottom of the screen. 1) PMC basi
  • Page 4652. PMC MENU SELECTION B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) PROCEDURE BY SOFTKEY 2) Keys on CRT/MDI panel The following keys are related to PMC operation on CRT/MDI panel. a) key Selects from CNC menu to PMC basic menu. b) key Screen page return key. c) key Screen page advance
  • Page 4662. PMC MENU SELECTION PROCEDURE BY SOFTKEY PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 i) Next key This key is used for extending menus of soft keys. By pressing this key, a menu changes, and by pressing it again, the menu is reset as before. j) Return key Various PMC operations are conducted by pressing so
  • Page 4672. PMC MENU SELECTION B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) PROCEDURE BY SOFTKEY 4) Relation between PMC menus and soft keys There are 2 types, A and B, in the series of CNC. A–TYPE RUN or STOP EDIT I/O SYSPRM MONIT Chapter II.5 Chapter II.3 Chapter II.4 NEXT PMCLAD PMCDGN PMCPRM RET RET RET TOP TITLE
  • Page 4682. PMC MENU SELECTION PROCEDURE BY SOFTKEY PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 B–TYPE (different from the A–type in soft key layout) RUN or STOP EDIT I/O SYSPRM MONIT Chapter II.5 Chapter II.3 Chapter II.4 NEXT PMCLAD PMCDGN PMCPRM RET RET RET SEARCH TITLE TIMER ADRESS STATUS COUNTR (SYMBOL) TRIGER
  • Page 4692. PMC MENU SELECTION B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) PROCEDURE BY SOFTKEY (Reference) Series of PMC control software is displayed on the [PMCDGN] and [TITLE] screen as shown below. PMC CONTROL PROGRAM SERIES : 4063 EDITION : 08 Series of PMC control software 435
  • Page 4703. PMC I/O SIGNAL DISPLAY AND INTERNAL RELAY DISPLAY (PMCDGN) PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 3 PMC I/O SIGNAL DISPLAY AND INTERNAL RELAY DISPLAY (PMCDGN) PMC I/O signals, internal relays, and other PMC diagnosis are displayed on the screen by depressing soft key [PMCDGN]. PMCLAD PMCDGN PMCPRM R
  • Page 4713. PMC I/O SIGNAL DISPLAY AND INTERNAL RELAY DISPLAY B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) (PMCDGN) 3.1 Title Data refers to the title of the sequence program created by the machine tool builder. DISPLAYING TITLE DATA They consist of the following ten items : Machine tool builder name (32 characters)
  • Page 4723. PMC I/O SIGNAL DISPLAY AND INTERNAL RELAY DISPLAY (PMCDGN) PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 PMC TITLE DATA #2 MONIT RUN MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME : f · · · · · · · · · · · · · f MACHINE TOOL NAME : f · · · · · · · · · · · · · f CNC & PMC TYPE NAME : f · · · · · · · · · · · · · f PROGRAM DRAWIN
  • Page 4733. PMC I/O SIGNAL DISPLAY AND INTERNAL RELAY DISPLAY B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) (PMCDGN) 3.2 The contents at all addresses (X, Y, F, G, R, A, C, K, D, T, M, N) disignated in programs can be displayed on the CRT screen. This display DISPLAY OF SIGNAL is all done by “0” and “1” bit patterns,
  • Page 4743. PMC I/O SIGNAL DISPLAY AND INTERNAL RELAY DISPLAY (PMCDGN) PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 3.3 If an alarm is issued in the PMC, pressing the PMC soft key displays the alarm message as shown in Fig. 3.3. ALM blinks at the lower right corner ALARM SCREEN of the screen. (ALARM) If a fatal error
  • Page 4753. PMC I/O SIGNAL DISPLAY AND INTERNAL RELAY DISPLAY B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) (PMCDGN) 3.4 This function checks the signal history which cannot be checked in the status display. Using one- or two-byte addressing, the function records TRACE FUNCTION a state when the signal changes. In two-
  • Page 4763. PMC I/O SIGNAL DISPLAY AND INTERNAL RELAY DISPLAY (PMCDGN) PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 3.4.3 EXEC : Starts reading signals Starting or Stopping the Trace Function CAUTION 1 Pressing the [EXEC] key again clears the results of the previous trace. If the trace parameters are not set correctl
  • Page 4773. PMC I/O SIGNAL DISPLAY AND INTERNAL RELAY DISPLAY B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) (PMCDGN) 3.4.4 Signal history can be checked using data specified on the parameter Trace Screen setting screen. The result of the latest trace is displayed at the cursor position. The cursor moves on the screen
  • Page 4783. PMC I/O SIGNAL DISPLAY AND INTERNAL RELAY DISPLAY (PMCDGN) PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 3.5 DISPLAYING THE : Standard Ę : optional CONTENTS OF : cannot be used MEMORY (M.SRCH) n : Can be used for the 4084 series. Power FS21i FS16A Power FS20/ FS16A/B FS16C FS16B/C Mate- FS21B FS18A FS18B F
  • Page 4793. PMC I/O SIGNAL DISPLAY AND INTERNAL RELAY DISPLAY B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) (PMCDGN) 3.5.2 To store data in memory, set bit 4 of keep relay K17 or K900 to 1, move Function for Storing the cursor to a position at which the address of the data to be changed in RAM is displayed, and enter
  • Page 4803. PMC I/O SIGNAL DISPLAY AND INTERNAL RELAY DISPLAY (PMCDGN) PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 3.6 FUNCTION FOR DISPLAYING SIGNAL : Standard Ę : optional WAVEFORMS : cannot be used (ANALYS) n : Can be used for the 4084 series. Power Power FS20/ FS21B FS18A FS18B FS16A FS16A/B FS16C FS21i FS16A FS
  • Page 4813. PMC I/O SIGNAL DISPLAY AND INTERNAL RELAY DISPLAY B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) (PMCDGN) TITLE STATUS ALARM TRACE NEXT M.SRCH ANALYS USRDGN RET SCOPE DELETE INIT ADRESS or SYMBOL SGNPRM START T.SRCH ADRESS or SYMBOL NEXT EXCHG SCALE SELECT CANCEL RET TO CANCEL EXEC CANCEL 3.6.3 To trace the
  • Page 4823. PMC I/O SIGNAL DISPLAY AND INTERNAL RELAY DISPLAY (PMCDGN) PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 d) TRIGGER MODE Sampled data for up to 10 seconds is stored in the trace buffer. A signal is stored in the buffer within 8 ms. This parameter specifies the starting and end points for obtaining data. 0
  • Page 4833. PMC I/O SIGNAL DISPLAY AND INTERNAL RELAY DISPLAY B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) (PMCDGN) PMC SIGNAL PARAMETER MONIT RUN SAMPLING TIME : 10(1-10SEC) TRIGGER ADDRESS : *ESP CONDITION : 1 (0:START 1:TRIGGER-ON 2:TRIGGER-OFF) TRIGGER MODE : 1 (0:AFTER 1:ABOUT 2:BEFORE 3:ONLY) > [SCOPE ] [DELETE
  • Page 4843. PMC I/O SIGNAL DISPLAY AND INTERNAL RELAY DISPLAY (PMCDGN) PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 3.6.4 After parameters are specified on the parameter screen, select the signal Signal Diagnosis diagnosis screen. Screen Pressing the [START] soft key starts to trace the specified signal. While the si
  • Page 4853. PMC I/O SIGNAL DISPLAY AND INTERNAL RELAY DISPLAY B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) (PMCDGN) Pressing the “²” key shifts traced data to the left. Pressing the “³” key shifts traced data to the right. PMC SIGNAL ANALYSIS(SCOPE) MONIT RUN SAMPLING TIME : 10 CONDITION : 1 TRIGGER ADDRESS:*ESP TRIG
  • Page 4863. PMC I/O SIGNAL DISPLAY AND INTERNAL RELAY DISPLAY (PMCDGN) PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 3.7 Pressing the [USRDGN] key dynamically displays the running states of user tasks (including the third level of a ladder program) in the PMC (Fig. DISPLAYING THE 3.7). RUNNING STATE OF Ę : Can be used
  • Page 4873. PMC I/O SIGNAL DISPLAY AND INTERNAL RELAY DISPLAY B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) (PMCDGN) 1) Operation Code Description # RS-232C being used @ NC command edit being used 2) Running state Code Description ACTIVE Running READY Ready WAIT Waiting STOP Task stopped ERROR The system deleted the t
  • Page 4883. PMC I/O SIGNAL DISPLAY AND INTERNAL RELAY DISPLAY (PMCDGN) PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 3.8 Check kind of I/O modules connected to I/O Link. Set communication parameters of I/O Link–II, PROFIBUS–DP, DISPLAYING AND DeviceNet, FL–net. SETTING THE Ę : Supprted CONFIGURATION : Not supported ST
  • Page 4893. PMC I/O SIGNAL DISPLAY AND INTERNAL RELAY DISPLAY B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) (PMCDGN) PMC I/O CHECK SELECT ONE OF FOLLOWING SOFT KEYS IOLNK : I/O LINK CHECK IOLNK2 : I/O LINK–II SETTING PROFI : PROFIBUS PARAMETER D_NET : DEVICENET PARAMETER FL–NET : FL–NET SETTING Fig. 3.8 Menu of I/O ch
  • Page 4903. PMC I/O SIGNAL DISPLAY AND INTERNAL RELAY DISPLAY (PMCDGN) PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 3.8.1 The I/O Link connecting check screen displays the types and ID codes of I/O Link Connecting the connected I/O devices for each group. When I/O device is not connected, ”NO I/O DEVICE” is displayed
  • Page 4913. PMC I/O SIGNAL DISPLAY AND INTERNAL RELAY DISPLAY B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) (PMCDGN) CNC Connection Group 0 Unit Operator’s Panel Connec- Group 1 tion Unit I/O Group 2 Unit MODEL A I/O Link Connection Group 3 Unit Power Mate Group 4 Fig. 3.8.1 (b) I/O Link configuration (2) When CNC har
  • Page 4923. PMC I/O SIGNAL DISPLAY AND INTERNAL RELAY DISPLAY (PMCDGN) PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 Channel 2 CNC Connection Group 0 I/O Channel 1 Unit Unit MODEL A Operator’s Power Mate Panel Connec- Group 1 tion Unit I/O Power Mate Group 2 Unit MODEL A I/O Link Connection Group 3 Unit Power Mate Gro
  • Page 4933. PMC I/O SIGNAL DISPLAY AND INTERNAL RELAY DISPLAY B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) (PMCDGN) (6) Re–start I/O Link–II Press the soft key [START] to re–start I/O Link–II after editing the parameter. When the re–start is completed normally, ”LINK STARTED” is displayed. If the re–start fails, ”STA
  • Page 4943. PMC I/O SIGNAL DISPLAY AND INTERNAL RELAY DISPLAY (PMCDGN) PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 Example of parameter setting of slave. PMC I/O LINK–II CH 1 (1/2) GENERAL: MAX SLAVE NO. = 03 (1–31) STATION NO. = 02 (1–31) STATUS ADDRESS = R0900 DI/DO SETTING: DI/DO MAP MODE = 0 (0,2) DI/DO DATA SIZ
  • Page 4953. PMC I/O SIGNAL DISPLAY AND INTERNAL RELAY DISPLAY B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) (PMCDGN) 3.9 FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT Ę : Usable FUNCTION n: See Note. : Not usable Power Power FS20/ FS18A FS16A FS16B FS16C FS21i FS16i FS15B Mate Mate i–D/H FS21A FS18B FS18C FS18i PA1 SB5 SA1 SA1, SA2 SB, SB2, SB
  • Page 4963. PMC I/O SIGNAL DISPLAY AND INTERNAL RELAY DISPLAY (PMCDGN) PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 Example 1: In this example, the forced input/output function is applied to R0 in the ladder program below. X0.0 MOVE 1111 1111 K0 R0 a. The initial signal states are as follows: X0.0 = off, K0 = 55H, R0
  • Page 4973. PMC I/O SIGNAL DISPLAY AND INTERNAL RELAY DISPLAY B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) (PMCDGN) (b) OVERRIDE mode That state in which values modified by the forced input/output function cannot be overwritten by a sequence program or machine signal is referred to as OVERRIDE mode. In OVERRIDE mode,
  • Page 4983. PMC I/O SIGNAL DISPLAY AND INTERNAL RELAY DISPLAY (PMCDGN) PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 CAUTION 1 In OVERRIDE mode, input/output signals are updated at 8–ms intervals in sync with the first ladder level. When an I/O link is used which is usually updated at 2–ms intervals, an input/output s
  • Page 4993. PMC I/O SIGNAL DISPLAY AND INTERNAL RELAY DISPLAY B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) (PMCDGN) 3.9.2 Use the procedures below to set the input/output modes. Setting/Operation for (1) Operation for enabling FORCING mode Enabling Forced Use the procedure below. Input/Output (a) Mount an edit card o
  • Page 5003. PMC I/O SIGNAL DISPLAY AND INTERNAL RELAY DISPLAY (PMCDGN) PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 3.9.3 (1) Soft keys Screen Display TITLE STATUS ALARM TRACE SEARCH FORCE SEARCH ON OFF STATUS OVRSET OVRRST INIT EXEC CANCEL (2) Details of the soft keys (a) [SEARCH] Searches for an address to be displ
  • Page 5013. PMC I/O SIGNAL DISPLAY AND INTERNAL RELAY DISPLAY B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) (PMCDGN) (3) Forced input/output screens FORCING Mode Status Screen PMC SIGNAL STATUS MONIT RUN NO. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 X0000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X0001 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 X0002 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 X0003 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 X0004 0
  • Page 5023. PMC I/O SIGNAL DISPLAY AND INTERNAL RELAY DISPLAY (PMCDGN) PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 OVERRIDE Mode Status Screen PMC SIGNAL STATUS OVERRIDE MONIT RUN NO. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 X0000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X0001 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 >1 X0002 0 0 0 0 0 0 >1 0 X0003 0 0 0 0 0 >1 0 0 X0004 0 0 0 0 >1 0 0 0 X00
  • Page 5033. PMC I/O SIGNAL DISPLAY AND INTERNAL RELAY DISPLAY B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) (PMCDGN) 3.9.4 The method described below applies to both FORCING and OVERRIDE Modifying the Values of modes. Signals by Forced (1) Modifying signal values on a bit–by–bit basis Input/Output Position the cursor
  • Page 5043. PMC I/O SIGNAL DISPLAY AND INTERNAL RELAY DISPLAY (PMCDGN) PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 3.9.5 (1) Setting OVERRIDE OVERRIDE can be set as described below. Setting/Clearing By using the [OVRSET] soft key, place the desired bit/byte in the OVERRIDE OVERRIDE state. (a) Setting OVERRIDE on a b
  • Page 5053. PMC I/O SIGNAL DISPLAY AND INTERNAL RELAY DISPLAY B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) (PMCDGN) (2) Clearing OVERRIDE By using the [OVRRST] soft key, clear the OVERRIDE state of the desired bit/byte. This operation returns the state of a signal to the state existing before OVERRIDE setting. (a) Cl
  • Page 5064. PMC PARAMETERS SETTING AND DISPLAY (PMCPRM) PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 4 PMC PARAMETERS SETTING AND DISPLAY (PMCPRM) 472
  • Page 5074. PMC PARAMETERS SETTING AND B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) DISPLAY (PMCPRM) 4.1 Parameters of TIMER, COUNTER, KEEP RELAY and DATA TABLE, which are nonvolatile, are set and displayed with CRT/MDI panel. OUTLINE To use this function, press the soft key [PMCPRM] of PMC basic menu screen. NOTE Th
  • Page 5084. PMC PARAMETERS SETTING AND DISPLAY (PMCPRM) PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 4.2 1 Place the sequence program in the STOP state. INPUT PMC 2 When the sequence program is in the RUN state, perform the setting PARAMETERS FROM below. MDI PANEL (1) Set NC to “MDI” mode or “Emergency Stop” status.
  • Page 5094. PMC PARAMETERS SETTING AND B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) DISPLAY (PMCPRM) 4.3 SETTING AND DISPLAY SCREEN 4.3.1 The TIMER times of the functional instruction TMR(SUB 3) are set and Timer Screen (TIMER) displayed on this screen. Page No.(Change pages with the page keys.) The TIMER No.s used b
  • Page 5104. PMC PARAMETERS SETTING AND DISPLAY (PMCPRM) PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 4.3.2 The maximum(PRESET) values and CURRENT values of the functional Counter Screen instruction CTR(SUB 5) are set and displayed on this screen. (COUNTR) The COUNTER No.s used by CTR instruction The addresses refered
  • Page 5114. PMC PARAMETERS SETTING AND B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) DISPLAY (PMCPRM) CAUTION 1 The Data for Controlling Nonvolatile Memory(K16) Refer to I–6.1(4)”Nonvolatile Memory Control”. 2 The Data for PMC Management Software(K17,18,19) Be careful of using the following KEEP RELAYs, because they a
  • Page 5124. PMC PARAMETERS SETTING AND DISPLAY (PMCPRM) PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 #7 DTBLDSP 0 : The PMC parameter data table control screen is displayed. 1 : The PMC parameter data table control screen is not displayed. #6 ANASTAT 0 : In the function for displaying signal waveforms, sampling start
  • Page 5134. PMC PARAMETERS SETTING AND B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) DISPLAY (PMCPRM) WARNING Set this bit to 0 before shipment from the factory. If the bit setting is left as 0, the operator may stop execution of the ladder diagram by mistake, and cause an accident. #0 LADMASK 0 : Ladder dynamic displ
  • Page 5144. PMC PARAMETERS SETTING AND DISPLAY (PMCPRM) PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 * This flag is effective for the PMC–SC/SC3/SC4/NB/NB2, When this bit is set to 1 in the user screen, the screen cannot be switched to the NC screen using the function keys. For this reason, a program that always sets
  • Page 5154. PMC PARAMETERS SETTING AND B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) DISPLAY (PMCPRM) #4 MEMINP 0 : Data cannot be entered with the memory contents display function. 1 : Data can be entered with the memory contents display function. (This setting cannot be used with the Power Mate–D/F.) #2 AUTORUN 0 :
  • Page 5164. PMC PARAMETERS SETTING AND DISPLAY (PMCPRM) PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 #0 FROM–WRT 0 : After a ladder is edited, the ladder is not automatically written to F–ROM. 1 : After a ladder is edited, the ladder is automatically written to F–ROM. (This setting cannot be used with the Power Mate–
  • Page 5174. PMC PARAMETERS SETTING AND B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) DISPLAY (PMCPRM) NOTE Table Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0 : Binary 1 : BCD 0 : Available to input 1 : Unavailable to input (Protection mode) 0 : Binary of BCD (The bit 0 is valid 1 : Hexadecimal (The bit 0 is invalid.) (2) Data
  • Page 5184. PMC PARAMETERS SETTING AND DISPLAY (PMCPRM) PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 4.4 Part of KEEP RELAY parameters can be set on SETTING Screen. SETTING SCREEN Ę : Can be used : Cannot be used PA1 PA3 SA1 SA2 SA3 SA5 SB SB2 SB3 SB4 SB5 SB6 SC SC3 SC4 NB NB2 Ę ∆ Ę Ę ∆ Ę Ę Ę Ę ∆ ∆ Ę Ę Ę NOTE ∆: Can
  • Page 5194. PMC PARAMETERS SETTING AND B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) DISPLAY (PMCPRM) [PMC–SC/SC3/SC4 on SETTING screen] PMC PRM (SETTING) MONIT RUN PROGRAMMER ENABLE = 0(0:NO 1:YES) (K17. 1) LADDER START (RAM) = 0(0:MANUAL 1:AUTO) (K17. 2) RAM WRITE ENABLE = 0(0:NO 1:YES) (K17. 4) SIGNAL TRACE START =
  • Page 5204. PMC PARAMETERS SETTING AND DISPLAY (PMCPRM) PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 [PMC–NB/NB2 on SETTING screen] PMC PRM (SETTING) MONIT RUN NB NB2 PROGRAMMER ENABLE = 0 (0:NO 1:YES) (K17. 1, K900.1) AUTOMATIC LADDER START = 0 (0:MANUAL 1:AUTO) (K17. 2, K900.2) RAM WRITE ENABLE IN [M.SRC] = 0 (0:NO
  • Page 5214. PMC PARAMETERS SETTING AND B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) DISPLAY (PMCPRM) NC WINDOW FORMAT (TOOL DATA) The format in functional instruction WINDR and WINDW are set. When “MANUAL” is selected by “SPECIFY NC WINDOW FORMAT”, this item is effective. The window instruction of a new format can be
  • Page 5224. PMC PARAMETERS SETTING AND DISPLAY (PMCPRM) PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 Each setting parameter can be set when the respective conditions are satisfied. (a) Multi–language display function D The PROGRAM ENABLE setting parameter is set to YES (bit 1 of K17 or bit 1 of K900 is set to 1). D T
  • Page 5234. PMC PARAMETERS SETTING AND B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) DISPLAY (PMCPRM) (b) OVERRIDE mode of the forced input/output function D Set OVERRIDE mode by using the soft key or by entering 0 or 1 followed by the key. PMC PRM (OVERRIDE) MONIT RUN OVERRIDE ENABLE = 0 (0:NO 1:YES) [ NO ] [
  • Page 5244. PMC PARAMETERS SETTING AND DISPLAY (PMCPRM) PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 4.5 If you make a keyboard without cursor keys, you must move cursor by searching the address or so. In case of TIMER,COUNTER and KEEP NOTE RELAY, press the soft key [TIMER],[COUNTR] or [KEEPRL] after typing the addre
  • Page 5255. PMC LADDER DIAGRAM DISPLAY B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) (PMCLAD) 5 PMC LADDER DIAGRAM DISPLAY (PMCLAD) Displaying the PMC ladder diagram on CRT/MDI panel is available. This ladder diagram display function offers functions effectively used for locating troubles in addition to the simple lad
  • Page 5265. PMC LADDER DIAGRAM DISPLAY (PMCLAD) PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 5.1 The following functions can be done the ladder diagram display screen. LADDER DIAGRAM (a) Specified relay coil of ladder diagrams can be searched and displayed. DISPLAY (b) Ladder diagram dynamic display. The logical on-o
  • Page 5275. PMC LADDER DIAGRAM DISPLAY B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) (PMCLAD) 5.2 Ladder diagram and signal status dump can be displayed together. DUMP DISPLAY ON The dump is displayed over 2 lines at the last line of ladder diagram by LADDER DIAGRAM pressing the [DUMP] soft key. PAGE°± keys or [SEARCH
  • Page 5285. PMC LADDER DIAGRAM DISPLAY (PMCLAD) PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 5.3 The value of parameter of a functional instruction is displayed in the functional instruction of a ladder diagram. PARAMETER DISPLAY ON LADDER *TITLE DATA REMARKS 32 BYTES * NET 00001-00004 MONIT RUN LADDER DIAGRAM X1000.
  • Page 5295. PMC LADDER DIAGRAM DISPLAY B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) (PMCLAD) 5.3.1 The Value of Functional Instruction Parameter Data length of instruction Functional Data parameter (1: byte, 2: word, 4: d. word) Displaying No. instruction no. s form 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 END1 0 2 END2 0 3 TMR (NOTE3) 2 4 4 B
  • Page 5305. PMC LADDER DIAGRAM DISPLAY (PMCLAD) PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 Data length of instruction Functional Data parameter (1: byte, 2: word, 4: d. word) Displaying No. instruction no. s form 1 2 3 4 5 6 55 CTRC (NOTE4) 2 2 2 Binary 56 57 DIFU 0 58 DIFD 0 59 EOR 3 1/2/4 1/2/4 1/2/4 HEX 60 AND 3
  • Page 5315. PMC LADDER DIAGRAM DISPLAY B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) (PMCLAD) 5.4 If symbol data and comments are defined to the PMC address, a comment is displayed for symbol display and relay coil. SYMBOL AND COMMENT DISPLAY By pressing soft key [ADRESS], the symbol displayed relay is address-display
  • Page 5325. PMC LADDER DIAGRAM DISPLAY (PMCLAD) PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 5.5 Specified relay coil points of ladder diagrams can be displayed on the screen. SEARCH OF SPECIFIED RELAY For this operation, press [SEARCH] soft key to bring the following menu. COIL POINTS IN LADDER DIAGRAM SEARCH ADRESS
  • Page 5335. PMC LADDER DIAGRAM DISPLAY B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) (PMCLAD) 5.6 STOP OF LADDER Ę : Can be used : Cannot be us DIAGRAM DISPLAY PA1 PA3 SA1 SA2 SA3 SA5 SB SB2 SB3 SB4 SB5 SB6 SC SC3 SC4 NB NB2 BY TRIGGER OF Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę ∆ ∆ Ę Ę Ę SIGNAL NOTE ∆: Can be used for the specific series of CN
  • Page 5345. PMC LADDER DIAGRAM DISPLAY (PMCLAD) PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 * Because parameters are stored in the nonvolatile memory, they are not lost even if the power is turned off. When bit 2 of keep relay K18 is set to 1 after parameters for sampling are specified, the trigger function automati
  • Page 5355. PMC LADDER DIAGRAM DISPLAY B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) (PMCLAD) 5.7 This function is used for dividing display of ladder diagram. DIVIDING DISPLAY The maximum number of division is 6. OF LADDER LADDER *TITLE DATA REMARKS 32 BYTES * NET 00001-00004 MONIT RUN DIAGRAM *NET NO. 00001 – 00001
  • Page 5365. PMC LADDER DIAGRAM DISPLAY (PMCLAD) PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 (5) [WIDTH] : Change the width of division by using [EXPAND] or [SHRINK] soft key. (6) [EXPAND] : The divided screen is expanded. (7) [SHRINK] : The divided screen is shrank. 502
  • Page 5375. PMC LADDER DIAGRAM DISPLAY B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) (PMCLAD) 5.8 ON–LINE EDIT Ę : Can be used ∆ : Option : Cannot be used PA1 PA3 SA1 SA2 SA3 SA5 SB SB2 SB3 SB4 SB5 SB6 SC SC3 SC4 NB NB2 ∆ Ę Ę ∆ ∆ Ę Ę ∆ ∆ Ę Ę Ę NOTE ∆: Can be used for the specific series of CNC (Series 16 : B005/11 to,
  • Page 5386. USER PMC SCREEN (PMCMDI) PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 6 USER PMC SCREEN (PMCMDI) 504
  • Page 539B–61863E/15 PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) 6. USER PMC SCREEN (PMCMDI) 6.1 This user PMC screen is open to users, and it employs function key . It is applicable only when C language programming has FOR THE FS16 been made. For details, see the PMC–SC/SC3/SC4/NB programming (PMC–SC, PMC–SC3, manual f
  • Page 540
  • Page 541III. PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI)
  • Page 542
  • Page 543B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) 1. GENERAL 1 GENERAL This PMC programmer is used to set PMC system parameters and also generate and execute sequence programs by using soft keys on the CRT/MDI panel. For this operation, the PMC debugging RAM must be mounted in the CNC in advance. For the CRT/MDI
  • Page 5441. GENERAL PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 1.1 See Part IV, “PMC–NB6 Manupiration Screen” for an explanation of the FS15i PMC–NB6. ABOUT THE FS15i PMC–NB6 PROGRAMMER 1.2 See Part V, “FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 Manupiration Screen” for an explanation of the FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7. ABO
  • Page 5452. COMPONENT UNITS AND B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) CONNECTIONS 2 COMPONENT UNITS AND CONNECTIONS This section describes only the 16/18–MODEL A. For other models, refer to the order list and the connection manual for each model. The units required for generating a sequence program and connec
  • Page 5462. COMPONENT UNITS AND CONNECTIONS PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 2.1 1) PCB and module for PMC COMPONENT UNITS This is PCB and module for PMC. The type of board is as follows; a) Series 16 i) PMC–SB (Main CPU board) D PMC control module (A20B–2900–0560) D Debugging RAM module (A20B–2900–0530)
  • Page 5472. COMPONENT UNITS AND B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) CONNECTIONS Configuration of the main CPU board (Series 16) Connector Connector Drawing number : A16B–2200–0900 name name Application LED PMC–SB ROM CPU CRT JA1 CRT video signal 13 MDI JA2 MDI keyboard R232–1 JD5A RS–232–C serial port R232–
  • Page 5482. COMPONENT UNITS AND CONNECTIONS PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 Configuration of the option 3 board (Series 16) Drawing number : A16B–2200–0940 (PMC–SC+CAP II) A16B–2200–0941 (only for PMC–SC) Connector Connector A16B–2200–0943 (only for CAP II) Name Name Application LED Module 1 2 3 4 5 6 I
  • Page 5492. COMPONENT UNITS AND B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) CONNECTIONS Configuration of the Main CPU Board (Series 18) Connector Connector Drawing number : A16B–2201–0080 Name No. Description LED PMC–RA1/RA2 CRT JA1 CRT video signal ROM MDI JA2 MDI keyboard 16 R232–1 JD5A RS–232–C serial port R232–
  • Page 5502. COMPONENT UNITS AND CONNECTIONS PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 2) Debugging RAM This is used for debugging sequence programs. Since this debugging RAM memory is backed up by the battery, the memory data contents are not erased even when turning off the power supply. CAUTION If a RAM parity
  • Page 5512. COMPONENT UNITS AND B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) CONNECTIONS 2.2 (1) Connecting the debugging RAM module CONNECTING a) PMC–SB, –SB2 and –SB3 : Connect the module to portion 3 shown in Fig. 2.1 (a). COMPONENT UNITS b) PMC–SC and PMC–SC3 : Connect the module to portion 1 shown in Fig. 2.1 (
  • Page 5523. SELECTION OF PROGRAMMER MENUS BY SOFTKEYS PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 3 SELECTION OF PROGRAMMER MENUS BY SOFTKEYS To operate the PMC programmer, set bit 1 in K17 of the keep relay area for PMC parameters to 1, enabling the programmer basic menu to be displayed. To display the programmer
  • Page 5533. SELECTION OF PROGRAMMER B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) MENUS BY SOFTKEYS (2) Relation between programmer menus and soft keys The relation between programmer menus and soft keys are different according to each function as shown in the following figure. These menus are selected by pressing re
  • Page 5544. SPECIFYING AND DISPLAYING SYSTEM PARAMETERS (SYSPRM) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 4 SPECIFYING AND DISPLAYING SYSTEM PARAMETERS (SYSPRM) Display the system parameter screen by pressing soft key [SYSPRM] on the basic programmer menu. Move the cursor to necessary system parameters and speci
  • Page 5554. SPECIFYING AND DISPLAYING SYSTEM PARAMETERS B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) (SYSPRM) 100% 120% 8 msec 8 msec 1st and 2nd level 1st and 2nd level parts of the ladder parts of the ladder program program 5 ms 6 ms Others Others 3 ms 2 ms (3) LANGUAGE EXEC Specifies the division ratio of executi
  • Page 5564. SPECIFYING AND DISPLAYING SYSTEM PARAMETERS (SYSPRM) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 (b) LED DO ADDRESS Specify a PMC address representing the first address of the external DO actually connected (Y0 to Y127, Y200 to Y327, or Y1000 to Y1014). (c) KEY BIT IMAGE ADDRESS Specify a PMC address re
  • Page 5574. SPECIFYING AND DISPLAYING SYSTEM PARAMETERS B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) (SYSPRM) NOTE 1. PMC model for FANUC LADDER–II /Ladder Editing Package is PMC–SB6 (IO–2) or PMC–SB6 (STEP SEQ, IO–2)(case of using the step sequence method). 2. PMC model of FANUC LADDER–II /Ladder Editing Package is
  • Page 5584. SPECIFYING AND DISPLAYING SYSTEM PARAMETERS (SYSPRM) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 PMC SYSTEM PARAMETER COUNTER DATA TYPE = BINARY/BCD IGNORE DIVIDE CODE = NO/YES > [BINARY] [ BCD ] [ ] [ ] [ ] Fig. 4(b) PMC–SB series system parameter screen (1st page) PMC SYSTEM PARAMETER MONIT STOP COUNT
  • Page 5594. SPECIFYING AND DISPLAYING SYSTEM PARAMETERS B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) (SYSPRM) PMC SYSTEM PARAMETER (1/2) MONIT STOP COUNTER DATA TYPE = BINARY/BCD IGNORE DIVIDE CODE = YES/NO > [BINARY] [ BCD ] [ ] [ ] [ ] Fig. 4(d) PMC–SB4/SB6 system parameter screen (1st page) PMC SYSTEM PARAMETER (
  • Page 5604. SPECIFYING AND DISPLAYING SYSTEM PARAMETERS (SYSPRM) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 PMC SYSTEM PARAMETER (2/2) MONIT STOP FS0 OPERATOR PANEL = YES/NO KEY DI ADDRESS = X100 LED DO ADDRESS = Y100 KEY BIT IMAGE ADDRESS = R900 LED BIT IMAGE ADDRESS = R910 > [ YES ] [ NO ] [ ] [ ] [ ] Fig. 4(f)
  • Page 5615. EDITING OF SEQUENCE B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) PROGRAM (EDIT) 5 EDITING OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM (EDIT) Press soft key [EDIT] of the programmer basic menu to bring the following menu. For setting the CLEAR or I/O unit address, press the [NEXT] key to bring another menu. Each menu of [EDIT] c
  • Page 5625. EDITING OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM (EDIT) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 5.1 The title data refers to the title of the sequence program created by the machine tool builder. The data consists of the following ten items: SPECIFYING AND DISPLAYING TITLE D Machine tool builder name (32 characters) DAT
  • Page 5635. EDITING OF SEQUENCE B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) PROGRAM (EDIT) 5.1.3 When the length of the cursor is the same as the maximum number of Editing Character characters, pressing the [INSERT] key enables the operator to edit character strings. Then, the length of the cursor is changed to tha
  • Page 5645. EDITING OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM (EDIT) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 PMC TITLE DATA #3 MONIT RUN DATE OF PROGRAMING : f · · · · · · · · · · · · · f PROGRAM DESIGNED BY : f · · · · · · · · · · · · · f ROM WRITTEN BY : f · · · · · · · · · · · · · f REMARKS : f · · · · · · · · · · · · · f [INSERT
  • Page 5655. EDITING OF SEQUENCE B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) PROGRAM (EDIT) 5.2 Input, insert, delete, and search a sequence program as described below. The relation between these functions and soft keys is as shown below. SEQUENCE PROGRAM RUN EDIT I/O SYSPRM MONIT (STOP) GENERATION RET (LADDER) TITL
  • Page 5665. EDITING OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM (EDIT) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 NOTE Soft keys ( [ ] or [ ])([ ] or [ ] ) are used for producing or deleting an upper left vertical line or upper right vertical line on the ladder diagram. The solid line display vertical line indicates the production, while
  • Page 5675. EDITING OF SEQUENCE B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) PROGRAM (EDIT) 1 Press soft key [ ] after moving the cursor to the start position. Symbol [ ] is input to the cursor position and HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL is displayed at the lower right part of the CRT screen. This is a caution message to s
  • Page 5685. EDITING OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM (EDIT) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 CAUTION 1 When the ladder program displayed on the screen is incomplete (when, for example, addresses have not been entered) or erroneous, the screen cannot be scrolled even when a page key is pressed. Before attempting to sc
  • Page 5695. EDITING OF SEQUENCE B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) PROGRAM (EDIT) Functional instruction table When a wrong functional instruction is entered or [FUNCTN] key only is pressed; FUNCTN [NEXT] key (to display the subsequent functional instruction table) Functional instruction generation soft ke
  • Page 5705. EDITING OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM (EDIT) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 5.2.2 The method of altering a generated sequence program is the same as Alteration of Sequence described in 5.2.1. Move the cursor to the program part to be altered and input change data. Programs 5.2.3 Insert of Sequence Pr
  • Page 5715. EDITING OF SEQUENCE B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) PROGRAM (EDIT) 4 Shift the cursor to a line of contact insert position. 5 Press soft key [ ] to add contacts. (2) For inserting vertical line; Insert For inserting a vertical line as shown in the above figure, the inserting area is required
  • Page 5725. EDITING OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM (EDIT) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 Cursor If the [INSLIN] key is pressed when the cursor is in the position specified as shown in the above figure on the left, the line is inserted as shown in the above figure on the right. (4) Inserting the 1 NET sequence pro
  • Page 5735. EDITING OF SEQUENCE B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) PROGRAM (EDIT) 5.2.4 (1) Delete a part of sequence program by using three kinds of soft keys after setting the cursor to the portion from which the sequence Delete of Sequence program is to be deleted. Program [ ] : Delete of horizontal lin
  • Page 5745. EDITING OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM (EDIT) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 X 2.0 R20.1 Y 1.2 R6.4 R0.5 For searching the same address as specified here, set the cursor to this position, and press soft key [SRCH]. R20.1 R0.5 X 4.2 R21.0 Y 2.0 R20.1 R2.2 R0.4 The same address is searched, and the curs
  • Page 5755. EDITING OF SEQUENCE B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) PROGRAM (EDIT) a) Method of specifying the address by the cursor Set the cursor to the relay contact part of the address to be searched and press soft key [SRCH]. The system searches the same address as the address specified by the cursor f
  • Page 5765. EDITING OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM (EDIT) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 (6) Soft key [F–SRCH] Type in the functional instruction number and press the [F–SRCH] key to start searching the functional instruction. When the [F–SRCH] key is pressed during execution of a functional instruction, the func
  • Page 5775. EDITING OF SEQUENCE B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) PROGRAM (EDIT) 5 If the cursor is moved to the first NET and the number of NETs is typed in when the NETs to be copied are known, steps 1 through 3 can be omitted by pressing the [COPY] key. NOTE An error NET cannot be copied. 5.2.7 The seq
  • Page 5785. EDITING OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM (EDIT) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 5.2.8 While editing a sequence program, symbol data and comment can be Editing Symbol Data edited. and Comment at Once (1) The symbol data and comment assigned to undefined address can be edited. a) Move the cursor to the pos
  • Page 5795. EDITING OF SEQUENCE B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) PROGRAM (EDIT) (1) Changing the address while checking it one by one a) Press the [CHANGE] key. b) Input the original address and press the [O–ADR] key. c) Input the new address and press the [N–ADR] key. d) Press the [EXEC] key for executi
  • Page 5805. EDITING OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM (EDIT) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 5.3 Set and delet the address of each module in I/O unit as follows. The relation between these functions and soft keys is as shown in the I/O UNIT ADDRESS following figure. SETTING (MODULE) RUN EDIT I/O SYSPRM MONIT RETURN T
  • Page 5815. EDITING OF SEQUENCE B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) PROGRAM (EDIT) PMC I/O MODULE ADDRESS GROUP BASE SLOT NAME ADDRESS GROUP BASE SLOT NAME X000 2 0 2 ID16C Y000 3 0 1 #1 I/O Unit X001 2 0 2 ID16C Y001 3 0 5 #1 MODEL B X002 3 0 9 #2 Y002 X003 3 0 9 #2 Y003 X004 3 0 30 #2 Y004 2 0 1 OD16C I/O
  • Page 5825. EDITING OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM (EDIT) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 (6) Error and warning messages issued during the editing of assignment data No. Error or warning message Description 1 ERR : GROUP NO. (0–15) The group number must be from 0 to 15. 2 ERR : BASE NO. (0–3) The base number must
  • Page 5835. EDITING OF SEQUENCE B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) PROGRAM (EDIT) 5.4 A signal name (within 6 alphanumeric characters) can be attached to I/O signals and internal relays employed in sequence programs. SYMBOL DATA SETTING (SYMBOL) Also, a comment (within 30 alphanumeric characters) can be at
  • Page 5845. EDITING OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM (EDIT) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 When soft key [SYMBOL] is pressed, the following screen is displayed, and the soft key operation is done hereafter. SYMBOL & COMMENT 001 ADDRESS SYMBOL COMMENT *---------* *------*-------*--------------* Fig. 5.4(b) Symbol da
  • Page 5855. EDITING OF SEQUENCE B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) PROGRAM (EDIT) 5.4.4 The edit modes can be changed by pressing the [INPMOD] soft key as Editing Character follows: Strings of Symbol Data Character string edit status and Comment Data Maximum Insertion mode Replacement character input (INSE
  • Page 5865. EDITING OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM (EDIT) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 5.4.6 Copy the specified data to re–edit and register it. Function of Copying Symbol and Comment INPMOD DELETE SEARCH COPY Data RETURN SYMBOL ALL CANCEL UNTIL CANCEL EXEC INPMOD DELETE CANCEL (1) Press the [COPY] soft key. (2
  • Page 5875. EDITING OF SEQUENCE B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) PROGRAM (EDIT) 5.5 Message data are used for PMC functional instruction DISPB (SUB 41). MESSAGE DATA The setting and display methods are as shown below. SETTING (MESSAGE) RUN EDIT I/O SYSPRM MONIT (STOP) RET TITLE LADDER SYMBOL MESAGE RET I
  • Page 5885. EDITING OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM (EDIT) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 5.5.1 Refer to Fig. 5.5 (a) and Fig. 5.5 (b). Display the screen shown in Fig. 5.5 Message Data Input (b). 1 Display a number to set a message data by using PAGE key. 2 Shift the cursor to this number by the cursor key. 3 Aft
  • Page 5895. EDITING OF SEQUENCE B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) PROGRAM (EDIT) 5.5.4 If no “@” key on the MDI key, pressing the [ETC] soft key enables the Input with a Katakana operator to enter the data enclosed between at signs (@). Identification Code When the soft key is pressed, ”ETC CODE” is displ
  • Page 5905. EDITING OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM (EDIT) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 5.6 CLEARING THE RUN EDIT I/O SYSPRM SEQUENCE (STOP) PROGRAM AND RET CONDENSATION OF TITLE LADDER SYMBOL MESAGE THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM RET NEXT MODULE CROSS CLEAR CLRTTL CLRLAD CLRSYM CLRMSG CLRLNG NEXT CLRALL CLRMDL CONDNS CLR
  • Page 5915. EDITING OF SEQUENCE B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) PROGRAM (EDIT) (8) [CONDNS] : Compress the sequence program in 1KB units. The detail will be explained chapter 5.6.2. (9) [CLRPRM] : Clears each parameter data. The detail will be explained chapter 5.6.3. (10) [CLREXT] : Clears the expand n
  • Page 5925. EDITING OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM (EDIT) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 5.7 The cross reference is displayed for PMC address and functional instruction used in a sequence program. CROSS REFERENCE DISPLAY Cross reference display has the following functions. (1) Display NET number by specifying the
  • Page 5935. EDITING OF SEQUENCE B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) PROGRAM (EDIT) 5.7.2 To display cross reference, the address and reference type need to be Parameter Setting specified on the parameter screen. Screen Display the reference of 1. In “SELECT CROSS TYPE”, input “1”. addresses which are 2. In
  • Page 5945. EDITING OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM (EDIT) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 Display the reference of 1. In “SELECT CROSS TYPE”, input “2”. each address name 2. In “2: ADRS KIND”, input the address name. 3. Press [CRSREF] key. The bit/byte addresses and the related symbol in the sequence program will
  • Page 5955. EDITING OF SEQUENCE B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) PROGRAM (EDIT) Display a functional 1. In “SELECT CROSS TYPE”, input “3”. instruction list in use 2. In “3: FUNCTION. NO”, input “0”. 3. Press [CRSREF] key. The functional instruction name and the functional instruction number in the sequen
  • Page 5965. EDITING OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM (EDIT) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 Display the reference of 1. In “SELECT CROSS TYPE”, input “3”. functional instruction 2. In “3: FUNCTION. NO”, input the functional instruction number. (FUNCTION. NO = number of the functional 3. Press [CRSREF] key. instructi
  • Page 5976. EXECUTION OF A SEQUENCE B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) PROGRAM 6 EXECUTION OF A SEQUENCE PROGRAM 563
  • Page 5986. EXECUTION OF A SEQUENCE PROGRAM PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 6.1 Start and Stop of a sequence program are described as follows. START AND STOP OF PMCLAD PMCDCN PMCPPM A SEQUENCE PROGRAM RETURN RUN EDIT I/O SYSPRM MONIT or STOP Fig. 6.1 The sequence program execution software key An operab
  • Page 5996. EXECUTION OF A SEQUENCE B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) PROGRAM 6.2 The sequence program can be automatically started immediately after power–on, when bit 2 of keep relay K17 (PMC parameter) is set to 1. STARTING THE SEQUENCE NOTE PROGRAM For the Series 16/18–MODEL B/C, Series 16i/18i/21i/15
  • Page 6007. WRITING, READING, AND VERIFYING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM AND PMC PARAMETER DATA PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 7 WRITING, READING, AND VERIFYING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM AND PMC PARAMETER DATA When the [I/O] key is pressed, the sequence program and PMC data are written, read, or collated for the sp
  • Page 6017. WRITING, READING, AND VERIFYING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM AND B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) PMC PARAMETER DATA 7.1 When the [I/O] key is pressed, the sequence program and PMC data are written, read, or collated for the specified device. Operations are OVERVIEW performed with cursor keys and sof
  • Page 6027. WRITING, READING, AND VERIFYING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM AND PMC PARAMETER DATA PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 CAUTION The sequence program can be output while the ladder is being executed, but the output speed is low. When the sequence program is input while the ladder is being executed, the e
  • Page 6037. WRITING, READING, AND VERIFYING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM AND B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) PMC PARAMETER DATA 7.2 (1) CHANNEL SET ITEMS Specify which connector the reader/punch interface (such as RS–232C) is connected to. CHANNEL must be set when HOST, FDCAS, or OTHERS is selected for DEVICE.
  • Page 6047. WRITING, READING, AND VERIFYING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM AND PMC PARAMETER DATA PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 (4) FUNCTION Select the direction of data transfer between the PMC and input/output device. Item Description WRITE Outputs data from the PMC to an input/output device. READ Inputs data
  • Page 6057. WRITING, READING, AND VERIFYING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM AND B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) PMC PARAMETER DATA 7.3 OPERATIONS 7.3.1 (a) Setting the channel Transfer to and from a Move the cursor to “CHANNEL = .” Check that an RS–232C cable is connected to the main board. Enter the number (1 or
  • Page 6067. WRITING, READING, AND VERIFYING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM AND PMC PARAMETER DATA PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 (b) Setting the transfer conditions Press the [SPEED] soft key and set each condition. See Subsection 7.3.6 for details. (c) Writing a file Item Operation DEVICE Press the [FDCAS] soft
  • Page 6077. WRITING, READING, AND VERIFYING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM AND B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) PMC PARAMETER DATA 7.3.3 Storage to Flash ROM Ę : Supported : Not supported FS21i Power Power Mate–H FS21/ FS16–A FS16–B FS16–C FS18 FS16i FS15B Mate–D/F/G FS20 210MB FS21–A FS18–B FS18–C FS18i Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę
  • Page 6087. WRITING, READING, AND VERIFYING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM AND PMC PARAMETER DATA PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 CAUTION 1 Operation in PMC–NB/NB2 (a)If data is stored in FLASH ROM, a message is displayed to confirm writing. (b)RAM SIZE indicates the size of the sequence program. MAX SIZE indicat
  • Page 6097. WRITING, READING, AND VERIFYING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM AND B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) PMC PARAMETER DATA (e) Deleting data in FLASH ROM Item Operation DEVICE Press the [F–ROM] soft key. FUNCTION Press the [ERASE] soft key. Press the [EXEC] soft key to start deleting data. NOTE In FS16B/18
  • Page 6107. WRITING, READING, AND VERIFYING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM AND PMC PARAMETER DATA PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 The case of FS20,FS18B,FS16B FS18C, FS16C PMC Ę : Supported : Not supported Flash Memory SRAM Card ATA Card Card Read of a file Ę Ę Format of a card Ę Write of a file Ę Delete of a fil
  • Page 6117. WRITING, READING, AND VERIFYING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM AND B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) PMC PARAMETER DATA Before Writing File–A File–B File–C Add File–D 128Kbyte After writing File–A File–B File–C File–D 128Kbyte “CLOSE ERROR” is displayed and File–D cannot be saved. In the part of the ,th
  • Page 6127. WRITING, READING, AND VERIFYING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM AND PMC PARAMETER DATA PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 (a) When the card formatted and written files by FANUC products is used by other systems. Ramu–zou CardPro Note1) Note2) Read of a file Ę Ę Add of file Not supported function List of f
  • Page 6137. WRITING, READING, AND VERIFYING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM AND B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) PMC PARAMETER DATA (2) Operation The operation is almost the same as Subsection 7.3.2 except that steps (a) and (b) are not necessary for a memory card. PMC I/O PROGRAM MONIT STOP CHANNEL = 1 DEVICE = M–
  • Page 6147. WRITING, READING, AND VERIFYING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM AND PMC PARAMETER DATA PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 (d) Collating a file Item Operation DEVICE Press the [M–CARD] soft key. FUNCTION Press the [COMPAR] soft key. FILE NO. Enter the number or name of the file to be collated. Press the [E
  • Page 6157. WRITING, READING, AND VERIFYING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM AND B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) PMC PARAMETER DATA 7.3.5 Data Input to and Ę : Supported Output from other : Not supported Devices Power FS20 FS21/ FS18 FS16 FS18B FS16B FS16–C FS21i FS16i FS15B Mate 210MB FS18–C FS18i Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę
  • Page 6167. WRITING, READING, AND VERIFYING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM AND PMC PARAMETER DATA PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 CAUTION If DATA ERROR is displayed when a C program is written with the Series 16i/18i, perform the following: 1 Clear the C language area by pressing soft keys [EDIT], [CLEAR], [CLRLN
  • Page 6177. WRITING, READING, AND VERIFYING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM AND B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) PMC PARAMETER DATA The items shown above must be set when RS–232C is used for communication. Move the cursor to each item and enter a number. Pressing the [INIT] soft key sets each item to the initial va
  • Page 6187. WRITING, READING, AND VERIFYING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM AND PMC PARAMETER DATA PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 7.3.8 When the machine tool builder creates a MDI keyboard which has no Notes on Using an MDI cursor keys on the PMC–MODEL SA1/SA3 of the FS 20, note the following methods of operation
  • Page 6197. WRITING, READING, AND VERIFYING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM AND B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) PMC PARAMETER DATA 7.4 I/O ERROR MESSAGES Message CONTENTS ³ OPERATION PROGRAM ALREADY EXISTS A program is already stored in the FLASH ROM (during blank check). PROGRAM ALREADY EXISTS (EXEC ?) A program
  • Page 6207. WRITING, READING, AND VERIFYING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM AND PMC PARAMETER DATA PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 Message CONTENTS ³ OPERATION CREATE ERROR The file name is invalid. Action) Name the file is the MS–DOS format (see(5) of Section 7.2). NO MORE SPACE The memory card capacity is insuff
  • Page 6217. WRITING, READING, AND VERIFYING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM AND B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) PMC PARAMETER DATA 7.5 The data items of the sequence program stored in EPROM can be copied into the debugging RAM module for PMC–SA1, PMC–SA2, PMC–SB, SEQUENCE and PMC–SB2. PROGRAM COPY The following sh
  • Page 6227. WRITING, READING, AND VERIFYING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM AND PMC PARAMETER DATA PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 7.5.5 Copies all the sequence programs into the debugging RAM. Copy the Sequence Programs [CPYALL] 7.5.6 Copies I/O module data. Copy I/O Module Data [CPYMDL] CAUTION If the I/O module
  • Page 6238. FUNCTIONS FOR DISPLAYING MEMORY AREAS AND DEBUGGING B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) THE PROGRAM (MONIT) 8 FUNCTIONS FOR DISPLAYING MEMORY AREAS AND DEBUGGING THE PROGRAM (MONIT) Press the [MONIT] soft key on the basic programmer menu to display the basic monitor menu shown in Fig. 8. Pressin
  • Page 6248. FUNCTIONS FOR DISPLAYING MEMORY AREAS AND DEBUGGING THE PROGRAM (MONIT) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 PMC MONITOR MENU MONIT STOP SELECT ONE OF FOLLOWING SOFT KEYS DBGLAD : DEBUG LADDER DIAGRAM GDT : DESCRIPTOR TABLE MAP USRMEM : USER MEMORY INFORMATION DEBUG : DEBUG FUNCTION [DBGLAD] [ ON
  • Page 6258. FUNCTIONS FOR DISPLAYING MEMORY AREAS AND DEBUGGING B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) THE PROGRAM (MONIT) 8.1 Information of a User Program Coded in C DISPLAYING THE GDT Nos. 32 to 95 defined in a user program can be displayed. GDT (GLOBAL The specified GDTs can also be dumped. DESCRIPTOR TABL
  • Page 6268. FUNCTIONS FOR DISPLAYING MEMORY AREAS AND DEBUGGING THE PROGRAM (MONIT) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 PMC DESCRIPTOR TABLE(GDT) MONIT RUN NO. ACCESS USE BASE LIMIT 032 RW 16 0016000AH 0000056FH 033 RW 16 0016005AH 0000023FH 034 RW 16 00160300H 00000040H 035 RW 16 00160340H 00000234H 036 ER
  • Page 6278. FUNCTIONS FOR DISPLAYING MEMORY AREAS AND DEBUGGING B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) THE PROGRAM (MONIT) 8.1.2 Descriptions of Displayed Items NO. ACCESS USE BASE LIMIT 32 ER 16 00862340H 0000523FH Segment limit Segment base Segment type Segment attribute GDT NO. (1) Access attribute of a seg
  • Page 6288. FUNCTIONS FOR DISPLAYING MEMORY AREAS AND DEBUGGING THE PROGRAM (MONIT) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 8.2 The segment information of the following areas defined by a user program for each task can be displayed and the contents of the areas can be dumped. DISPLAYING THE MEMORY D Data area A
  • Page 6298. FUNCTIONS FOR DISPLAYING MEMORY AREAS AND DEBUGGING B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) THE PROGRAM (MONIT) WARNING Depending on the settings, a user program may operate erroneously, causing a system error. Be sure to specify the correct settings. PMC USER MEMORY(TASK DATA) MONIT RUN ID NAME GDT
  • Page 6308. FUNCTIONS FOR DISPLAYING MEMORY AREAS AND DEBUGGING THE PROGRAM (MONIT) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 PMC USER MEMORY(COMMON DATA) MONIT RUN NO. GDT BASE LIMIT 01 042 00162010H 00000100H 02 045 00162020H 000A0100H 03 047 00162030H 0000D000H 04 048 00162040H 0000A100H > [TASK.D] [TASK.S] [C
  • Page 6318. FUNCTIONS FOR DISPLAYING MEMORY AREAS AND DEBUGGING B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) THE PROGRAM (MONIT) 8.3 There are two ways to check if a user program operates as intended. One is to execute the program while displaying the sequence on an external DEBUGGING unit such as a display monitor.
  • Page 6328. FUNCTIONS FOR DISPLAYING MEMORY AREAS AND DEBUGGING THE PROGRAM (MONIT) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 8.3.3 When the debug function is used, it is necessary to set the break conditions Parameter Screen on the parameter screen. When using a 9” screen, press the key to set a trace da
  • Page 6338. FUNCTIONS FOR DISPLAYING MEMORY AREAS AND DEBUGGING B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) THE PROGRAM (MONIT) (e) TASK ID Specify the task ID of a program. This parameter is convenient for identifying the program when it is to be interrupted at a breakpoint located in a function called from multip
  • Page 6348. FUNCTIONS FOR DISPLAYING MEMORY AREAS AND DEBUGGING THE PROGRAM (MONIT) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 (4) Changing a breakpoint Up to four breakpoints can be specified. For each breakpoint, parameters are specified and traced data is stored. To select a desired breakpoint, press the [BRK.N
  • Page 6358. FUNCTIONS FOR DISPLAYING MEMORY AREAS AND DEBUGGING B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) THE PROGRAM (MONIT) 8.3.4 When a program is interrupted under the break condition specified on the Screen for Displaying parameter screen, BRK blinks at the bottom right of the PMC screen. The breakpoint numb
  • Page 6368. FUNCTIONS FOR DISPLAYING MEMORY AREAS AND DEBUGGING THE PROGRAM (MONIT) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 8.4 LADDER Ę : Can be used : Cannot be used DEBUGGING ∆ : To use this function, a ladder editing module is required FUNCTION PA1 PA3 SA1 SA2 SA3 SA5 SB SB2 SB3 SB4 SB5 SB6 SB7 SC SC3 SC4 N
  • Page 6378. FUNCTIONS FOR DISPLAYING MEMORY AREAS AND DEBUGGING B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) THE PROGRAM (MONIT) 8.4.2 For this operation, press [DBGLAD] soft key to bring the following Soft Key Menu of menu. Ladder Debugging Function DBGLAD ONLINE GDT USRMEM DEBUG RET SEARCH STEP BRKCTL DUMP Subsec.
  • Page 6388. FUNCTIONS FOR DISPLAYING MEMORY AREAS AND DEBUGGING THE PROGRAM (MONIT) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 8.4.3 Using this function, Step Operations such as single step, single net, and Step Operation [STEP] block steps until specified instruction are possible. [Function] (1) Step Operation to
  • Page 6398. FUNCTIONS FOR DISPLAYING MEMORY AREAS AND DEBUGGING B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) THE PROGRAM (MONIT) CAUTION Normally, transferring to the synchronous buffer is automatically performed at the beginning of the 2nd level ladder. 8.4.4 Using this function, the execution of the ladder can be
  • Page 6408. FUNCTIONS FOR DISPLAYING MEMORY AREAS AND DEBUGGING THE PROGRAM (MONIT) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 SEARCH STEP BRKCTL DUMP RET TRIGER SCAN INIT START (STOP) TRGON TRGOFF The function of [BRKCTL] soft key is as follows. (1) [TRIGER] : is used to specify the trigger condition by signal. T
  • Page 6418. FUNCTIONS FOR DISPLAYING MEMORY AREAS AND DEBUGGING B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) THE PROGRAM (MONIT) 8.5 f : Usable ONLINE FUNCTION ∆ : See Note : Not usable PA1 PA3 SA1 SA2 SA3 SA5 SB SB2 SB3 SB4 SB5 SB6 SC SC3 SC4 NB NB2 ∆ ∆ ∆ Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę NOTE 1 PMC–PA3 is usable with the Power Ma
  • Page 6428. FUNCTIONS FOR DISPLAYING MEMORY AREAS AND DEBUGGING THE PROGRAM (MONIT) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 8.5.1 Online Setting Screen Fig. 8.5.1 Online monitor setting screen Meanings of Soft key EMG ST : Terminates communication forcibly. Use this key if communication becomes abnormal and the
  • Page 6438. FUNCTIONS FOR DISPLAYING MEMORY AREAS AND DEBUGGING B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) THE PROGRAM (MONIT) 8.5.2.1 To display the soft key [MONIT] in the PMC main menu screen, set How to set at PMC ”PROGRAMMER ENABLE” to ”YES” in the setting screen. When pushing the soft key Screen [MONIT]–>[ON
  • Page 6448. FUNCTIONS FOR DISPLAYING MEMORY AREAS AND DEBUGGING THE PROGRAM (MONIT) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 8.5.2.2 (1) Display the No.24 of NC parameter. How to set at NC (2) To connect by Ethernet or HSSB, input ”0”, ”11” or ”12”. parameter To connect by RS–232C, input ”1”, ”2”, ”11” or ”12”.
  • Page 6458. FUNCTIONS FOR DISPLAYING MEMORY AREAS AND DEBUGGING B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) THE PROGRAM (MONIT) 8.5.2.3 (1) Display the No.101 of NC parameter. How to set at NC (2) To connect by RS–232C, input ”1” to No.101#6. parameter (Power Mate–D/H) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0101 1 #6 0 : Online m
  • Page 6468. FUNCTIONS FOR DISPLAYING MEMORY AREAS AND DEBUGGING THE PROGRAM (MONIT) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 8.5.3 Online Function by Ethernet 8.5.3.1 When you try to connect FANUC LADDER–III or Ladder Editing Setting of Ethernet Package (Window version) with CNC by Ethernet, it is necessary to s
  • Page 6478. FUNCTIONS FOR DISPLAYING MEMORY AREAS AND DEBUGGING B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) THE PROGRAM (MONIT) 8.5.3.2 The procedures for online connection with PMC and the offline Starting online programmer (FANUC LADDER–III, Ladder Editing Package for windows) by Ethernet are as follows. communic
  • Page 6488. FUNCTIONS FOR DISPLAYING MEMORY AREAS AND DEBUGGING THE PROGRAM (MONIT) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 (3) Select the [Setting] tab, and add the IP Address to ”Use device”. (4) Push the button for start of the communication. Ladder Editing Package can be connected by the same oper
  • Page 6498. FUNCTIONS FOR DISPLAYING MEMORY AREAS AND DEBUGGING B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) THE PROGRAM (MONIT) 8.5.4 The communication status of RS–232C and HIGH SPEED I/F are Communication Status displayed at the online monitor screen during the online communication. Fig. 8.5.4 Online monitor sett
  • Page 6508. FUNCTIONS FOR DISPLAYING MEMORY AREAS AND DEBUGGING THE PROGRAM (MONIT) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 Displayed messages Meanings TIMEOUT(K) ERROR A time–out has occurred and communication is aborted. BCC ERROR A Block Check Code (packet parity) error has oc- curred. PARITY ERROR A parity
  • Page 6518. FUNCTIONS FOR DISPLAYING MEMORY AREAS AND DEBUGGING B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) THE PROGRAM (MONIT) Connection Log Meanings and countermeasures SnpErr:PDU=m,n,[x] date time An error has occurred during the online communication. m, n : Online communication information that is internal inf
  • Page 6529. ERROR MESSAGES (FOR EDIT) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 9 ERROR MESSAGES (FOR EDIT) Error messages (For EDIT 1) Message Contents and solution ADDRESS BIT NOTHING The address of the relay/coil is not set. FUNCTION NOT FOUND There is no functional instruction of the input number. COM FUNCTIO
  • Page 6539. ERROR MESSAGES B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) (FOR EDIT) Error messages (For EDIT 2) Message Contents and solution SYMBOL DATA DUPLICATE The same symbol name is defined in other place. COMMENT DATA OVERFLOW The comment data area was filled. (solution) Please reduce the number of the comment
  • Page 65410. ERROR MESSAGES (FOR I/O) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 10 ERROR MESSAGES (FOR I/O) Error messages (For I/O 2) Message Contents and solution I/O OPEN ERROR nn An error occurs when the reader/puncher interface was started. nn = –1 Because the interface is used with NC etc., the interface is
  • Page 65511. PMC PROGRAMMER (DPL/MDI) B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) (ONLY FOR THE Power Mate) 11 PMC PROGRAMMER (DPL/MDI) (ONLY FOR THE Power Mate) The DPL/MDI panel is used to set PMC system parameters and create and execute the sequence program. (1) Setting and displaying PMC system parameters (SYST
  • Page 65611. PMC PROGRAMMER (DPL/MDI) (ONLY FOR THE Power Mate) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 NOTE 1 With the PMC programmer (DPL/MDI) function, the characters indicated at the lower–left part of each key are used. 2 When the key is pressed once, the left–hand character is valid. When the
  • Page 65711. PMC PROGRAMMER (DPL/MDI) B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) (ONLY FOR THE Power Mate) 11.1 To operate the PMC programmer, set K17#1 of the keep relay area for PMC parameters to 1, then press the key two times on the SELECTING THE DPL/MDI (press the key further when the program
  • Page 65811. PMC PROGRAMMER (DPL/MDI) (ONLY FOR THE Power Mate) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 11.2 Selecting SYSTEM PARAM on the PMC programmer menu displays the system parameter screen. If the sequence program is running, selecting SETTING AND this function automatically stops the program. DISPLAYING
  • Page 65911. PMC PROGRAMMER (DPL/MDI) B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) (ONLY FOR THE Power Mate) 11.3 Selecting EDIT on the PMC programmer menu displays the editing menu. EDITING THE SEQUENCE 1 Display the PMC programmer menu. PROGRAM (EDIT) 2 Display the EDIT item by pressing the <↓> or <↑> key. PMC PRG
  • Page 66011. PMC PROGRAMMER (DPL/MDI) (ONLY FOR THE Power Mate) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 11.4 EDITING LADDER MNEMONICS 11.4.1 When ladder mnemonic editing (LADDER) is selected from the PMC Starting Ladder edit menu, the ladder mnemonic edit screen is displayed. When this function is selected, the
  • Page 66111. PMC PROGRAMMER (DPL/MDI) B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) (ONLY FOR THE Power Mate) 6 A sequence program is displayed. Step number > N0001 RD X0000.0 Instruction 11.4.2 1 Cursor scroll (scroll per step) Pressing the <↑> cursor key displays the instruction one step before Confirming the Ladde
  • Page 66211. PMC PROGRAMMER (DPL/MDI) (ONLY FOR THE Power Mate) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 NOTE 1 Relay search, relay coil search, and functional instruction search are started from the current screen. If the relay, relay coil, or instruction is not found by the end of the ladder program, search is
  • Page 66311. PMC PROGRAMMER (DPL/MDI) B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) (ONLY FOR THE Power Mate) 3 Inserting an instruction (a) Display the instruction after which an instruction is to be inserted. (b) Enter the instruction to be inserted. (c) Press the key. (Example) , , N1234
  • Page 66411. PMC PROGRAMMER (DPL/MDI) (ONLY FOR THE Power Mate) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 11.4.4 1 Press the or key. Ending Ladder 2 ”EXECUTING” is displayed. Mnemonics Editing N0001 EXECUTING 3 The PMC editing menu appears. NOTE 1 If the sequence program contains an error, the PMC e
  • Page 66511. PMC PROGRAMMER (DPL/MDI) B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) (ONLY FOR THE Power Mate) 11.5 Selecting RUN/STOP on the PMC programmer menu displays the sequence program start/stop screen. STARTING AND STOPPING THE 1 Display the PMC programmer menu. SEQUENCE 2 Display the RUN/STOP item by pressin
  • Page 66611. PMC PROGRAMMER (DPL/MDI) (ONLY FOR THE Power Mate) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 11.6 Displayed error message Error description (operator action) ERROR MESSAGES 1 COIL NOTHING No coil is specified for a functional instruction (FOR LADDER using a coil. MNEMONICS 2 COM FUNCTION MISSING The
  • Page 66711. PMC PROGRAMMER (DPL/MDI) B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) (ONLY FOR THE Power Mate) 11.7 Selecting I/O on the PMC programmer menu displays the screen for storing the sequence program into FLASH ROM. Before attempting to STORING THE store the sequence program into FLASH ROM, place the CNC in
  • Page 66811. PMC PROGRAMMER (DPL/MDI) (ONLY FOR THE Power Mate) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 11.8 The table below lists the details of the errors which may occur during storage into FLASH ROM using the DPL/MDI (only for the Power ERROR DETAILS Mate–H and Power Mate i–D/H). Error message Description P
  • Page 66911. PMC PROGRAMMER (DPL/MDI) B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) (ONLY FOR THE Power Mate) 11.9 INPUT/OUTPUT LADDER/ PMC–PARAMETER BY DPL/MDI 11.9.1 D Method of Inputting/Outputting Ladder Input/Output Method to (1) Select “Diagnose screen” by key in key. Office Programmer (2) Key in
  • Page 67011. PMC PROGRAMMER (DPL/MDI) (ONLY FOR THE Power Mate) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 11.10 The on–line debugging function enables the monitoring and modification of ladder programs and signal status on personal computer’s screen using ON–LINE a personal computer connected to the Power Mate th
  • Page 67111. PMC PROGRAMMER (DPL/MDI) B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) (ONLY FOR THE Power Mate) D Parameter in the Power Mate–D/H (No.0101#6) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0101 #6 = 0 : On–line monitor driver is not used. 1 : On–line monitor driver is used. NOTE In case of Power Mate–D two–path control, only
  • Page 67211. PMC PROGRAMMER (DPL/MDI) (ONLY FOR THE Power Mate) PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI) B–61863E/15 11.11 If in alarm is issued in the PMC, the alarn message is displayed on the CRT (PMC ALARM MESSAGE screeen). But in case of DPL/MDI, it ERROR LIST is displayed only by R–relay status (ON or Off). Refer to t
  • Page 673IV. PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION
  • Page 674
  • Page 675B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION 1. OVERVIEW 1 OVERVIEW In the NC system, clicking the [PMC] soft key on the [SYSTEM] menu enables the setting and display of data related to the PMC. The following screens are used to specify and display the PMC–related data. (1) Ladder diagram display and editing (P
  • Page 6762. SOFT KEY–BASED PMC MENU SELECTION PROCEDURE PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 2 SOFT KEY–BASED PMC MENU SELECTION PROCEDURE While the function key on the LCD/MDI is held down, clicking the [PMC] soft key displays the following PMC basic menu. 642
  • Page 6772. SOFT KEY–BASED PMC MENU B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION SELECTION PROCEDURE 2.1 Title line PMC BASIC MENU Status line Key in buffer Soft key (1) Title line This line displays the title of each PMC system screen. It also displays the status of the PMC system at the right–hand end. RUN STOP . . .
  • Page 6782. SOFT KEY–BASED PMC MENU SELECTION PROCEDURE PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 644
  • Page 6792. SOFT KEY–BASED PMC MENU B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION SELECTION PROCEDURE 2.2 PMC SCREEN TRANSITION AND RELATED SOFT KEYS NC system screen PMC < PMC basic menu screen PMCLAD Ladder diagram display/editing screen < TITLE Title screen PMCDGN STATUS Status screen < ALARM Alarm screen TRACE Trace
  • Page 6802. SOFT KEY–BASED PMC MENU SELECTION PROCEDURE PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 Continues from the previous page I/O I/O screen < RUN Program restart function or STOP TITLE Title data editor screen SYMBOL Symbol and comment data editor COMENT screen MISC Symbol and comment data editor DATA MESSAGE s
  • Page 6813. DISPLAYING PMC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND INTERNAL RELAY B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION (PMCDGN) 3 DISPLAYING PMC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND INTERNAL RELAY (PMCDGN) 647
  • Page 6823. DISPLAYING PMC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND INTERNAL RELAY (PMCDGN) PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 3.1 The title data corresponds to the title of a sequence program. It consists of the following items: TITLE DATA DISPLAY (TITLE) D Machine tool builder name (32 characters) D Machine name (32 charact
  • Page 6833. DISPLAYING PMC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND INTERNAL RELAY B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION (PMCDGN) 3.2 When the [EDIT] soft key is pressed on the Title Data Display screen, the Title Data Editor screen appears. TITLE DATA EDITOR SCREEN On this screen, you can edit the following ten items. D Machine
  • Page 6843. DISPLAYING PMC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND INTERNAL RELAY (PMCDGN) PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 3.3 This screen displays the contents at all the addresses (X, Y, F, G, R, A, C, T, K, D, M, and N) specified in programs. Each content display is a string SIGNAL STATUS of 0 and 1 with a hexadecimal
  • Page 6853. DISPLAYING PMC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND INTERNAL RELAY B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION (PMCDGN) 3.4 If an alarm condition occurs in the PMC, clicking the [PMC] soft key from the NC system displays the following alarm message instead of the PMC ALARM SCREEN basic menu. The soft keys displayed on
  • Page 6863. DISPLAYING PMC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND INTERNAL RELAY (PMCDGN) PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 3.5 TRACE SCREEN 3.5.1 On the trace screen, you can trace specified signals. The result of the trace Overview is displayed as the time chart of signals. There are two tracing modes. One is the ”Time C
  • Page 6873. DISPLAYING PMC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND INTERNAL RELAY B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION (PMCDGN) 3.5.2 Pushing the [SETING] soft key displays the ”Parameter Setting” screen. Setting of Trace The following is the screen example of the trace execution by ”TIME CYCLE” mode. Parameter ”Parameter Sett
  • Page 6883. DISPLAYING PMC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND INTERNAL RELAY (PMCDGN) PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 D SAMPLING MODE Determines the sampling mode. Select one by cursor key or soft key. Soft keys display when the cursor is put on ”SAMPLING MODE”. Explanation: TIME CYCLE Samples at every specified cycl
  • Page 6893. DISPLAYING PMC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND INTERNAL RELAY B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION (PMCDGN) Explanation: DELETE Clears the value in the edit box. SYMBOL Changes the address display to the symbol name display and changes the soft key to [ADDRESS]. After that, following soft keys are displayed
  • Page 6903. DISPLAYING PMC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND INTERNAL RELAY (PMCDGN) PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 Soft keys display when the cursor is put on ”SAMPLING CONDITION”. Explanation: TRIGGER Samples the status of specified signals when the specified sampling condition is on. ANY CHANGE Samples the statu
  • Page 6913. DISPLAYING PMC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND INTERNAL RELAY B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION (PMCDGN) D SAMPLING ADDRESS In page 2 of Parameter Setting screen, you can set the addresses or symbols that should be sampled. Move the cursor into edit box and input PMC signal address or symbol. In case of
  • Page 6923. DISPLAYING PMC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND INTERNAL RELAY (PMCDGN) PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 ADDRESS Changes the symbol display into the address display and changes the soft key to ”SYMBOL”. D TRIGGER SETTING OF THE SAMPLING SIGNALS When ”SIGNAL TRANSITION” is set on ”TRACE MODE” and ”ANY CHA
  • Page 6933. DISPLAYING PMC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND INTERNAL RELAY B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION (PMCDGN) 3.5.3 On trace screen, pushing [START] soft key starts the execution of trace Execution of Trace after you set the trace parameter correctly. The following is the screen example of the trace execution
  • Page 6943. DISPLAYING PMC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND INTERNAL RELAY (PMCDGN) PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 3.5.4 When the execution is finished, the result of trace is displayed. The Operation after following is the screen example of trace by ”TIME CYCLE” mode. Execution of Trace The cursor indicating curr
  • Page 6953. DISPLAYING PMC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND INTERNAL RELAY B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION (PMCDGN) After the execution, following operation is enabled. (1) SCROLL OF SCREEN Using cursor up/down key and page up/down key enables the vertical scroll for the specified signal. Using cursor right/left ke
  • Page 6963. DISPLAYING PMC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND INTERNAL RELAY (PMCDGN) PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 (4) EXCHANGE OF SAMPLING SIGNAL Pushing [MOVE UP] soft key exchanges the signal indicated by the signal cursor for the signal one line above. Pushing [MOVE DOWN] soft key exchanges the signal indicate
  • Page 6973. DISPLAYING PMC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND INTERNAL RELAY B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION (PMCDGN) (1) Setting equivalent to the [TRACE] screen for PMC–NB/NB2 The parameters in page 1 By setting ”SAMPLING MODE” = ”SIGNAL TRANSITION”, sampling equivalent to [TRACE] function of PMC–NB/NB2 is performe
  • Page 6983. DISPLAYING PMC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND INTERNAL RELAY (PMCDGN) PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 If you input signals from bit0 to bit7 into ”SAMPLING ADDRESS”, this setting is equivalent to input of the byte address for PMC–NB/NB2. The trigger setting of the sampling signals is equivalent to the
  • Page 6993. DISPLAYING PMC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND INTERNAL RELAY B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION (PMCDGN) The point of the enhancement is the ability to adjust the ratio of data before and after the trigger position. (4) Setting equivalent to ”TRIGGER MODE” = ”3:ONLY” of the [ANALYS] screen for PMC–NB/NB2
  • Page 7003. DISPLAYING PMC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND INTERNAL RELAY (PMCDGN) PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 3.6 The I/O Link Monitor screen and the I/O Unit Allocation screens are for checking I/O Link connection and for allocating I/O Unit. I/O LINK MONITOR AND ALLOCATION D I/O Link Monitor screen: I/O Uni
  • Page 7013. DISPLAYING PMC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND INTERNAL RELAY B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION (PMCDGN) 3.6.1 I/O Link Monitor screen shows the types and the ID codes of I/O Units I/O Link Monitor screen that are connected to I/O Link in order of Group number. You can confirm the connection of I/O Units
  • Page 7023. DISPLAYING PMC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND INTERNAL RELAY (PMCDGN) PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 Displayed I/O Unit ID True I/O Unit R–J MATE 61 R–J Mate CONNECTOR PANEL MODULE A9 I/O module for connector panel OPERATOR PANEL A1 AA I/O module for operator’s panel OPERATOR I/F BOARD (MPG3) 6B Oper
  • Page 7033. DISPLAYING PMC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND INTERNAL RELAY B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION (PMCDGN) 3.6.2 I/O Link Allocation Viewer screen shows I/O Units allocation to X and I/O Unit Allocation Y addresses. You can confirm the allocation of I/O Units at this screen. Viewer screen Call this screen
  • Page 7043. DISPLAYING PMC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND INTERNAL RELAY (PMCDGN) PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 3.6.3 Allocate I/O Units to X and Y addresses at I/O Unit Allocation Editor I/O Unit Allocation screen. Call this screen by pressing soft key [I/O LINK] → [I/O MODULE] → Editor screen [EDIT] in PMCDGN
  • Page 7053. DISPLAYING PMC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND INTERNAL RELAY B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION (PMCDGN) NOTE As to the allocation name of I/O Unit, please refer to ”FANUC PMC Programming Manual (LADDER Language) Chapter I, 3.2 Table3.2.2” (1.3)The I/O Unit is allocated to address of the cursor position
  • Page 7063. DISPLAYING PMC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND INTERNAL RELAY (PMCDGN) PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 CAUTION 1 Turn off and on the power after you store the Ladder to Flash ROM in order to make the allocation effective. 2 The Ladder program is not stopped automatically when you open I/O Unit Allocati
  • Page 7073. DISPLAYING PMC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND INTERNAL RELAY B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION (PMCDGN) 3.6.3.2 Error Message Error message Meaning and solution Meaning: GROUP NUMBER Too large Group number is input. IS TOO LARGE Solution: Input Group Number below 16. Meaning: Too large Base number is in
  • Page 7083. DISPLAYING PMC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND INTERNAL RELAY (PMCDGN) PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 3.7 FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION 3.7.1 This is the function to change the status of the signals at arbitrary PMC address forcibly. If the input X is forced with this function, the sequence Overview pr
  • Page 7093. DISPLAYING PMC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND INTERNAL RELAY B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION (PMCDGN) Ex2: I/O UNIT–MODEL A is connected with X0. And X0 is forced to be changed. The input value from a I/O UNIT–MODEL A is periodically transferred to X0. Therefore, even if you change the value of X0 for
  • Page 7103. DISPLAYING PMC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND INTERNAL RELAY (PMCDGN) PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 (2) Override Mode In this mode, the ladder program and the I/O devices does not overwrite the signals which are forced to be changed. You can specify the override mode into arbitrary X/Y addresses. Th
  • Page 7113. DISPLAYING PMC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND INTERNAL RELAY B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION (PMCDGN) CAUTION 1 In the Override mode, the refresh cycle of the I/O signal is 8msec, which is synchronized with the 1st level of the ladder program. Usually, the refresh cycle of the I/O link is 2msec. So, t
  • Page 7123. DISPLAYING PMC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND INTERNAL RELAY (PMCDGN) PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 3.7.2 The following setting is necessary to enable each mode. Operations to Enable the Forced I/O Function 3.7.2.1 In the GENERAL screen of PMC setting: Setting of forcing mode Set ”SIGNAL STATUS WRIT
  • Page 7133. DISPLAYING PMC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND INTERNAL RELAY B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION (PMCDGN) 3.7.3 In this screen, you can change the value of arbitrary address forcibly. You Forced Input/Output can use the two input modes, i.e. the forcing mode and the override mode. To display this screen,
  • Page 7143. DISPLAYING PMC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND INTERNAL RELAY (PMCDGN) PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 3.7.3.1 Screen structure Input Mode Display area of signal status Key Input Line Message Line (1) When the override mode, The string ”OVERRIDE” is displayed above the screen. (2) The status of each si
  • Page 7153. DISPLAYING PMC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND INTERNAL RELAY B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION (PMCDGN) 3.7.3.2 Operations The soft–keys in this screen Forcing Mode Search of address Go to Signal Status Screen Signal On Signal Off Override Mode Search of address Go to Signal Status Screen Signal On Sign
  • Page 7163. DISPLAYING PMC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND INTERNAL RELAY (PMCDGN) PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 As for the override signal, the status of the override signal is set the status of the signal just before pressing the soft–key [OVRIDE SET]. The bit set the override is added the ”→” display on the s
  • Page 7174. PMC DATA SETTING AND B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION DISPLAY (PMCPRM) 4 PMC DATA SETTING AND DISPLAY (PMCPRM) 683
  • Page 7184. PMC DATA SETTING AND DISPLAY (PMCPRM) PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 4.1 This screen enables the entry and display of parameters for the timers, counters, keep relay, and data tables, which are held in nonvolatile OVERVIEW memory. To use this procedure, first click the [PMCPRM] soft key on the
  • Page 7194. PMC DATA SETTING AND B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION DISPLAY (PMCPRM) 4.3 It is possible to enter data continuously on each of the timer, counter, keep relay, and data table screens. After continuous data entry, the cursor CONTINUOUS DATA appears at the bottom of the most recently entered data.
  • Page 7204. PMC DATA SETTING AND DISPLAY (PMCPRM) PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 4.5 This screen is used to set and display the maximum and minimum counter values for machine instruction counters (SUB5). COUNTER SCREEN (COUNTR) Table contents D NO.: Counter number specified for a machine instruction counte
  • Page 7214. PMC DATA SETTING AND B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION DISPLAY (PMCPRM) 4.6 This screen is used for setting and displaying the Keep Relays. KEEP RELAY SCREEN (KEEPRL) Contents of the table D ADDRESS: Address refered by sequence Program D 0–7 Contents of each bit D HEX: Value of the byte data by he
  • Page 7224. PMC DATA SETTING AND DISPLAY (PMCPRM) PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 (1) Special use area ( K900 – K909) PMC type PMC–NB6 Special use area 1 K900 Reserved K901 – K909 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 K900 DTBL DSP MEMINP AUTORUN PRGRAM LADMASK #7 DTBLDSP 0 : The Data Table Controlling Data screen is dis
  • Page 7234. PMC DATA SETTING AND B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION DISPLAY (PMCPRM) 4.7 There are two data table types (data table control data table and data table). DATA TABLE (DATA) (1) Data table control data screen (C.DATA) Clicking the [DATA] soft key displays the data table control data setting screen
  • Page 7244. PMC DATA SETTING AND DISPLAY (PMCPRM) PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 NOTE The meanings of the table parameters are as follows: #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0: Binary format 1: BCD format 0: Input protection disabled 1: Input protection enabled 0: Binary or BCD format (with bit 0 valid) 1: Hexadecima
  • Page 725B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION 5. SETTING MENU (SETING) 5 SETTING MENU (SETING) Clicking the [SETING] soft key on the PMC basic module screen displays the following setting menu screen. Menu contents 1. GENERAL: Screen for displaying general setting data 2. EDIT/DEBUG: Screen for displaying settin
  • Page 7265. SETTING MENU (SETING) PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 5.1 Clicking the [GENERAL] soft key displays the following screen. SCREEN FOR DISPLAYING GENERAL SETTINGS (GENERAL) D PROGRAMMER ENABLE YES: The built–in debug function is used. NO: The built–in debug function is not used. D AUTOMATIC LADDER
  • Page 727B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION 5. SETTING MENU (SETING) 5.2 SCREEN FOR DISPLAYING THE SETTING DATA RELATED TO EDITING AND DEBUGGING D WRITE TO FROM (EDIT) YES: The ladder program is automatically written to F–ROM after editing. NO: The ladder program is not automatically written to F–ROM after edi
  • Page 7285. SETTING MENU (SETING) PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 5.3 If PROGRAMMER ENABLE is set to YES on the GENERAL screen, the [ONLINE] soft key appears on the setting menu screen. Clicking this SCREEN FOR soft key displays the following screen. SETTING/DISPLAYIN G ONLINE MONITOR PARAMETERS (ONLINE) Me
  • Page 729B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION 5. SETTING MENU (SETING) D STOP BIT 1 BIT: The number of stop bits is set to 1. 2 BITS: The number of stop bits is set to 2. D TIMER 1 The value in communication parameter timer 1 is displayed. The value can also be entered, but its specification is usually not neces
  • Page 7305. SETTING MENU (SETING) PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 5.4 SCREEN FOR DISPLAYING SETTING DATA RELATED TO C LANGUAGE FUNCTION D FUNCTION KEY EFFECTIVE YES: Function keys are enabled when the user program displays the user screen. NO: Function keys are disabled when the user program displays the us
  • Page 7316. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION AND EDITOR 6 LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR The LADDER Diagram Monitor screen displays the LADDER Diagram with the status of the signals in the diagram. You can watch how the LADDER Program works at this LADDER Diagram Monitor screen. The
  • Page 7326. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 Program List Viewer screen Chooses the subprogram to be displayed at LADDER Diagram Monitor screen. Program List Editor screen Edits LADDER Diagram by the subprogram. Also chooses the subprogram to be displayed at LADDER Diagram E
  • Page 7336. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION AND EDITOR NOTE 1 When [PMCLAD] soft key is pressed at first time after CNC power cycle, Program List Viewer screen is displayed. Then use [ZOOM] soft key to select subprogram to reach LADDER Diagram Monitor screen, and the subprogram that y
  • Page 7346. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 6.1 LADDER Diagram Monitor screen shows the on/off status of contacts and coils, and the contents of address specified for parameter of functional LADDER DIAGRAM instructions. You can investigate how the LADDER program is working
  • Page 7356. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION AND EDITOR 6.1.1 Screen Structures Title information (REMARKS) Current subprogram Current position Range to search Area for LADDER Diagram Key input line Message line Additional information line (a) Screen Structure 1. Title information (REM
  • Page 7366. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 2. Nets wider than the screen width are displayed as ”Continuous Net” using continuous marks (”>A1>”). Same continuous marks mean they are connected with each other. (c) Monitor 1. Contacts and coils are displayed in different col
  • Page 7376. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION AND EDITOR 6.1.2 Operations Soft keys of LADDER Diagram Monitor screen on PMC–NB6 Main soft keys of LADDER Diagram Monitor screen Program List LADDER Diagram Editor Screen Settings Display Data Table Switches to Collective Monitor screen Sea
  • Page 7386. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 D [PICKUP] Picking up ladder nets. Picks up ladder nets with coil which you want to monitor, on Collective Monitor screen. When picks up is complete, the ” ” mark displayed to the top of net.. D [PREV] Search previous Repeats to s
  • Page 7396. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION AND EDITOR 1 To enable Programmer function, go to GENERAL screen of PMC Settings, and choose ”YES” at item ”PROGRAMMER ENABLE”. 2 To deactivate Online Monitor function, go to ONLIEN screen of PMC Settings, and choose ”NOT USE” at settings of
  • Page 7406. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 3 In this case, you can still search the byte address ”D0” by entering ”D00”. The excess ”0” avoids the conflict with the symbol ”D0”. 3. When the range for searching is GLOBAL, and the target is found in other than displaying sub
  • Page 7416. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION AND EDITOR 6.1.3 Functional Instruction Data Table Viewer screen shows the contents of Functional Instruction data table that belongs to some functional instructions. To reach this screen, at LADDER Diagram Monitor screen, press [DATA Data T
  • Page 7426. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 (1) Screen Structures 1. The functional instruction name, the number of data table, data length and data type are displayed above the Data Table. 2. In the message line, error messages or inquiry messages will be displayed dependi
  • Page 7436. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION AND EDITOR 2. [SEARCH VALUE] Search for data value Searches the data value which you specified. Then the cursor is displayed on the target data. And the cursor is disappeared when you operate something. 3. [BCD2] Display BCD2 digits Changes
  • Page 7446. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 6.1.4 Setting Screen 1st page of setting screen (a) Setting items LADDER Diagram Monitor Setting screen contains the setting items below: D ADDRESS NOTATION Determines whether the bit and byte addresses in the LADDER Diagram are d
  • Page 7456. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION AND EDITOR TALL Extends the box vertically to reserve spaces for the monitors of current values of address parameters. The box becomes taller than COMPACT. Display styles of functional instructions The displays of current values of address p
  • Page 7466. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 D SHOW COIL COMMENT Determines whether to show coil comments. YES (default) Right margin of 2 lines of 15 characters is reserved for display of coil comments. NO Right margin is used to extend diagram by one more relay, instead of
  • Page 7476. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION AND EDITOR Definition of Net number D WRAP SEARCH ENABLED Allows search process to wrap from top/bottom to bottom/top to continue to search. YES (default) Downward search will continue to search from top of LADDER when reaches to bottom. Upw
  • Page 7486. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 D DIAGRAM APPEARANCE SETTING Changes the appearance of LADDER diagram. Lines, relays, and functional instructions that constitute LADDER diagram can be changed in the colors and the shapes. Samples of ”Off Contact”, ”On Contact”,
  • Page 7496. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION AND EDITOR NOTE The setting ”BOLD DIAGRAM” requires ”Character registration function” of CNC software, which is supported by Series F002 version 03 or later. If CNC software does not support it, diagram is always displayed with thin lines. V
  • Page 7506. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 ACTIVE RELAY COLOR ACTIVE RELAY BACKGROUND Color setting for the active relay. When a contact allows power flow, and when a coil receives power, they are active and are displayed with this color setting. When contacts and coils ar
  • Page 7516. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION AND EDITOR 6.1.5 The following table shows all monitor formats for each parameter of each Display Format for functional instruction. Parameters NOTE 1 ”Variable” in ”Monitor Format” field means that this parameter changes its size according
  • Page 7526. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 No. Name Parameter Monitor Format No. Name Parameter Monitor Format 27 CODB * 1 constant 40 NUMEB 1 constant 2 constant 2 constant 3 1–byte binary 3 variable binary 4 variable binary 41 DISPB 1 constant 28 MOVOR 1 2–digits HEX 42
  • Page 7536. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION AND EDITOR No. Name Parameter Monitor Format 66 CALLU 1 no monitor 68 JMPB 1 no monitor 69 LBL 1 no monitor 70 NOP 1 constant 71 SP 1 no monitor 72 SPE – – 73 JMPC 1 no monitor 6.1.6 Functional Instructions of Special Monitor forMat TMR Disp
  • Page 7546. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 6.2 At LADDER Diagram Editor screen you can edit LADDER program to change its behavior. LADDER DIAGRAM To reach LADDER Diagram Editor screen, press [EDIT] soft key at EDITOR SCREEN LADDER Diagram Monitor screen. Following operatio
  • Page 7556. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION AND EDITOR NOTE 1 [EDIT] soft key in LADDER Diagram Monitor screen appears only when Programmer function is enabled. To enable Programmer function, set ”PROGRAMMER ENABLE” to ”YES” at GENERAL screen of PMC Settings. While Online Monitor func
  • Page 7566. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 6.2.1 Screen Structures (a) Screen Structure 1. It is basically same with LADDER Diagram Monitor screen, except that no monitor displays of relays and parameters of functional instructions are displayed. 2. At right side of LADDER
  • Page 7576. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION AND EDITOR 6.2.2 Operations Soft keys of LADDER Diagram Editor Screen Main soft keys of LADDER Diagram Editor screen Program List Add new net Select nets Cut nets Paste nets Change to Edit net Make changes Delete nets Copy nets Search soft k
  • Page 7586. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 WARNING You have to pay special attention to modify running LADDER program. If you modify LADDER program in wrong way, or update LADDER program with the machine in improper status, it may cause unexpected reaction of the machine.
  • Page 7596. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION AND EDITOR 9. [COPY] Copy nets Copy selected nets into Paste Buffer. No change on diagram will be made. The contents of Paste Buffer before [COPY] operation are lost. [COPY] and [PASTE] soft keys are used to copy nets. The Paste Buffer can c
  • Page 7606. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 Pasting nets using [PASTE] soft key will not remove contents of Paste Buffer. The contents of Paste Buffer will remain until turning CNC power off. 11. [CHANGE ADRE] Change of Used Address The addresses used in Ladder program can
  • Page 7616. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION AND EDITOR 15. [CANCEL EDIT] Abortion of edit This aborts the contents of the edit and exits from this screen. 16. [<] Exit Editor Updates running LADDER program to edited LADDER program, so that the all modifications will take effects, and
  • Page 7626. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 6.2.3 Setting Screen (a) Setting items LADDER Diagram Editor Setting screen contains the setting items below: D ADDRESS NOTATION Determines whether the bit and byte addresses in the LADDER Diagram are displayed as corresponding sy
  • Page 7636. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION AND EDITOR Display style of relay comment NONE 1 LINE 2 LINE D SHOW COIL COMMENT Determines whether to show coil comments. Unlike LADDER Diagram Monitor screen, the screen position gauge is always displayed at the right edge of the screen. Y
  • Page 7646. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 D WRAP SEARCH ENABLED Allows search process to wrap from top/bottom to bottom/top to continue to search. YES (default) Downward search will continue to search from top of LADDER when reaches to bottom. Upward search will also cont
  • Page 7656. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION AND EDITOR D DIAGRAM APPEARANCE SETTING Changes the appearance of LADDER diagram. Lines, relays, and functional instructions that constitute LADDER diagram can be changed in the colors and the shapes. Samples of ”Normal net”, ”Selected net”,
  • Page 7666. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 NOTE The setting ”BOLD DIAGRAM” requires ”Character registration function” of CNC software, which is supported by Series F002 version 03 or later. If CNC software does not support it, diagram is always displayed with thin lines. A
  • Page 7676. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION AND EDITOR 6.2.4 Pressing Return key [<] or [UPDATE] soft key will analyze edited Error Messages and LADDER program and try to generate executable objects. If some error is found at analyzing phase, you will see error message on screen, and
  • Page 7686. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 Error message Meaning and solution Meaning: Plural TMRs, CTRs, TMRBs, DIFUs, or DIFDs have DUPLICATE TMR the same number as their parameter. NUMBER.(WARN- This is warning. ING) DUPLICATE CTR Solution: NUMBER.(WARN- If some of them
  • Page 7696. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION AND EDITOR Error message Meaning and solution Meaning: JMP and corresponding JMPE have different COM/ COME status. JMP/JMPE TO Solution: BAD COM LEVEL. JMP and corresponding JMPE must have same COM/COME status. Review JMP range and COM range
  • Page 7706. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 Error message Meaning and solution Meaning: LADDER PRO- LADDER program may be broken by some reason. GRAM IS BRO- Solution: KEN. This LADDER program must be all cleared once, and remake LADDER program. Meaning: Can not find proper
  • Page 7716. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION AND EDITOR Error message Meaning and solution Meaning: Write coil is necessary, but is not found. NO WRITE COIL. Solution: Add proper write coil. Meaning: SP is found in wrong place. SP IN BAD LEV- EL. Solution: SP can be used at top of a su
  • Page 7726. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 6.2.5 If the following functional instructions are used with their ACT How to Correct conditions (or RST conditions) are kept ON improperly, an attempt to stop LADDER may take much time, or may not stop it actually. LADDER Program
  • Page 7736. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION AND EDITOR 6.3 At Net Editor screen, you can create new net, and modify existing net. When [ZOOM] soft key is used to reach Net Editor screen, this screen is NET EDITOR in ”Modify Mode” to modify existing net. When [NEW NET] soft key SCREEN
  • Page 7746. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 6.3.1 Screen Structures (a) Screen structure 1. It is basically same with LADDER Diagram Editor screen, except that only one net is in this screen, and that position bar at right edge of screen does not appear at this screen. 2. C
  • Page 7756. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION AND EDITOR 6.3.2 Operations Soft keys of Net Editor screen of PMC–NB6 Main soft keys of Net Editor screen Horizontal Left vertical Go to B contact Inverted coil connection connection next net A contact Normal coil Functional Delete Right ver
  • Page 7766. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 3. [ ] Draw horizontal connection Draws horizontal connection line. Or alters an existing relay to horizontal line. 4. [ ] Erase relays and functional instructions Erases relays and functional instructions under cursor. 5. [ ],[ ]
  • Page 7776. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION AND EDITOR 7. [DATA TABLE] Edit data table Reaches Functional Instruction Data Table Editor screen to edit data table of functional instruction under cursor. This soft key appears only when cursor is on a functional instruction that has data
  • Page 7786. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 11. [APPEND COLUMN] Append column Inserts one blank column at right of cursor position. Diagram elements on right of horizontal cursor position will be shifted to right by one column. And if necessary, net will be expanded to righ
  • Page 7796. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION AND EDITOR 6.3.3 Pressing [FUNC] soft key at Net Editor screen reaches Functional Functional Instruction Instruction List screen at which you choose a functional instruction to be entered from list of all available functional instructions. L
  • Page 7806. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 6.3.4 At Functional Instruction Data Table Editor screen, you can edit the Functional Instruction contents of data table that belongs to some functional instructions. To reach this screen, at Net Editor screen, press [DATA TABLE]
  • Page 7816. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION AND EDITOR (1) Screen Structures (a) Screen Structure It is same with Functional Instruction Data Table Viewer screen. (b) Display data The cursor is shown always. You can edit the data that is pointed by the cursor. (2) Operations Soft keys
  • Page 7826. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 3. [BCD2] Display BCD2 digits Changes the display data type to 2 digits of BCD. This operation only switches the display data type. So it does never edit the data on memory. 4. [BCD4] Display BCD4 digits Changes the display data t
  • Page 7836. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION AND EDITOR 8. [COUNT] Change the number of data Changes the number of data. If you expanded the number of data, ”0” is set to expanded data as default. NOTE In case of functional instruction COD, the number of data is decided by the first pa
  • Page 7846. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 6.3.5 Return key [<] or [NEXT NET] soft key analyzes current editing net, and Error Messages and produce executable object of the net: new object of LADDER program is not yet effective at this time. If some error is found through
  • Page 7856. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION AND EDITOR Error message Meaning and solution Meaning: No signal is provided for logical operation. NO INPUT FOR Solution: OPERATION Coil without input, or coil connected to output of func- tional instruction that has no output, causes this
  • Page 7866. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 6.3.6 Valid net for PMC–NB6 must have following structure: Structure of Valid Net ”Input section” consists of contacts and functional instruction, and the result of operations of input section is led to ”Convergence point”. After
  • Page 7876. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION AND EDITOR 6.4 Program List Viewer screen shows the list of subprogram of the Ladder. You can select one subprogram then the content of program is displayed. PROGRAM LIST This screen also shows the detail information (program type, symbol VI
  • Page 7886. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 6.4.1 Screen Structures (1) Program List Viewer screen (Detail) Program List Viewer screen (Detail) shows the detail information that are program size, program net count and so on for program. (a) Screen Structure 1. The title inf
  • Page 7896. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION AND EDITOR 4. The comment is displayed in the ”COMMENT” field for each program. If no comment is set into the subprogram, the ”COMMENT” field will be blank. 5. The program size is displayed in the ”SIZE (BYTE)” field for each program. If the
  • Page 7906. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 (a) Screen Structure 1. The title information (REMARKS) of the Ladder Program and the total program count are displayed above the Program List. 2. In the message line, error messages or inquiry messages will be displayed depending
  • Page 7916. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION AND EDITOR 6.4.2 Operations (a) Operation with Soft–keys 1. [ZOOM] Display the contents of program Goes to LADDER Diagram Monitor screen. If you press [ZOOM] soft key without strings, the program under the cursor is displayed at LADDER Diagr
  • Page 7926. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 6.4.3 Setting Screen (a) Setting items Program List Viewer/Editor screen contains the setting items below: D VIEW FORMAT Determines whether the list data in the Program List Viewer/Editor screen are displayed as detail format, or
  • Page 7936. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION AND EDITOR D SORT BY Determines whether the programs in the Program List Viewer/Editor screen are displayed in order of program number, or symbol name themselves. And When ADDRESS NOTAION is SYMBOL, this determination is enabled. So if ADDRE
  • Page 7946. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 6.5 At Program List Editor screen you can create new program and delete a program in addition to the function of Program List Viewer screen. PROGRAM LIST To reach this screen, press [LIST] soft key at LADDER Diagram Editor EDITOR
  • Page 7956. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION AND EDITOR 6.5.1 Screen Structures (1) Program List Editor screen(Detail) Program List Editor screen (Detail) shows the detail information that are program size, program net count and so on for program. (a) Screen Structure It is basically s
  • Page 7966. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 (2) Program List Editor screen (Brief) Program List Viewer screen (Brief) shows less information than Program List Viewer screen (Detail), to increase the number of items. The program type, the status of protection and the name or
  • Page 7976. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION AND EDITOR 6.5.2 Operations (a) Operation with Soft–keys 1. [ZOOM] Display the contents of program Goes to LADDER Diagram Editor screen. The operation is basically same with Program List Viewer screen. See ”Operations for Program List Viewer
  • Page 7986. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 6.5.3 Screen settings of Program List Editor screen are basically same with Setting Screen them of Program List Viewer screen. See ”Screen settings for Program List Viewer screen” section for the detail. 764
  • Page 7996. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION AND EDITOR 6.6 On Collective Monitor screen, only the necessary ladder nets can be displayed by specifying ladder nets. COLLECTIVE Collective Monitor screen displayed by pressing soft key [ZOOM] after MONITOR FUNCTION moving the cursor to ”C
  • Page 8006. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 6.6.1 Structures of Title information(REMARKS) Collective monitor mode Number of picked up nets Collective Monitor Screen Area for LADDER Diagram Key input line Message line Additional information line (a) Screen Structure 1. It i
  • Page 8016. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION AND EDITOR 6.6.2 Operations of Soft keys of Collective Monitor screen of PMC–NB6 Collective Monitor Main soft keys of Collective Monitor screen Screen Initialization of Collective Program List Jump to the ladder diagram net Monitor screen Pi
  • Page 8026. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 (b) Other Operations 1. Cursor move keys, Page change keys Cursor move keys and Page change keys move cursor on screen. When cursor is placed on some relay or some address parameter of a functional instruction, the information abo
  • Page 8036. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION AND EDITOR (2) Specification of ladder nets on the Ladder Diagram Monitor screen 1. Move the cursor to a relay on the ladder net which uses address that you want to monitor. (ex. R0.5) 2. Press [SEARCH MENU] soft key. 3. Switches Softleys di
  • Page 8046. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 6.7 You can change the addresses used in the ladder program into other addresses. ADDRESS CHANGE Pressing the soft–key ”CHANGE ADRS” changes to the mode of the address change. 770
  • Page 8056. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION AND EDITOR 6.7.1 Constitution Ladder Display Area Key input line Message line Address input line (a) Key input line The input data are displayed in the line. (b) Message line The confirmation massages and the error messages are displayed in
  • Page 8066. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 [ALTER] altering into the address specified in ”NEW ADDRESS” This key alters the address shown by the cursor in the ladder diagram into the address specified in ”NEW ADDRESS”. This key is not displayed in case that the cursor does
  • Page 8076. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION AND EDITOR [PICKUP ADRS] Picking up address on cursor This key picks up the address on the cursor in the ladder diagram and set it in ”OLD ADDRESS” or ”NEW ADDRESS”. [USE CHECK] Check used address This key checks the address in ”NEW ADDRESS”
  • Page 8087. PASSWORD PROTECTION PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 7 PASSWORD PROTECTION The password function protects the LADDER Diagram Monitor screen and the LADDER Diagram Editor screen. If the password function is enabled, it is impossible to display or edit the ladder program. The protection was unlocke
  • Page 809B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION 7. PASSWORD PROTECTION 7.1 SPECIFICATIONS OF (a) Password type PASSWORD There are two password types. One is the ”R–password” to protect against reading. Another is the ”RW–password” to protect against reading and writing. (b) Available characters for password The st
  • Page 8107. PASSWORD PROTECTION PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 7.2 PASSWORD AND SWITCHING SCREEN 7.2.1 The LADDER Diagram Monitor screen and the Ladder Diagram Editor Using One of screen are protected by the password. R–Password and RW–Password NOTE When [PMCLAD] soft key is pressed at first time after CNC
  • Page 811B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION 7. PASSWORD PROTECTION 7.2.2 The LADDER Diagram Monitor screen and the LADDER Diagram Using Both of Display screen are protected by the following password. R–Password and D The LADDER Diagram Monitor screen: R–password or RW–Password RW–password D The LADDER Diagram
  • Page 8128. WRITING, READING, AND COMPARING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS AND PMC PARAMETERS PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 8 WRITING, READING, AND COMPARING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS AND PMC PARAMETERS 778
  • Page 8138. WRITING, READING, AND COMPARING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS AND B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION PMC PARAMETERS 8.1 When the soft–key [I/O] on the PMC main menu screen is pressed, the following screen appears. I/O SCREEN On this screen, sequence programs, PMC parameters and C language program can be writte
  • Page 8148. WRITING, READING, AND COMPARING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS AND PMC PARAMETERS PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 PMC parameters: THE FILE CONTAINS PMC PARAMETER. PROCEED TO READ IT ? Others: UNKNOWN FILE FORMAT When you proceed to read a sequence program or a C language program, the ladder program stops aut
  • Page 8158. WRITING, READING, AND COMPARING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS AND B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION PMC PARAMETERS In STATUS area in the lower part of the screen, a detailed explanation of execution and the execution status are displayed. During write, read, and comparison, the size of the data already transf
  • Page 8168. WRITING, READING, AND COMPARING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS AND PMC PARAMETERS PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 8.2 OUTPUTTING TO AND INPUTTING FROM MEMORY CARDS When ”MEMORY CARD” is selected for DEVICE, output to and input from memory cards are enabled. D FUNCTION A data I/O command appears. Select FUNCT
  • Page 8178. WRITING, READING, AND COMPARING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS AND B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION PMC PARAMETERS When you read a file from a memory card, one of following messages appears and whether to operate the important thing is confirmed. Sequence program: THE FILE CONTAINS LADDER PROGRAM. PROCEED TO
  • Page 8188. WRITING, READING, AND COMPARING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS AND PMC PARAMETERS PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 D KIND OF DATA KIND OF DATA is displayed only when ”WRITE” is selected for ”FUNCTION.” Set the type of data to be output by moving the cursor horizontally to that type or by pressing the correspo
  • Page 8198. WRITING, READING, AND COMPARING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS AND B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION PMC PARAMETERS Explanation of soft keys [EXEC]: Executes the function selected for ”FUNCTION.” During execution, the soft key disappears and the [CANCEL] soft key appears to the right of the key. [CANCEL]: Canc
  • Page 8208. WRITING, READING, AND COMPARING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS AND PMC PARAMETERS PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 8.3 When MEMORY CARD is selected in DEVICE, pressing the [LIST] soft key displays the following screen: MEMORY CARD LIST SCREEN If a memory card holding files is in the slot, the contents of the
  • Page 8218. WRITING, READING, AND COMPARING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS AND B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION PMC PARAMETERS To return the screen display to the previous screen without selecting a file, press the return key. When the memory card is replaced with another card while the list screen is being displayed, th
  • Page 8228. WRITING, READING, AND COMPARING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS AND PMC PARAMETERS PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 8.4 OUTPUTTING TO AND INPUTTING FROM FLASH ROM When “FLASH ROM” is selected for DEVICE, output to and input from flash ROM are enabled. NOTE The above screen is displayed when the C language boar
  • Page 8238. WRITING, READING, AND COMPARING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS AND B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION PMC PARAMETERS C language program: THE FILE CONTAINS C LANGUAGE PROGRAM. PROCEED TO READ IT? PMC parameters: THE FILE CONTAINS PMC PARAMETER. PROCEED TO READ IT? Other: UNKNOWN FILE FORMAT When you proceed to r
  • Page 8248. WRITING, READING, AND COMPARING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS AND PMC PARAMETERS PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 NOTE When a program is written, it may take much time to initialize the flash ROM. During initialization, ”INITIALIZING FLASH ROM” appears in the STATUS field in the lower part of the screen. 790
  • Page 8258. WRITING, READING, AND COMPARING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS AND B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION PMC PARAMETERS 8.5 OUTPUTTING TO AND INPUTTING FROM FLOPPY When ”FLOPPY” is selected for ”DEVICE”, output to and input from floppy cassette or handy file that is connected via RS–232C are enabled. D FUNCTION Th
  • Page 8268. WRITING, READING, AND COMPARING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS AND PMC PARAMETERS PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 Sequence program: THE FILE CONTAINS LADDER PROGRAM. PROCEED TO READ IT? C language program: THE FILE CONTAINS C LANGUAGE PROGRAM. PROCEED TO READ IT? PMC parameters: THE FILE CONTAINS PMC PARAMET
  • Page 8278. WRITING, READING, AND COMPARING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS AND B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION PMC PARAMETERS D KIND OF DATA ”KIND OF DATA” is displayed only when ”WRITE” is selected for ”FUNCTION”. Set the type of data to be output by moving the cursor horizontally to that command or select it with the
  • Page 8288. WRITING, READING, AND COMPARING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS AND PMC PARAMETERS PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 Explanation of soft keys [EXEC] Executes the function selected for ”FUNCTION”. During execution, the soft key disappears and the [CANCEL] soft key appears to the right of the key. [CANCEL] Cancel
  • Page 8298. WRITING, READING, AND COMPARING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS AND B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION PMC PARAMETERS 8.6 When ”FLOPPY” is selected for ”DEVICE”, pressing the [LIST] soft key display the following screen. FLOPPY LIST SCREEN The contents of the floppy cassettes or the handy files are displayed. Wh
  • Page 8308. WRITING, READING, AND COMPARING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS AND PMC PARAMETERS PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 8.7 OUTPUTTING TO AND INPUTTING FROM OTHER INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES When ”OTHERS” is selected for ”DEVICE”, output to and input from other input/output devices are enabled. D FUNCTION The available d
  • Page 8318. WRITING, READING, AND COMPARING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS AND B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION PMC PARAMETERS When you proceed to read a sequence program or a C language program, the ladder program stops automatically. When you proceed to read PMC parameters, new PMC parameters will be stored even if the
  • Page 8328. WRITING, READING, AND COMPARING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS AND PMC PARAMETERS PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 D KIND OF DATA ”KIND OF DATA” is displayed only when ”WRITE” is selected for ”FUNCTION”. Set the type of data to be output by moving the cursor horizontally to that command or select it with the
  • Page 8338. WRITING, READING, AND COMPARING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS AND B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION PMC PARAMETERS 8.8 When ”FLOPPY” or ”OTHERS” is selected for ”DEVICE”, the [PORT SETING] soft key is displayed. When the key is pressed, the following PORT SETTING screen appears. The following gives a display
  • Page 8348. WRITING, READING, AND COMPARING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS AND PMC PARAMETERS PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 NOTE Parity is always ”NONE”. Explanation of soft keys [INIT] Sets all the parameters to their initial values. Initial values DEVICE = FLOPPY DEVICE = OTHERS CHANNEL 1 1 BAUD RATE 4800 4800 STOP
  • Page 8358. WRITING, READING, AND COMPARING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS AND B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION PMC PARAMETERS 8.9 The error messages that may appear on the I/O screen and their meanings and actions are listed below. I/O SCREEN ERROR MESSAGES D Error messages displayed during memory card I/O operation (PM
  • Page 8368. WRITING, READING, AND COMPARING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS AND PMC PARAMETERS PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 Displayed error Meaning and action message MEMORYCARD IS Another PMC user is using the memory card. LOCKED BY OTHER Action: Wait until the PMC user completes proces- FUNCTION sing, then retry. An
  • Page 8378. WRITING, READING, AND COMPARING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS AND B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION PMC PARAMETERS Displayed error Meaning and action message The C language board cannot be recognized. C LANGUAGE BOARD IS NOT IMPLEMENTED Action: Check whether the C language board is installed. An error due to
  • Page 8388. WRITING, READING, AND COMPARING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS AND PMC PARAMETERS PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 Displayed error Meaning and action message Others function is using this channel. OTHERS FUNCTION IS USING THIS CHANNEL Action: Use the other channel, or stop the func- tion. Setting parameters o
  • Page 8399. STARTING AND STOPPING B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION SEQUENCE PROGRAMS 9 STARTING AND STOPPING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS (1) Starting a sequence program (RUN) When a program is stopped, clicking the [RUN] soft key causes the program to start and the status line display to change to “PMC RUN.” The seque
  • Page 84010. MISCELLANEOUS DATA IN SEQUENCE PROGRAM PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 10 MISCELLANEOUS DATA IN SEQUENCE PROGRAM 806
  • Page 84110. MISCELLANEOUS DATA IN B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION SEQUENCE PROGRAM 10.1 The following screen is the menu screen of the miscellaneous data in sequence program. MENU SCREEN OF The screen of each data is called in this screen. MISCELLANEOUS DATA IN SEQUENCE PROGRAM MISC. Data Menu The followin
  • Page 84210. MISCELLANEOUS DATA IN SEQUENCE PROGRAM PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 NOTE 1 The contents of the title data are as same as the one of the title data screen in the PMC diagnosis menu. As for the description of the viewer/monitor screen of the title data, please refer to Section II–3.1. 2 This s
  • Page 84310. MISCELLANEOUS DATA IN B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION SEQUENCE PROGRAM 10.2 VIEWER/EDITOR OF SYMBOL/COMMENT DATA 10.2.1 In the viewer screen of the symbol/comment data, you can confirm the symbols and comments which are defined for bit or byte addresses used Viewer Screen of in the ladder progr
  • Page 84410. MISCELLANEOUS DATA IN SEQUENCE PROGRAM PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 10.2.1.1 Screen structure The size of symbol data The size of comment data The total size of symbol/comment data Display area of symbol/comment Key input line Message line (1) The size of the symbol data and comment data is
  • Page 84510. MISCELLANEOUS DATA IN B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION SEQUENCE PROGRAM b. [SEARCH] Search for addresses, symbols and comments This key searches the addresses corresponding to input string, or the symbols and the comments including input string. And this makes them display on the screen. Both bi
  • Page 84610. MISCELLANEOUS DATA IN SEQUENCE PROGRAM PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 10.2.2.1 Screen structure Free Size of Symbols and Comments Free Size of Comments Editing Area Key Input Line Message Line (1) The free size of the symbols and comments is displayed above the screen. (2) In the message line,
  • Page 84710. MISCELLANEOUS DATA IN B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION SEQUENCE PROGRAM b. [ZOOM] Alter or new entry This key calls the entry screen in which you can edit the data on the cursor or register a new data c. [NEW ENTRY] Registration of new data This key calls the entry screen in which you can regist
  • Page 84810. MISCELLANEOUS DATA IN SEQUENCE PROGRAM PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 10.2.3 In the entry screen of symbol/comment, you can register a set of symbol Entry Screen of and comment data associated with any address as a new entry data. To display this screen, press the soft–key [ZOOM] or [NEW ENTRY
  • Page 84910. MISCELLANEOUS DATA IN B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION SEQUENCE PROGRAM 10.2.3.1 Screen structure Free Size of Symbol/Comment Data Free Size of Comment Data Display Area of Symbol/Comment Data Editing Area Key Input Line Message Line (1) The free size of the symbols and comments is displayed abo
  • Page 85010. MISCELLANEOUS DATA IN SEQUENCE PROGRAM PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 10.2.3.2 Operations The soft–keys by pressing [ZOOM] Change of Input Mode Delete Alternation of the Data New registration Abortion of Edit The soft–keys by pressing [NEW ENTRY] Change of Input Mode Delete New registration Ab
  • Page 85110. MISCELLANEOUS DATA IN B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION SEQUENCE PROGRAM c. [DELETE] Deletion of the data D Whole string input mode The whole string on the cursor is deleted. D Insert mode, Alter mode One character on the cursor is deleted. d. [CANCEL EDIT] Abortion of editing This key aborts the
  • Page 85210. MISCELLANEOUS DATA IN SEQUENCE PROGRAM PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 10.2.4 Alarm Message and Alarm Messages Meanings and Countermeasures Countermeasure Meaning: ILLEGAL PMC Wrong address is specified or the string includes some spaces. ADDRESS Countermeasure: Input proper address for PMC–NB6
  • Page 85310. MISCELLANEOUS DATA IN B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION SEQUENCE PROGRAM 10.3 VIEWER/EDITOR SCREEN OF MESSAGE DATA 10.3.1 In the viewer screen of the message data, you can confirm the message data that is displayed on NC screen by DISPB instruction. To display this Viewer Screen of screen, press
  • Page 85410. MISCELLANEOUS DATA IN SEQUENCE PROGRAM PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 10.3.1.1 Screen structure Message Address Request Monitor Message No. Brief Display of Message Detailed Display of Message Key Input Line Message Line (1) The message address, the message request monitor, the message number
  • Page 85510. MISCELLANEOUS DATA IN B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION SEQUENCE PROGRAM 10.3.1.2 Operations The soft–keys of the viewer screen Search Change of the display of the message Go to the editor screen (1) Operations by soft–keys a. [EDIT] Call for the editor screen of message data This key displays th
  • Page 85610. MISCELLANEOUS DATA IN SEQUENCE PROGRAM PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 10.3.2 In the editor screen, you can edit the message data which can be displayed Editor Screen of on CNC screen by the DISPB instruction. To display the editor screen, press the soft–key [EDIT] in the viewer screen. The fol
  • Page 85710. MISCELLANEOUS DATA IN B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION SEQUENCE PROGRAM 10.3.2.1 Screen structure Message Address Message No. Area of Message data Detailed Display of Message Data Key Input Line Message Line (1) The message address, the message request monitor, the message number and the message
  • Page 85810. MISCELLANEOUS DATA IN SEQUENCE PROGRAM PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 10.3.2.2 Operations The soft–keys in this screen Pasting of entries Search Change of message display Selecting of entries Editing of entries Deletion of entries Copy of entries Cut of entries Deletion of all entries (1) Oper
  • Page 85910. MISCELLANEOUS DATA IN B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION SEQUENCE PROGRAM h. [PASTE] Pasting of entries This key replaces the data on the cursor with the contents of the buffer for pasting. If you have pressed the soft–key [PASTE], the buffer keeps the contents until the system is cut the power su
  • Page 86010. MISCELLANEOUS DATA IN SEQUENCE PROGRAM PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 10.3.3.1 Screen structure Message Address Message Request Monitor Message No. Simple Display of Message Data Editing Area of Message No. Editing Area of Message String Key Input Line Message Line (1) The message address, mes
  • Page 86110. MISCELLANEOUS DATA IN B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION SEQUENCE PROGRAM 10.3.3.2 Operations The soft–keys in the entry screen Pasting of Characters Input of ”@” Change of message display Change of input mode Cut of Chara. Delete of chara. Change of Editing Area Select of Characters Copy of Chara
  • Page 86210. MISCELLANEOUS DATA IN SEQUENCE PROGRAM PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 d. [DOUBLE CHAR] This operation is same as the one in the viewer screen. Refer to ”operations by soft–keys” in the viewer screen. e. [SELECT] Select of characters This key is used for specifying some characters, which become
  • Page 86310. MISCELLANEOUS DATA IN B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION SEQUENCE PROGRAM Alarm Messages Meanings and Countermeasures Meaning: CLOSING ”@” IS NOT A pair of ”@” is not input. Countermeasure: FOUND Input Japanese character or Chinese character enclosed by ”@”. Meaning: BAD NUMBER OF The number of th
  • Page 86410. MISCELLANEOUS DATA IN SEQUENCE PROGRAM PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 10.4 VIEWER/EDITOR SCREEN OF SYSTEM PARAMETER 10.4.1 In this screen, you can confirm the system parameters which affect the execution of the ladder. To display this screen, press the soft–key Viewer Screen of [SYSTEM PARAM]
  • Page 86510. MISCELLANEOUS DATA IN B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION SEQUENCE PROGRAM 10.4.1.1 Screen structure Display Area for system parameters Message Line Key Input Line (1) In the message line, some system messages like error messages are displayed. (2) In the display area for system parameters, the par
  • Page 86610. MISCELLANEOUS DATA IN SEQUENCE PROGRAM PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 NOTE 1 To enable the programmer function, set the setting “PROGRAMMER ENABLE” to “YES” in “GENERAL” screen in PMC setting. 2 To disable the online monitor function, set both “RS–232C” and “F–BUS” to “NOT USE” in “ONLINE” scr
  • Page 86710. MISCELLANEOUS DATA IN B–61863E/15 PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION SEQUENCE PROGRAM 10.4.2.1 Screen structure Editing Area for System Parameter Message Line Key Input Line (1) In the message line, some system messages like error messages are displayed. (2) In the editing area for system parameters, the para
  • Page 86810. MISCELLANEOUS DATA IN SEQUENCE PROGRAM PMC–NB6 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 NOTE After changing a counter data type, set up the counter value again. (2) FS0 OPERATOR PANEL You can specify the Series 0 operator’s panel is connected. When YES is selected, specify the actual addresses of DI and DO conn
  • Page 869V. FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION
  • Page 870
  • Page 8711. SCREEN OPERATION FOR FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION PMC–SA1/SB7 1 SCREEN OPERATION FOR FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 837
  • Page 8721. SCREEN OPERATION FOR FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 1.1 For the PMC–SA1, the operability and function have been improved as follows, as compared with the Series 21i–A PMC and the Series SCREEN OPERATION 16i/18i/21i–A loader control PMC–SA1.
  • Page 8731. SCREEN OPERATION FOR FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION PMC–SA1/SB7 1.2 The following points are changed for improvement of operation and feature for PMC–SB7. SCREEN OPERATION D Edit functions which is embedded in PMC control software FOR PMC–SB7 D Display
  • Page 8741. SCREEN OPERATION FOR FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 1.2.1 When pressing soft–key [PMC] in CNC system menu screen, PMC main Structure of Software menu appears. The following is the summary of PMC screen tree. The shaded parts are the improved
  • Page 8751. SCREEN OPERATION FOR FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION PMC–SA1/SB7 1.2.2 In symbol/comment display/editing screen, you can edit maximum 16 Expansion of Symbol characters of symbols. Other screens which shows the symbols can display and handle the symbols u
  • Page 8762. SETTING FUNCTION FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 2 SETTING FUNCTION 842
  • Page 877B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION 2. SETTING FUNCTION 2.1 There are following setting parameter screens on PMC–SB7. SWITCHING D Setting screen for general functions (See V–2.2 for details.) SCREENS FOR D Setting screen for multi–language alarm/operator message display function
  • Page 8782. SETTING FUNCTION FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 2.2 SETTING SCREEN OF GENERAL FUNCTION Setting screen for PMC–SB7 D TRACE START(PMC–SB7:K906.5) MANUAL (0): Executes the tracing with [EXEC] soft–key. AUTO (1): Starts the tracing automatically after the power turns on. D ED
  • Page 879B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION 2. SETTING FUNCTION D DATA TBL CNTL SCREEN(PMC–SB7:K900.7, PMC–SA1:K17.7) YES (0): Displays PMC parameter data table control screen. NO (1): Does not displays PMC parameter data table control screen. D HIDE PMC PARAM (PMC–SB7:K902.6, PMC–SA1:K1
  • Page 8802. SETTING FUNCTION FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 D PROGRAMMER ENABLE(PMC–SB7:K900.1, PMC–SA1:K17.1) NO (0): Disables embedded programmer function. YES (1): Enables embedded programmer function. NOTE This setting effects some PMC functions. Please refer to ”2.6 Programmer p
  • Page 881B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION 2. SETTING FUNCTION 2.3 MULTI–LANGUAGE ALARM/OPERATOR MESSAGE DISPLAY FUNCTION SETTING SCREEN MESSAGE SHIFT VALUE Enter a desired message display request bit shift amount. A value from 0 to 1999 can be entered. The initially displayed value is
  • Page 8822. SETTING FUNCTION FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 2.4 This caution screen is displayed for the operator’s attention when the operator is going to switch to the setting parameter screen for the CAUTION SCREEN selectable I/O link assignment function. OF THE SETTING PARAMETER
  • Page 883B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION 2. SETTING FUNCTION 2.5 You can set the group of optional I/O device that is connected with each machines. SETTING PARAMETER SCREEN FOR THE SELECTABLE I/O LINK ASSIGNMENT FUNCTION The setting parameter screen for the selectable I/O link assignm
  • Page 8842. SETTING FUNCTION FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 2.6 PROGRAMMER CAUTION PROTECTION This section contains important information for developers FUNCTION of application system controlled by PMC. Improperly implemented application system may increase possibility of defects in
  • Page 885B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION 2. SETTING FUNCTION 2.6.1 If you set ”PROGRAMMER ENABLE ” to ”YES”, it enables the PROGRAMMER following functions as a supervisor mode. ENABLE (PMC–SB7: – Ladder editing screen – Title data editing screen K900.1, PMC–SA1: – Symbol/comment data
  • Page 8862. SETTING FUNCTION FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 2.6.2 If you set ”HIDE PMC PROGRAM” to ”YES”, it disables the following HIDE PMC PROGRAM functions which have the sequence program display. (PMC–SB7: K900.0, – Ladder monitor screen – Ladder editing screen PMC–SA1: K17.0) –
  • Page 887B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION 2. SETTING FUNCTION CAUTION Set this setting to ”NO”(0) before shipment of the machine if you want to prohibit operator form editing the program. If you want to protect this setting, please make a sequence that always writes 0 in this bit by yo
  • Page 8882. SETTING FUNCTION FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 2.6.5 If you set ”PROTECT PMC PARAM” to ”YES” or K902.7/K19.7 = 1, PROTECT PMC PARAM the following functions about PMC parameter are protected. (PMC–SB7: K902.7, – It is impossible to change Timer, Counter, Keep Relay and Da
  • Page 889B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION 2. SETTING FUNCTION WARNING If a sequence program is stopped while the machine is operating, the machine may behave unexpectedly. Before stopping the sequence program, make sure that nobody is near the machine and that the tool cannot interfere
  • Page 8902. SETTING FUNCTION FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 2.6.7 If you set ”RAM WRITE ENABLE” to ”YES”, it enables both the forcing RAM WRITE ENABLE function and the override function. (PMC–SB7: K900.4, PMC–SA1: K17.4) NOTE The override function also requires the setting of ”OVERRI
  • Page 891B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION 2. SETTING FUNCTION CAUTION 1 When allowing input/output operation in the field, it is recommended that each setting of protection is set to allow only necessary operation. 2 It is recommended that the programmer function (K900.1/K17.1) should
  • Page 8922. SETTING FUNCTION FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 2.7 i) If you want to prohibit completely operator from accessing the sequence program; EXAMPLE FOR D PROGRAMMER ENABLE SETTING (PMC–SB7: K900.1, PMC–SA1: K17.1) ”NO” PARAMETERS D HIDE PMC PROGRAM (PMC–SB7: K900.0, PMC–SA1:
  • Page 893B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION 2. SETTING FUNCTION D HIDE PMC PROGRAM (PMC–SB7: K900.0, PMC–SA1: K17.0) ”NO” D EDIT ENABLE (PMC–SB7: K901.6, PMC–SA1: K18.6) ”YES” D ALLOW PMC STOP (PMC–SB7: K902.2, PMC–SA1: K19.2) ”YES” NOTE Please use the password function of sequence progr
  • Page 8942. SETTING FUNCTION FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 2.8 KEEP RELAYS USED IN THE SYSTEM #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 K17 DTBLDSP TRCSTAT MEMINP AUTORUN PRGRAM LADMASK or K900 #7 DTBLDSP 0 : The PMC parameter data table control screen is displayed. 1 : The PMC parameter data table c
  • Page 895B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION 2. SETTING FUNCTION #2 TRGSTAT 0 : The trigger stop function does not automatically start at power on. 1 : The trigger stop function starts automatically at power on. #1 DBGSTAT 0 : The automatic break processing of C language debug function do
  • Page 8962. SETTING FUNCTION FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 NOTE If this bit is turned on, setting in multi–language alarm/operator message display function setting screen is overwritten by the value of K916–K919. Please set K916–K919 previously before the bit is turned on. #3 NOEOUT
  • Page 897B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION 2. SETTING FUNCTION K918– message shift value K919 Specify shift amount of message shift. : This area is effective when K906.4=1. NOTE These settings are invalid if the value is out of range of A address. 863
  • Page 8983. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 3 LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR (PMC–SB7) Pressing soft key [PMCLAD] displays the sequence program dynamically. On the screen, you can monitor the LADDER Program works. The LADDER Diagram Editor screen allows you ch
  • Page 8993. LADDER DIAGRAM B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION MONITOR (PMC–SB7) These screens can be reached as described bellow. PMC Main Menu [<] [PMCLAD] Monitor Function [LIST] Program List NOTE 1 Step Sequence Viewer screen Monitor screen [ZOOM] [LIST] [ZOOM] [LIST] [ZOOM] [ZOOM] [B
  • Page 9003. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 3.1 LADDER Diagram Monitor screen shows the on/off status of contacts and coils, and the contents of address specified for parameter of functional LADDER DIAGRAM instructions. MONITOR SCREEN Press the [PMCLAD
  • Page 9013. LADDER DIAGRAM B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION MONITOR (PMC–SB7) 3.1.1 Screen Structures Title information (REMARKS) Current subprogram Current position Range to search Area for LADDER Diagram Message line Key input line Additional information line (a) Screen Structure 1 T
  • Page 9023. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 (b) LADDER Diagram 1 Nets wider than the screen width are displayed as ”Continuous Net” using continuous marks (”>A1>”). Same continuous marks mean they are connected with each other. (c) Monitor 1 Contacts a
  • Page 9033. LADDER DIAGRAM B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION MONITOR (PMC–SB7) 3.1.2 Operations Soft keys of LADDER Diagram Monitor screen on PMC–SB7 Main soft keys of LADDER Diagram Monitor screen Program List LADDER Diagram Editor Screen Settings Display Data Table Collective Monitor
  • Page 9043. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 When cursor is hidden, the net that has the specified net number or contains the specified address will be shown at the top of the screen. When cursor is shown, the cursor moves to the relay or the parameter
  • Page 9053. LADDER DIAGRAM B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION MONITOR (PMC–SB7) 7 [<] Calling PMC main menu The screen display is switched to the PMC Main menu. (b) Other operations 1 Cursor move keys, Page change keys With cursor hidden, you can move diagram in the screen by up/down Cur
  • Page 9063. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 NOTE 1 Forced I/O function is enabled when ”RAM WRITE ENABLE” setting is set to ”YES” in GENERAL screen of PMC Settings. If the setting is ”NO”, INPUT key will be just ignored. 2 Parameters of timer functiona
  • Page 9073. LADDER DIAGRAM B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION MONITOR (PMC–SB7) 5 [W–SRCH] soft key without string searches forward a write coil of the same address with relay under cursor. If cursor is hidden, or cursor is not placed on a relay, this operation will search a write coil o
  • Page 9083. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 SYMBOL Addresses that have a symbol are displayed by the symbols. Addresses without symbols are displayed by the addresses themselves. ADDRESS (default) All addresses are displayed as the addresses themselves
  • Page 9093. LADDER DIAGRAM B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION MONITOR (PMC–SB7) D SHOW COMMENT OF CONTACT Changes the display format of the comment displayed under each contact. NONE Displays no comment under each contact. In this mode, more contacts (8 by 9 or 9 by 9 (number–of–contacts
  • Page 9103. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 D SHOW COMMENT OF COIL Determines whether to show coil comments. YES (default) Right margin of 14 characters is reserved for display of coil comments. You can set NO Right margin is used to extend diagram by
  • Page 9113. LADDER DIAGRAM B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION MONITOR (PMC–SB7) DIAGRAM COLOR Sets the color of the entire ladder diagram. Set the color in the same way as for symbol color. ACTIVE RELAY COLOR Sets the color of relays in the on state. The color of the relays in the off st
  • Page 9123. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 YES (default) Downward search will continue to search from top of LADDER when reaches to bottom. Upward search will also continue to search from bottom when reaches to top. NO Search process will fail when re
  • Page 9133. LADDER DIAGRAM B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION MONITOR (PMC–SB7) 3.1.4 The following table shows all monitor formats for each parameter of each Display Format for functional instruction. Parameters NOTE 1 ”Variable” in ”Monitor Format” field means that this parameter chang
  • Page 9143. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 No. Name Parameter Monitor Format No. Name Parameter Monitor Format 27 CODB * 1 Constant 40 NUMEB 1 Constant 2 Constant 2 Constant 3 1–byte binary 3 Variable binary 4 Variable binary 41 DISPB* 1 Constant 28 M
  • Page 9153. LADDER DIAGRAM B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION MONITOR (PMC–SB7) No. Name Parameter Monitor Format 66 CALLU 1 No monitor 68 JMPB 1 No monitor 69 LBL 1 No monitor 70 NOP 1 Constant 71 SP 1 No monitor 72 SPE – – 73 JMPC 1 No monitor Functional Instructions of Special monitor
  • Page 9163. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 3.2 Functional Instruction Data Table Viewer screen shows the contents of data table that belongs to some functional instructions. FUNCTIONAL To reach this screen, at LADDER Diagram Monitor screen, press INST
  • Page 9173. LADDER DIAGRAM B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION MONITOR (PMC–SB7) 3.2.1 Screen Structures ÅÅÅÅ ÅÅÅÅ Functional instruction Number of data Data length Data type name ÅÅÅÅ ÅÅÅÅ Area for Data Table Message line Key input line 1 The functional instruction name, the number of da
  • Page 9183. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 1 [NO.SRCH] Search for data table number Searches the data table number which you specified. Then the cursor is displayed on the data of the target number. And the cursor is disappeared when you operate somet
  • Page 9193. LADDER DIAGRAM B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION MONITOR (PMC–SB7) 3.3 PROGRAM LIST VIEWER SCREEN 3.3.1 Program List Viewer screen (Detail) shows the detail information that are program size, program net count and so on for program. Detail Screen Title information (REMARKS)
  • Page 9203. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 4. The comment is displayed in the ”COMMENT” field for each program. If no comment is set into the subprogram, the ”COMMENT” field will be blank. 5. The program size is displayed in the ”SIZE (BYTE)” field fo
  • Page 9213. LADDER DIAGRAM B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION MONITOR (PMC–SB7) 3.3.2 Program List Viewer screen (Brief) shows less information than Program Brief Screen List Viewer screen (Detail), to increase the number of items. The program type, the status of protection and the name
  • Page 9223. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 4. In the Program List area, the programs 14 lines and 5 columns can be displayed in maximum. (b) Area of Program List The following items are displayed in Program List area of Program List Viewer screen. The
  • Page 9233. LADDER DIAGRAM B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION MONITOR (PMC–SB7) 4 [<] key The screen display is switched into the PMC Main menu. (b) Other operations 1 Cursor move keys, Page change keys You can move cursor by all cursor move keys and Page change keys. And if you entered
  • Page 9243. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 3.3.4 Setting Screen (a) Setting items Program List Viewer/Editor screen contains the setting items below: D VIEW FORMAT Determines whether the list data in the Program List Viewer/Editor screen are displayed
  • Page 9253. LADDER DIAGRAM B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION MONITOR (PMC–SB7) D SORT BY Determines whether the programs in the Program List Viewer/Editor screen are displayed in order of program number, or symbol name themselves. And When ADDRESS NOTAION is SYMBOL, this determination i
  • Page 9264. COLLECTIVE MONITOR FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 4 COLLECTIVE MONITOR FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) On Collective Monitor screen, a monitor of the necessary ladder nets can be displayed by specifying ladder nets. 892
  • Page 9274. COLLECTIVE MONITOR B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) 4.1 The calling operation of Collective Monitor screen is as follows. CALLING SCREEN (1) Calling from Program List Viewer screen Press soft key [ZOOM] after moving the cursor to ”COLLECT” program positio
  • Page 9284. COLLECTIVE MONITOR FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 4.2 Collective Monitor screen is as follows. Any ladder diagram is not displayed first. Ladder nets selected by the operation of a coil search and SCREEN picking up nets is added. 128 nets or less of lad
  • Page 9294. COLLECTIVE MONITOR B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) 4.3 SCREEN Collective Monitor screen OPERATIONS Program List Viewer Jump to the ladder diagram net Initialization of Collective Monitor screen Pick up a ladder diagram net Switches to Ladder Delete a net
  • Page 9304. COLLECTIVE MONITOR FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 2. Specify the ladder net on Ladder Diagram Monitor screen Specify a ladder diagram net on Ladder Diagram Monitor screen and the net is picked up on Collective Monitor screen. D Pick up a ladder net on C
  • Page 9314. COLLECTIVE MONITOR B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) Fig. 4.3(c) Ladder Diagram Viewer screen (Soft key for search) 897
  • Page 9324. COLLECTIVE MONITOR FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 4.4 ALARM MESSAGE AND COUNTERMEASURE Message that may be displayed during Collective Monitor function Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents THE ADDRESS IS NOT FOUND Specify the address
  • Page 9335. LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) 5 LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) 899
  • Page 9345. LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 5.1 In Ladder Diagram Editor screen you can edit Ladder program to change its behavior. To reach Ladder Diagram Editor screen, press [EDIT] soft LADDER DIAGRAM key at Ladder Diagram Monitor screen. Fo
  • Page 9355. LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) 5.2 SCREEN Title information(REMARKS) Displayed subprogram Display position information CONFIGURATION Cursor Display position Ladder diagram display area Message display line Key input line Additional
  • Page 9365. LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 5.3 SCREEN Soft keys on the Ladder Diagram Editor screen OPERATIONS Program List Add new net Make changes effective Cut net Paste net Change to search soft keys Edit net Select multiple nets Delete ne
  • Page 9375. LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) 6. [SELECT] Select multiple nets Selects multiple nets for following operations such as [DELETE], [CUT], [COPY]. Pressing [SELECT] soft key leads to a mode to select one or more nets for following edi
  • Page 9385. LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 WARNING You have to pay special attention to run/stop the ladder program. Running/stopping the ladder program in a wrong timing, or with machine in improper status, may cause unexpected reaction of ma
  • Page 9395. LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) 5.4 SETTING SCREEN Fig. 5.4 Ladder Diagram Editor Setting screen (a) Settings There are the following settings on Ladder Diagram Editor Setting screen: – ADDRESS NOTATION Default: ADDRESS Specifies wh
  • Page 9405. LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 – FORCE POSTPROCESS AFTER EDIT Default: NO Decides whether the post–processing after editing ladder program, which makes ladder program ready to run, will be always done, or will be done only when lad
  • Page 9415. LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) 5.5 In Net Editor screen, you can create new net, and modify existing net. NET EDITOR 1. Modifying existing netWhen [MODIFY] soft key is used to reach Net Editor screen, this screen is in ”MODIFY MODE
  • Page 9425. LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 2. Current edit mode is indicated at right of the top line as ”CREATE MODE” or ”MODIFY MODE”. When [MODIFY] soft key at Ladder Diagram Editor screen is used to reach Net Editor screen, the screen is i
  • Page 9435. LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) (a) Screen configuration 1. [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ s ], [ R ], Enter and change relay Place relays (contacts and coils), or change type of existing relays. When one of these relay soft keys is pressed
  • Page 9445. LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 [ ] [ ] Drawing and erasing vertical connection line 6. [NXTNET] Go to next net Finishes editing current net, and goes to next net. If [MODIFY] soft key at Ladder Diagram Editor screen is used to reac
  • Page 9455. LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) 8. [RESTOR] Abandon changes Abandons all changes, and restores net to the one at starting editing this net. If [CREATE] soft key at Ladder Diagram Editor screen is used to reach Net Editor screen, it
  • Page 9465. LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 11.[APPCLM] Append column Inserts one blank column at right of cursor position. Diagram elements on right of horizontal cursor position will be shifted to right by one column. And if necessary, net wi
  • Page 9475. LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) 5.6 Valid net must have following structure: STRUCTURE OF VALID NET Convergence point Input section Output section Structure of valid net ”Input section” consists of contacts and functional instructio
  • Page 9485. LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 5.7 Pressing [FUNC] soft key at Net Editor screen reaches Functional Instruction List screen at which you choose a functional instruction to be FUNCTIONAL entered from list of all available functional
  • Page 9495. LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) 5.8 At Functional Instruction Data Table Editor screen, you can edit the contents of data table that belongs to some functional instructions. To FUNCTIONAL reach this screen, at Net Editor screen, pre
  • Page 9505. LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 5.9 At Program List Editor screen you can create new program and delete a program in addition to the function of Program List Viewer screen. To PROGRAM LIST reach this screen, press [LIST] soft key at
  • Page 9515. LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) 5.9.1 Screen Operations Display the contents of program Screen Settings Delete a program Search for program Add new program Fig. 5.9.1 Soft keys of Program List Editor screen (a) Operations using the
  • Page 9525. LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 5.9.2 Setting Screen Fig. 5.9.2 Program List Editor (Setting) screen (a) Settings There are the following settings on Program List Editor (Setting) screen: – VIEW FORMAT Default : DETAIL Specifies whe
  • Page 9535. LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) 5.10 ALARM MESSAGE AND COUNTERMEASURE Messages that may be displayed during PMC program editing Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents OVERLAPPED COM If COME is missing, add it in pro
  • Page 9545. LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents DUPLICATE DIFU/DIFD NUMBER If some of them are unnecessary, re- Plural DIFUs or DIFDs have the same (WARNING) move them. If all of them are nece
  • Page 9555. LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents JMPB OVER COM BORDER JMPB and its destination must have JMPB and its destination differ in same COM/COME status. Review COM/COME status. range o
  • Page 9565. LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents SPE WITHOUT SP If SP is missing, add it in proper posi- There is no SP that corresponds to tion. If the SPE is unnecessary, re- this SPE. move i
  • Page 9575. LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents LADDER PROGRAM IS BROKEN This ladder program must be all Ladder program may be broken by cleared once, and remake ladder pro- some reason. gram.
  • Page 9585. LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents BAD CONDITION INPUT Check the connection of all condition Some condition input of functional inputs of the functional instruction. Es- instructi
  • Page 9595. LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) 5.11 Some functional instructions may cause the ladder program to take a long time to stop or make it unable to stop, if their ACT or RST condition NOTE ON remains on for no apparent reason. If the la
  • Page 9606. SIGNAL TRACE FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 6 SIGNAL TRACE FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) The signal trace function for PMC–SB7 has both the signal wave form display function and the signal trace function for PMC–SA5/SB5/SB6 and has improved specification and opera
  • Page 9616. SIGNAL TRACE B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) 6.1 Pushing the [TRACE] soft key on PMC Diagnosis screen displays the Signal Trace screen. SIGNAL TRACE SCREEN (INITIAL SCREEN) Signal Trace screen (Initial screen) 927
  • Page 9626. SIGNAL TRACE FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 6.2 Pushing the [SETING] soft key on the Signal Trace screen displays the ”Parameter Setting” screen. ”Parameter Setting” has two screens. The SETTING OF TRACE page key changes these screens. PARAMETER Setting
  • Page 9636. SIGNAL TRACE B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) g) STOP CONDITION/ TRIGGER/ MODE When ”TRIGGER” is set on ”STOP CONDITION”, this parameter is enabled. Determine the trigger mode when the trace is stopped. – RISING EDGE: Stops the tracing automatically by ri
  • Page 9646. SIGNAL TRACE FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 6.3 a) Setting addresses In page 2 of Parameter Setting screen, you can set the addresses or SETTING OF symbols that should be sampled. SAMPLING ADDRESS Setting screen of Trace Parameter (Page 2) In case of in
  • Page 9656. SIGNAL TRACE B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) – MV.DWN: Exchanges the signal indicated the cursor for the signal below one line. – DELALL: Clears all of the value of the edit box. c) Trigger setting When ”SIGNAL TRANSITION” is set on ”TRACE MODE” and ”ANY
  • Page 9666. SIGNAL TRACE FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 6.4 On trace screen, pushing [START] soft key starts the execution of trace after you set the trace parameter correctly. The followings are the screen EXECUTION OF examples of the trace execution by ”TIME CYCL
  • Page 9676. SIGNAL TRACE B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) 6.5 When the execution is finished, the result of trace is displayed. The followings are the screen examples of trace by ”TIME CYCLE” and OPERATION AFTER ”SIGNAL TRANSITION” mode. EXECUTION OF TRACE Result of
  • Page 9686. SIGNAL TRACE FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 b) Automatic calculation of the selected range Pushing [MARK] soft key marks the current position and displays the mark cursor. If the mark cursor duplicates with the current position cursor, the current posit
  • Page 9696. SIGNAL TRACE B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) Result of Trace screen (Zoom out display) d) Exchange of sampling signal Pushing [MV.UP] soft key exchanges the signal indicated by the signal cursor for the signal one line above. Pushing [MV.DWN] soft key ex
  • Page 9706. SIGNAL TRACE FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 6.6 Trace execution is automatically started after power–on by setting a PMC parameter. AUTOMATIC START OF TRACE SETTING #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 K906 #5 0 : Starts trace execution when soft key [EXEC] is press
  • Page 9716. SIGNAL TRACE B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) 6.7 If there is the result data of trace after trace execution is finished, you can output the file to the memory card. OUTPUT OF RESULT OF TRACE a) Operation When softkey [PUNCH] is pushed, it changes to [EXE
  • Page 9726. SIGNAL TRACE FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 Strings String data. A unit is outputted when Setting Value is numerical data from the first. The item changed into the number by ”Setting Value” outputs original string data. Empty column in the case of the o
  • Page 9736. SIGNAL TRACE B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) NOTE 1 The SAMPLING ADDRESS is outputted where there is a setting. Therefore, empty coloulm isn’t outputted for the item of ”ADDRESS”. 2 Nothing is outputted when a ”SYMBOL” and ”COMMENT” aren’t established. E
  • Page 9746. SIGNAL TRACE FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 ’Comment’, ’ZRN MODE’, ’TIME CNT.AUX1(MEM)’ , , , , ’READ STROBE’, ’NORMAL RESET PB’, ’INIT_M&RSTM (RST–>MACRO)’, ’OPTIONAL STOP1’,’OPTIONAL STOP2’ ’Check’, 0, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0, 1, 1, 1 ’Data’, ’R0000.0’, ’R00
  • Page 9757. SELECTABLE I/O LINK ASSIGNMENT FUNCTION B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION (PMC–SB7) 7 SELECTABLE I/O LINK ASSIGNMENT FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) 941
  • Page 9767. SELECTABLE I/O LINK ASSIGNMENT FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 7.1 This function enables the common use of a sequence program for several machines which have different I/O device configuration with each other, OUTLINE by setting the parameter to enable/d
  • Page 9777. SELECTABLE I/O LINK ASSIGNMENT FUNCTION B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION (PMC–SB7) The I/O devices that are used in all machines can be set as basic part of configuration that is always effective. Basic part Machine A : I/O devices Machine B : I/O devices CNC Power Connecti
  • Page 9787. SELECTABLE I/O LINK ASSIGNMENT FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 Basic part Optional part CNC Power Connection I/O OK Mate Unit Unit CNC Power Connection I/O NG Mate Unit Unit Optional part Basic part This function requires setting the following parameters
  • Page 9797. SELECTABLE I/O LINK ASSIGNMENT FUNCTION B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION (PMC–SB7) 7.2 There are three machines which have different configurations of I/O devices, each other. EXAMPLE D Configuration A A machine which has a distribution I/O machine operator’s panel and a co
  • Page 9807. SELECTABLE I/O LINK ASSIGNMENT FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 (1) The contents of I/O link assignment data in sequence program Channel 1 Address Group Base Slot Name I/O Device X0000 0 0 1 CM12I Distribution I/O machine operator’s panel : : : : : : X002
  • Page 9817. SELECTABLE I/O LINK ASSIGNMENT FUNCTION B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION (PMC–SB7) D Configuration B i) System parameter 1CH ENABLE SELECTION = YES BASIC GROUP COUNT = 1 2CH ENABLE SELECTION = YES BASIC GROUP COUNT = 0 ii) Setting parameter Group NO. : 00 01 02 03 04 05 06
  • Page 9827. SELECTABLE I/O LINK ASSIGNMENT FUNCTION (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 D Configuration B Channel 1 Address Group Base Slot Name I/O Device X0000 0 0 1 CM12I Distribution I/O machine operator’s panel : : : : : : X0030 1 0 1 FS08A Power Mate : : : : : : Channel 2
  • Page 9837. SELECTABLE I/O LINK ASSIGNMENT FUNCTION B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION (PMC–SB7) 7.3 1) If PMC–parameters are cleared, cycling the power of CNC links only the basic part. NOTES 2) After selecting the assignment data, the I/O devices are linked with shifted group number of
  • Page 9848. SYSTEM PARAMETER (PMC–SB7) FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 8 SYSTEM PARAMETER (PMC–SB7) System parameter screen (1) ENABLE SELECTION This parameter enables or disables Selectable I/O link assignment function. This parameter is set by softkey [NO] or [YES ]. NO: Don’t use S
  • Page 9858. SYSTEM PARAMETER B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION (PMC–SB7) (2) BASIC GROUP COUNT This parameter determines the number of groups in the basic part of the I/O link assignment data. You can set the group count for basic part by entering (0–16) followed by softkey[INPUT]. The
  • Page 9869. I/O LINK CONNECTING CHECK SCREEN FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 9 I/O LINK CONNECTING CHECK SCREEN The I/O Link connecting check screen displays the types and ID codes of the connected I/O devices for each group. When I/O device is not connected, any I/O device is not dis
  • Page 987B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION 10. ONLINE FUNCTION 10 ONLINE FUNCTION There is the following function in the online function of FANUC LADDER–II, FANUC LADDER–III or Ladder Editing Package. – Ladder monitor display – Online ladder editing – PMC parameter display and editing –
  • Page 98810. ONLINE FUNCTION FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 10.1 ONLINE SETTING SCREEN Fig. 10.1 Online monitor setting screen Meanings of Soft key EMG ST: Terminates communication forcibly. Use this key if communication becomes abnormal and the connection cannot be terminated normal
  • Page 989B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION 10. ONLINE FUNCTION 10.2 To communicate with FANUC LADDER–II, FANUC LADDER–III or Ladder Editing Package, you need to put the PMC system in waiting SETTING OF ONLINE situation of the connection. There are two ways for setting this, setting at C
  • Page 99010. ONLINE FUNCTION FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 10.2.2 You can enable and disable the online connection for Ethernet, HSSB and Setting of Online RS–232C by NC parameter No.24 without setting on the PMC online monitor setting screen. This NC parameter is made effective imm
  • Page 991B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION 10. ONLINE FUNCTION 10.3 ONLINE FUNCTION BY ETHERNET 10.3.1 When you try to connect FANUC LADDER–III or Ladder Editing Setting of Ethernet Package (Window version) with CNC by Ethernet, it is necessary to set some Ethernet parameters. The setti
  • Page 99210. ONLINE FUNCTION FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 Fig. 10.3.1(c) Ethernet Card (PCMCIA) 10.3.2 The procedures for online connection with PMC and the offline Starting online programmer (FANUC LADDER–III, Ladder Editing Package for windows) by Ethernet are as follows. communi
  • Page 993B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION 10. ONLINE FUNCTION (3) Select the [Setting] tab, and add the IP Address to ”Use device”. (4) Push the button for start of the communication. Ladder Editing Package can be connected by the same operation too. Refer to ”FANUC LADDER–II
  • Page 99410. ONLINE FUNCTION FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 NOTE 1 When one of the following screens is displayed at PMC, the online communication can not be used. Change to other screens from the following screens, and use the online function. [PMCLAD], [I/O], [EDIT], [SYSPRM], [USR
  • Page 995B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION 10. ONLINE FUNCTION 10.4 The communication status of RS–232C and HIGH SPEED I/F are displayed at the online monitor screen during the online communication. COMMUNICATION STATUS Fig. 10.4 Online monitor setting screen USE TIME: The maximum time
  • Page 99610. ONLINE FUNCTION FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 The display messages and the meanings are shown in the table of below. Displayed messages Meanings INACTIVE The communication is inactive. STOPPING The communication is being stopped.(Wait for the termination of communicatio
  • Page 997B–61863E/15 FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION 10. ONLINE FUNCTION 10.5 If any errors have occurred during Ethernet connection, the contents of the errors are displayed at ”ETHLOG” screen of CNC. Refer to this screen ABOUT when the communication does not start. CONNECTION LOG OF ETHERNET Fi
  • Page 99810. ONLINE FUNCTION FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION B–61863E/15 Connection Log Meanings and countermeasures SnpErr:PDU=m,n,[x] date time An error has occurred during the online communication. m, n : Online communication information that is internal information of a system. SnpErr:PDU=n,[
  • Page 999VI. STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION
  • Page 1000
  • Page 1001B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 1. GENERAL 1 GENERAL 967
  • Page 10021. GENERAL STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15 1.1 The ladder method is most often used for programming the sequence control governed by a programmable controller. This method, shown in STEP SEQUENCE Fig.1.1(a) , was derived from relay-panel control circuits. Since it has METHOD been in use for years
  • Page 1003B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 1. GENERAL Given these conditions, a step sequence method has been created to describe programs structurally. It is well-suited to the control of entire processes and provides an easy-to-understand visualized flow of the process. The step sequence programming featu
  • Page 10041. GENERAL STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15 [ ] Step A Starts execution. Waits for machining request. (Process 1) Transition B Machining request? ±When machining is requested Step C Holds a workpiece on the pallet. (Process 2) Transition D Loading completed? ±Once loading has been completed Step E
  • Page 1005B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 1. GENERAL 1.2 This manual uses the graphical symbols listed in Table 1.2 to describe step sequence flowcharts. Depending on the character font being used, the GRAPHICAL actually displayed symbols may differ slightly from those listed here. SYMBOLS These graphical
  • Page 10061. GENERAL STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15 1.3 Follow the procedure below to create a step sequence program. Use a personal computer on which the FANUC LADDER software package is PROGRAMMING installed to code (edit) a program. Use a CNC to execute, debug and correct the ladder subprogram. (1) Cre
  • Page 1007B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 1. GENERAL Table 1.3 Step sequence functions Ę : usable Personal computer PMC-SB4/ Functions SB6 PMC-SC4 PMC-NB2 FANUC FANUC FANUC LADDER LADDER II LADDER III Display and edit of a program  Display of subprogram list Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę  Create a new subprogram Ę Ę Ę  D
  • Page 10082. STEP SEQUENCE BASICS STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15 2 STEP SEQUENCE BASICS 974
  • Page 1009B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 2. STEP SEQUENCE BASICS 2.1 A step sequence program is created using a variety of graphical symbols, as shown in Fig. 2.1 (a). The main terms used in the step sequence are TERMINOLOGY described below. (Block) [ ] S1 (Initial Step) P100 (Transition) S2 (Step) P101 (
  • Page 10102. STEP SEQUENCE BASICS STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15 (1) Step Sn (Pm) A step indicates a process, which is the basic processing unit in a step sequence program. In a step, specify the S address (Sn), which is a step number, and P address (Pm), which indicates a subprogram (action program) spec
  • Page 1011B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 2. STEP SEQUENCE BASICS (3) Transition Pn A transition denotes the transition conditions. When these evaluate true, the step of the corresponding state changes from the inactive to active state or vice the reverse. Specify the P address (Pn), which indicates a subp
  • Page 10122. STEP SEQUENCE BASICS STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15 (4) Initial Step [ ] Sn (Pm) While a normal step can be activated by a transition, the initial step is activated automatically when execution of the program starts, as shown in Fig. 2.1 (e). Stopping program (STOP) Executing program (RUN) [
  • Page 1013B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 2. STEP SEQUENCE BASICS (5) Divergence and Convergence of Selective Sequence To describe a complicated sequence, selective sequences can be used. A selective sequence offers multiple choices, from among which the condition becomes true first activates the correspon
  • Page 10142. STEP SEQUENCE BASICS STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15 (6) Divergence and Convergence of Simultaneous Sequence A Simultaneous sequence can be used to execute multiple processes simultaneously. In a Simultaneous sequence, as shown in Fig. 2.1 (g), one transition activates multiple steps. The acti
  • Page 1015B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 2. STEP SEQUENCE BASICS (7) Jump and Label The jump function is used to describe a non–serial sequence, such as a repeated loop. As shown in Fig. 2.1 (h), when a jump designation is activated, the sequence jumps to the step having the corresponding jump destination
  • Page 10162. STEP SEQUENCE BASICS STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15 (9) Calling block To execute a block as the main program in a step sequence, call the block with the CALLU (SUB 66) or CALL (SUB65) instruction in the same way as for ladder subprogram calling from the second level ladder program. Ladder (Se
  • Page 1017B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 2. STEP SEQUENCE BASICS Block (P1) [ ] S1 S21 S22 S231 S232 S233 S3 Fig. 2.1 (l) Program without block step (11)End of block step Use an end block step to terminate nested–block–step calling and to return to the calling sequence. 983
  • Page 10182. STEP SEQUENCE BASICS STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15 2.2 EXECUTION OF STEP SEQUENCE Editing Compile Executing (source program) (ROM format program) First level (Ladder diagram) END1 (SUB 1) function Second level (Ladder diagram) CALL CALL END2 (SUB 2) function Third level (Ladder diagram) END3
  • Page 1019B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 2. STEP SEQUENCE BASICS In the step sequence method, a program is created (edited) in units of subprograms. The edited source program is compiled andconverted to an executable ROM–format program, thenlinked, as shown in Fig. 2.2 (a). A ROM–format program is a kind
  • Page 10202. STEP SEQUENCE BASICS STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15 In divided execution, the second level ladder is executed at an interval that is a multiple of 8 ms (e. g., 8, 16, 24 ms). Input signals referenced in the second level ladder, such as addresses X and F, are refreshed in synchronization with
  • Page 1021B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 2. STEP SEQUENCE BASICS In the step sequence program shown in Fig. 2.2 (c), when step S1 is activated, subprograms are executed according to the timing illustrated in Fig. 2.2 (d). 8msec T msec First level LEVEL1 Second level LEVEL2 Subprogram P2 P1 Step P3 P4 Tran
  • Page 10223. CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION OF STEP–SEQUENCE PROGRAMS STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15 3 CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION OF STEP–SEQUENCE PROGRAMS 988
  • Page 10233. CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION OF STEP–SEQUENCE B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION PROGRAMS 3.1 A step is a unit of processing in a program. STEP [Display] Sn (Pm) [Contents] D Define a step number (Sn), necessary for controlling execution, and subprogram number (Pm) specifying actua processing, for
  • Page 10243. CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION OF STEP–SEQUENCE PROGRAMS STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15 [Example] After the M7 code is decoded, control is transferred to the next step using a DEC functional instruction. S1 (P1) Subprogram P1 MF R0.0 DEC F0 f F7.0 711 P101 Subprogram P101 R0.0 TRSET 990
  • Page 10253. CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION OF STEP–SEQUENCE B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION PROGRAMS 3.2 An initial step is automatically activated when execution of the program starts. Once it has been activated, it operates in the same way as a normal INITIAL STEP step. The program can be returned to this
  • Page 10263. CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION OF STEP–SEQUENCE PROGRAMS STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15 Example2 L1 When a program is executed, steps S3 and S1 S4, specified by an initial step, are activated first. P101 Once steps S3 and S4 have been [ ] S3 executed, initial steps S3 and S4 are S2 executed in t
  • Page 10273. CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION OF STEP–SEQUENCE B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION PROGRAMS 3.4 A selective sequence branches to two or more sequences. When the transition evaluates true, the corresponding step is activated. DIVERGENCE OF SELECTIVE [Display] SEQUENCE [Contents] D Transitions are pla
  • Page 10283. CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION OF STEP–SEQUENCE PROGRAMS STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15 3.6 A simultaneous sequence branches to two or more sequences, and all steps are activated simultaneously. DIVERGENCE OF SIMULTANEOUS [Display] SEQUENCE [Contents] D A transition must be placed before a diver
  • Page 10293. CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION OF STEP–SEQUENCE B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION PROGRAMS 3.7 It combines two or more divergent paths to the main sequence. CONVERGENCE OF [Display] SIMULTANEOUS SEQUENCE [Contents] D A convergence of simultaneous sequence is processed as follows. S10 S20 When the t
  • Page 10303. CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION OF STEP–SEQUENCE PROGRAMS STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15 3.8 A jump controls the execution of steps non–sequentially, together with a transition. JUMP [Display] Ln [Contents] D Specify a jump destination label (Ln). D The step to which control is transferred (jumpe
  • Page 10313. CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION OF STEP–SEQUENCE B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION PROGRAMS 3.10 A block step specifies the step sequence subprogram to be executed. BLOCK STEP [Display] ] Sn (Pm) [Contents] Define a step number (Sn), which controls the execution of a bloc step, and a sub–program (Pm
  • Page 10323. CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION OF STEP–SEQUENCE PROGRAMS STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15 3.11 This is an initial step on the block step. INITIAL BLOCK STEP [Display] [ ] Sn (Pm) [Contents] D Define a step number (Sn), necessary for controlling execution, and subprogram number (Pm)specifying the a
  • Page 10334. EXTENDED LADDER B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION INSTRUCTIONS 4 EXTENDED LADDER INSTRUCTIONS To enable the specification of steps and transitions, the components of a step sequence program, by means of the ladder method, the following signals and functional instructions are provided. These sign
  • Page 10344. EXTENDED LADDER INSTRUCTIONS STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15 4.1 [Function] FUNCTIONAL D This instruction describes that the conditions for a transition have been true. INSTRUCTION TRSET D This instruction is used in a subprogram which is called from a transition. [Format] ACT TRSET (SUB122) 1
  • Page 10354. EXTENDED LADDER B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION INSTRUCTIONS 4.2 [Contens] PMC ADDRESS D The meaning of each bit of the step number (S address) is shown in (S ADDRESS) the following. .0 0 : Transition to halt state, or halt state 1 : Execution state .4 0 : Transition to halt state, or halt sta
  • Page 10364. EXTENDED LADDER INSTRUCTIONS STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15 [Example 2] The section between JMP and JMPE in the following example is execute only once after the specific step (The following example is in the case of S100.) transits in the activated state from the inactivated state. 1002
  • Page 10375. SPECIFICATION OF STEP B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION SEQUENCE 5 SPECIFICATION OF STEP SEQUENCE 1003
  • Page 10385. SPECIFICATION OF STEP SEQUENCE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15 5.1 SPECIFICATION Contents/Kind of PMC PMC–RB4/RB6/RC4/NB2 Number of subprogram Up to 2000 (P1 to P2000) Number of step Up to 1000 (S1 to S1000) Number of label Up to 9999 (L1 to L9999) Number of jump in block Up to 256 Nesting dep
  • Page 10395. SPECIFICATION OF STEP B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION SEQUENCE 5.2 D One transition must exist between step and step. GENERAL RULES S1 S1 (P10) (P10) sub prog Correct CALL P10 P1 or S1 CALL P11 S2 S2 (P11) (P11) The step S1 calls to subprogram P10, P11. D The transition shall never be repeated
  • Page 10405. SPECIFICATION OF STEP SEQUENCE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15 D When a simultaneous sequence is specified in another simultaneous sequence, one convergence must not be used for each sequence. S1 S2 S1 S2 P2 P2 S3 S4 S3 S4 Correct P1 P3 S5 S5 (dumy) P1 S6 D When a selective sequence is specifi
  • Page 10415. SPECIFICATION OF STEP B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION SEQUENCE D In case of branching again immediately after the convergence, a step/transition is required between the divergence and convergence. S1 S2 S1 S2 Correct P2 P10 P100 (dummy) S100 (dummy) S3 S10 P1 P10 S3 S10 S2 S10 S2 S10 Correct P
  • Page 10425. SPECIFICATION OF STEP SEQUENCE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15 D The divergence must be terminated with the same type of convergence. P2 P4 Correct P2 P4 S2 S3 S2 S3 P3 P5 P3 P5 P2 P2 Correct S2 S3 S2 S3 P3 P3 D The number of convergences must match that of divergences. P1 P2 P1 P2 S2 S3 L1 Co
  • Page 10435. SPECIFICATION OF STEP B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION SEQUENCE D It is not possible to jump to the other subprogram. Sub–program P1 Sub–program P2 S10 S100 P10 P100 L1 S101 S11 S20 P101 P11 P20 S102 S12 L1 D It is not possible to jump from a simultaneous sequence to another simultaneous sequen
  • Page 10445. SPECIFICATION OF STEP SEQUENCE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15 D It is not allowed to jump from inside of the simultaneous sequence to outside. L1 S1 P1 S2 S10 S20 P2 P10 P20 S3 S11 L1 1010
  • Page 10455. SPECIFICATION OF STEP B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION SEQUENCE 5.3 The use of the following functional instructions is restricted in steps and transitions. EXCLUSIVE CONTROL FOR Group Description Functional instructions FUNCTIONAL A The instructions operate when a signal changes CTR (SUB5) INS
  • Page 10465. SPECIFICATION OF STEP SEQUENCE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15 Correct program Divide the subprogram so that ACT of CTR is called after it is set to off. S1 Subprogram P100 (P100) R0.0 CTR 1 ( ) P101 S2 (P102) X1.0 P103 S3 (P100) Subprogram P101 X1.0 P101 TRSET S4 (P102) Subprogram P102 R0.0 P
  • Page 10475. SPECIFICATION OF STEP B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION SEQUENCE Example) S1 Subprogram P100 (P100) R9091.1 R0.0 P1 WINDR R10 ( ) S2 (P101) Subprogram P1 R0.0 TRSET Subprogram P101 R9091.0 R0.0 WINDR R10 ( ) Correct program Correct the program so that ACT is set to on and off within one subprogr
  • Page 10486. SCREEN OPERATION (PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2) STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15 6 SCREEN OPERATION (PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2) The following operations are supported to enable the diagnosis and debugging of a step sequence program. (1) Displaying the sequence diagram (2) Displaying the run time of the step s
  • Page 10496. SCREEN OPERATION B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION (PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2) 6.1 The diagnosis and debugging of a step sequence program have four screens. DISPLAYING OF SEQUENCE (1) Program configuration list (main screen) PROGRAM (2) Step sequence screen (3) List screen (4) Ladder screen 6.1.1 Pres
  • Page 10506. SCREEN OPERATION (PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2) STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15 6.1.2 (1) Position the cursor to a program indicated by V], then press the [ZOOM] key. Step Sequence Screen STPSEQ <
    > PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM) MONIT RUN P0407 (MAIN ) STEP SEQUENCE NO.1 LEVEL1 LEVEL2 LEVEL
  • Page 10516. SCREEN OPERATION B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION (PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2) Meaning of display Display Contents Display by [ZOOM] key [V] Sxxx Initial step Ladder diagram V Sxxx Step Ladder diagram V] Sxxx Block step Step sequence diagram + Pxxx Transition Ladder diagram Selective sequence Cannot z
  • Page 10526. SCREEN OPERATION (PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2) STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15 [ZOOM] soft ke To display a program, position the cursor to the program number and press the [ZOOM] key. The step sequence screen (Fig. 6.1.2 (b)) or ladder screen (Fig. 6.1.3 (c)) is automatically displayed according to th
  • Page 10536. SCREEN OPERATION B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION (PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2) Example) When the cursor is positioned to “P2”, press the [ZOOM] key, subprogram P2 is displayed. (2) Ladder Screen The signals currently set to on are displayed in white (highlighted on a monochrome display). LADDER * STEP
  • Page 10546. SCREEN OPERATION (PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2) STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15 [W–SRCH] key Displays the ladder in which the specified address is used as a coil address. [N–SRCH] key Displays the ladder having the specified net number, at the top of the screen. [F–SRCH] key Displays the specified func
  • Page 10556. SCREEN OPERATION B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION (PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2) 6.2 The elapsed time of a step sequence program is displayed. TIMER SCREEN 6.2.1 Time Screen STPSEQ <> PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM) MONIT RUN STEP NO. STATUS ELAPSE MONITOR STEP NO. STATUS. S0001( ) EXEC 100
  • Page 10566. SCREEN OPERATION (PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2) STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15 6.2.2 When an activated state remains set for longer than the specified time, Monitoring Elapsed the state may be determined as being erroneous. The elapsed time can be specified for up to eight steps. Time When an activate
  • Page 10576. SCREEN OPERATION B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION (PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2) 6.3 Operation time limits can be specified for a step sequence program. Up to eight steps can be monitored. MONITOR TIME SCREEN STPSEQ<> PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM) MONIT RUN NO. STEP NO. ELAPSE MONITOR T(
  • Page 10586. SCREEN OPERATION (PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2) STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15 Deletion of monitor Position the cursor at the deletion and press [DELETE] key. NO. STEP NO. ELAPSE MONITOR T(1) S0001( ) 1000000 2000 T(2) S0010(MOVE ) 100 1000 Alteration of monitor Position the cursor at the alteration p
  • Page 10596. SCREEN OPERATION B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION (PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2) 6.4 The display and editing of a step sequence program per subprogram aresupported. EDITING FUNCTION A step sequence program is allowed to be displayed and a ladder diagram OF LADDER is allowed to be displayed and edited. D
  • Page 10606. SCREEN OPERATION (PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2) STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15 6.4.2 (1) Position the cursor to a program indicated by j], then press the [ZOOM] key. Step Sequence Screen LADDER <
    > PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM) MONIT STOP P0407 ( ) STEP SEQUENCE NO.1 LEVEL1 LEVEL2 LEVEL3 V
  • Page 10616. SCREEN OPERATION B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION (PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2) Meaning of display Display Contents Display by [ZOOM] key [V] Sxxx Initial step Ladder diagram V Sxxx Step Ladder diagram V] Sxxx Block step Step sequence diagram + Pxxx Transition Ladder diagram Selective sequence Cannot z
  • Page 10626. SCREEN OPERATION (PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2) STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15 [MAIN] key Press the [MAIN] key to return to the program configuration list. [CHANGE] key Press the [CHANGE] key to return to the step sequence diagram. [P–ADRS/P–SYMB] key Displays the addresses specified to subprograms, u
  • Page 10636. SCREEN OPERATION B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION (PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2) (2) Ladder Screen LADDER NET 0031–0033 MONIT STOP R9091.1 MOVN 20 D10 R10 FIN FIN / WINDR R10 ( ) FIN MOVN 20 R10 SUB 45 D10 END1 SUB 1 Fig. 6.4.3 (c) Ladder screen Please refer to the following section about the operations
  • Page 10646. SCREEN OPERATION (PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2) STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15 6.5 The following ladder diagnosis and debugging functions can be used together with the step sequence functions. CORRESPONDING FUNCTION Ę : can be used ∆ : can be used on condition : cannot be used Functions PMC–SB4/ PMC–S
  • Page 10656. SCREEN OPERATION B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION (PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2) 6.6 The PMC–SB4, SB6, SC4 and NB2 can be used with either the ladder method or step sequence method. When a step sequence program is COMPATIBILITY OF transferred to the old version of the PMC, ER08 OBJECT UNMATCH LADDER DIA
  • Page 10666. SCREEN OPERATION (PMC–SB4/SB6/SC4/NB2) STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15 PMC SYSTEM PARAMETER (1/2) MONIT STOP COUNTER DATA TYPE = BINARY / BCD LADDER EXEC = % (1–150) LANGUAGE EXEC RATIO = % (0–99) LANGUAGE ORIGIN = H (LANGUAGE AREA = H, SIZE = KB) STEP SEQUENCE = YES / NO > [BINARY] [ BCD ] [
  • Page 1067B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 7. OPERATION (PMC–SB7) 7 OPERATION (PMC–SB7) The following operations are supported to enable the diagnosis and debugging of a step sequence program. (1) Displaying step sequence diagram and editing ladder diagram. (2) Displaying the run status of the step sequence
  • Page 10687. OPERATION (PMC–SB7) STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15 7.1 Pressing soft key [PMCLAD] displays the sequence program dynamically. On the screen, you can monitor the sequence program DISPLAYING OF works. Sequence program monitor function consists of following screens. SEQUENCE a) Program List Viewe
  • Page 1069B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 7. OPERATION (PMC–SB7) NOTE 1 When [PMCLAD] soft key is pressed, the screen which was displayed last time among Ladder Diagram Monitor screen, Collective Monitor screen, Step Sequence Monitor screen, and Program List Viewer screen is displayed. When [PMCLAD] soft k
  • Page 10707. OPERATION (PMC–SB7) STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15 7.1.2 When Step Sequence Monitor screen is displayed for the first time after Program List Viewer the power–ON, the subprogram of step sequence is select on the Program List Viewer screen. Screen Fig. 7.1.2 Program List Viewer screen (Step Se
  • Page 1071B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 7. OPERATION (PMC–SB7) 7.1.3 When a cursor is put on step sequence in the Program List Viewer screen, Step Sequence Monitor Subprogram List Viewer screen, or Step Sequence Monitor screen, and [ZOOM]key is pushed, Step Sequence Monitor screen is displayed. Screen 7.
  • Page 10727. OPERATION (PMC–SB7) STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15 7.1.3.2 Operations 1 hierarchy up Subprogram list view screen Displays subprogram Step sequence state screen Search subprogram Screen settings Fig. 7.1.3.2 Soft keys of Step Sequence Monitor screen (a) Operation with Soft–keys 1 [ZOOM] Displa
  • Page 1073B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 7. OPERATION (PMC–SB7) 6 [SETING] The screen display is switched into the Step Sequence Monitor Setting screen. 7 [<] The screen display is switched into the PMC Main menu. (b) Other operations 1 Cursor move keys, Page change keys You can move cursor by all cursor
  • Page 10747. OPERATION (PMC–SB7) STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15 D STEP NOTATION Determines whether the subprograms of step in the Step Sequence Monitor screen are displayed as S–address, or the P–address. Only various steps are available in this setting. S–ADDRESS (default) When the setting of the ”ADDRES
  • Page 1075B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 7. OPERATION (PMC–SB7) 7.1.4 When [SPLIST]key is pushed on Step Sequence Monitor screen, the list Subprogram List of the current subprogram being used with step sequence is displayed. Viewer Screen 7.1.4.1 Subprogram List Viewer screen (Detail) shows the detail inf
  • Page 10767. OPERATION (PMC–SB7) STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15 5. The program size is displayed in the ”SIZE (BYTE)” field for each program. If the program size is not over 1024 byte, the unit is shown in byte. If it is over 1024 byte, the unit is shown in kilo (1024) byte with ”K”. Ex.) The case that pr
  • Page 1077B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 7. OPERATION (PMC–SB7) 4. In additional information line near the bottom of the screen, the following information is displayed for the program under the cursor. D program name (6 characters) D symbol (16 characters), comment (30 characters) D program size (6 charac
  • Page 10787. OPERATION (PMC–SB7) STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15 3 [STEP] The screen display is switched into the Step Sequence Monitor screen. 4 [STATE] The screen display is switched into the Step Sequence State screen. 5 [SEARCH] Search for program Searches the program. If you entered program name or sy
  • Page 1079B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 7. OPERATION (PMC–SB7) 7.2 These screens display the run status of each step of step sequence. DISPLAYING RUN D STEP SEQUENCE STATE SCREEN (WHOLE) D STEP SEQUENCE STATE SCREEN (SUB PROGRAM) STATUS D TIME MONITOR SETTING SCREEN The screen structures shown in the fol
  • Page 10807. OPERATION (PMC–SB7) STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15 2. STATUS When it is displayed with ”EXEC”, it means active. When it isn’t displayed, it means inactive. 3. ELAPSE The time when it is active state is displayed. The time is increasing during active state. 4. MONITOR It means that time monito
  • Page 1081B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 7. OPERATION (PMC–SB7) (b) Other operations Cursor move keys, Page change keys You can move cursor by all cursor move keys and Page change keys. And if you entered step number or symbol and press Right cursor move key, the program according to the proceeding string
  • Page 10827. OPERATION (PMC–SB7) STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15 7.2.2.1 Operations 1 hierarchy up Step Sequence Monitor screen Reset of time monitor error Subprogram List Viewer screen Search step Time Monitor Setting screen Fig. 7.2.2.1 Soft keys of Step Sequence State Screen (Subprogram) (a) Operation w
  • Page 1083B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 7. OPERATION (PMC–SB7) 7.3 TIME MONITOR 7.3.1 When an activated state remains set for longer than the specified time, the Time Monitor Function state may be determined as being error. The elapsed time can be specified for up to eight steps. The following occurs whe
  • Page 10847. OPERATION (PMC–SB7) STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15 7.3.2 This screen is displayed by pushing [MONIT] key on the Step Sequence Time Monitor Setting State Screen. The time monitor function can be set on this screen. Move the cursor with the cursor key, input a step number or monitor time, and S
  • Page 1085B–61863E/15 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 7. OPERATION (PMC–SB7) (c) Definition of monitor (1) Position the cursor at the input position and input a step number (or symbol). Keyin ”S12” and push [INPUT] key. (2) Position the cursor at the input position and define a monitor time. Keyin ”100” and push [INPU
  • Page 10867. OPERATION (PMC–SB7) STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B–61863E/15 (d) Definition of monitor Position the cursor at the deletion and press [DELETE] key. The settings of that number are deleted regardless of the cursor position(”STEP NO.” or ”MONITOR”). (e) Alteration of monitor Position the cursor at the alt
  • Page 1087VII. PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series)
  • Page 1088
  • Page 1089B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 1. GENERAL 1 GENERAL The FANUC LADDER system can easily prepare sequence programs, symbol data, titles, and message of PMC–SB and PMC–SC, and also easily define addresses of the modules to be installed in an I/O unit by using SYSTEM P series. Major functi
  • Page 10902. FUNCTIONS OF PROCESSING PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15 2 FUNCTIONS OF PROCESSING (1) Input of sequence programs Input sequence programs using the following units when sequence programs are loaded into the memory of the SYSTEM P series. a) SYSTEM P series keyboard b) PPR tape reader
  • Page 10912. FUNCTIONS OF B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) PROCESSING (6) Hard copy a) Since FANUC PPR is connectable to SYSTEM P series, the paper tape output and list output (mnemonic symbol) are obtainable. b) A ladder diagram can be printed out. (7) Program error display Sequence program error
  • Page 10923. COMPONENT UNITS AND CONNECTIONS PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15 3 COMPONENT UNITS AND CONNECTIONS 1058
  • Page 10933. COMPONENT UNITS AND B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) CONNECTIONS 3.1 (1) SYSTEM P series COMPONENT UNITS This system serves as a programmer to generate and edit sequence programs. (2) Series 16 This system transfers a generated sequence program to CNC. (3) FANUC PPR This PPR inputs/ou
  • Page 10943. COMPONENT UNITS AND CONNECTIONS PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15 3.2 For details of the connections of SYSTEM P series unit power supply, PPR, and other units as well as their operation, refer to the following CONNECTIONS OF operator’s manuals. UNITS SYSTEM P–G Mark II: B–66014E SYSTE
  • Page 10953. COMPONENT UNITS AND B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) CONNECTIONS Fig. 3.2 (b) External view of SYSTEM P Mate Since a volatile RAM is employed as the SYSTEM P series memory, all programs (FANUC LADDER system programs and sequence program) being loaded into memory are operation should b
  • Page 10963. COMPONENT UNITS AND CONNECTIONS PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15 FANUC ROM WRITER (FANUC PMC WRITER) Adaptor for ROM modules (FANUC FA WRITER) Rear panel of the SYSTEM P EPROM for Mark II Adaptor for the PMC 1M–bit EPROMs CN2 CN1 EPROM for the PMC CN4 CN3 Adaptor for 40–pin ROMs FANUC
  • Page 10973. COMPONENT UNITS AND B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) CONNECTIONS 3.3 Figs. 3.3(a) – (b) show the panel of the SYSTEM P series keyboard. KEYBOARD OF It is not necessary to memorize the meanings of keys on the keyboard. SYSTEM P SERIES Descriptions of these keys and menus are displayed
  • Page 10983. COMPONENT UNITS AND CONNECTIONS PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15 3.3.1 This key is used to load the FANUC LADDER system program into the LOAD Key (System SYSTEM P series memory through a floppy disk at the first time after turning on power. Program Loading Key) 3.3.2 F key is used to
  • Page 10993. COMPONENT UNITS AND B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) CONNECTIONS 3.3.3 Four R keys to are provided. The meaning of these keys differ R Keys (R0 to R3) according to the screen conditions at their operating time, even in case of the same key. (1) R key menu screen This screen
  • Page 11003. COMPONENT UNITS AND CONNECTIONS PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15 3.3.4 Data keys are used to enter data. To switch the output of such keys Data Keys and Screen between the upper character and lower–character, use the [SHIFT] key or [LOCK] key. Pressing the [SHIFT] key together with an
  • Page 11013. COMPONENT UNITS AND B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) CONNECTIONS 3.4 (1) SYSTEM P series Mate SETTING OF I/O An initial I/O device setting of ’FANUC LADDER’ for SYSTEM P series Mate is as follows. DEVICE Table 3.4(a) FANUC LADDER (Mate) of table Channel I/O device F key CN1 PMC–RAM F8
  • Page 11023. COMPONENT UNITS AND CONNECTIONS PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15 For this reason, when the PMC–SA1, –SA2 or –SB is used, both the FA Writer and PMC Writer can be used. When the PMC–SC is used, only the FA Writer is available. When the PMC–SA1, –SA2 or –SB is used, the ROM writer used
  • Page 1103B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION 4 OPERATION 1069
  • Page 11044. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15 4.1 Various operations of FANUC ladder are done onthe specified screen. GENERAL Fig. 4.1 shows the relation between various operations and corresponding screens. Power on SYSTEM P series power on SYSTEM P Visual identification characters FANU
  • Page 1105B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION START SYSTEM P power on Load system floppy Set necessary system parameters. Sequence program input, title, symbol, comment, message I/O module Editing Debug using PMC–RAM NO Is dedug completed? YES Write a sequence program into EPROM for PMC
  • Page 11064. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15 4.2 PREPARATION BEFORE OPERATION 4.2.1 The system floppy disk contains the system of FANUC LADDER for System Floppy PMC–SA1/SA2/SB/SB2/SC. 4.2.2 To apply the FANUC LADDER system for PMC–SA1/SA2/SB/SB2/SC Limitations with the to the SYSTEM P M
  • Page 1107B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION Drive No. 0 Drive No. 1 CRT Fig. 4.2.3 Loading direction of floppy 4.2.4 (1) Turn on the SYSTEM P series power supply. FANUC LADDER (2) Set the system floppy or prepared exclusive system floppy into the System Floppy floppy disk. Loading (3)
  • Page 11084. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15 4.2.5 A programmer menu screen (hereinafter called menu screen) is displayed Programmer Menu by pressing key from the R key menu screen. Key in a menu number to be executed Fig. 4.2.5 shows the menu screen. Screen The parameter setting s
  • Page 1109B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION 4.2.6 Set parameters before inputting a sequence program without fail. Set Parameter Setting and necessary parameters by changing from the menu screen to the parameter setting screen (Fig.4.2.6), provided that the parameter setting screen is
  • Page 11104. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15 4 Selecting YES in step 3 displays the following message: SET KEY/LED ADDRESS (KEY ADRS, LED ADRS.) ADDR= 5 Enter a Y–address to specify the KEY address and a Y–address to specify the LED address. For example, enter X0,Y0 and press the k
  • Page 1111B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION f) IGNORE DIVIDE CODE (only for PMC–SB/SC) It is possible to select whether to execute a ladder program by dividing it into smaller units or without dividing it. This parameter can be specified as follows for PMC–SB and PMC–SC: 1 Enter 09 and
  • Page 11124. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15 4.3 PROGRAM EDITING 4.3.1 Display the EDIT screen by keying in ”1 ” from the menu screen. Data Display and Press by necessary times until a desired screen appears from the title to I/O module. The screen is switched in the sequence s
  • Page 1113B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION a) MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME Set the machine tool builder name (max. 32 characters). Key in “A1 @@@..........@@@ NL”. Machine tool builder name to be set Example) “A1 ***MACHINE(LTD) NL” b) MACHINE TOOL NAME Set the machine tool name (max. 32
  • Page 11144. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15 h) PROGRAM DESIGNED BY Set the sequence program designer name (max. 32 characters). Key in “A8 @@@..........@@@ NL”. Name to be set Example) “A8 MR.***&MISS *** NL” i) ROM WRITTEN BY Set the name of the programmer who wrote a program into ROM
  • Page 1115B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION d) Delete i) Delete every line Key in “D@@@ NL”. Line number to be deleted ii) Sequential delete Key in “D@@@@,@@@ NL”. Delete end line number Delete start line number e) Search i) Search by line number Key in “L@@@@ NL”. Line number to be se
  • Page 11164. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15 a) Input and alter from keyboard Set message data in the alter format for both entry and alter. All characters are settable so long as they can be keyed in from the SYSTEM P series keyboard. Key in message data every line in the following for
  • Page 1117B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION b) Delete Delete I/O module data every address by specifying it as follows: Key in “@@@@ NL”. Address of I/O module data to be deleted (input X0, Y0, ...) CAUTION 1 If the same slot number is specified when the group and base numbers are equa
  • Page 11184. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15 4.3.2 Input a sequence program from the keyboard. Programming from Set the EDIT screen (LADDER PROGRAM LIST screen). Keyboard Press menu number ”1 ” on the menu screen, or press key on the symbol or I/O module screen. Turn off all F
  • Page 1119B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION Table 4.3.2 Keyboard input format and screen display format Input format from keyboard Display format on screen (Simple symbol) (Full name) R X0. 1 RD X0. 1 RN X0. 2 RD. NOT X0. 2 RNS X0. 3 RD.NOT.STK X0. 3 W R0. 4 WRT R0. 4 WN R0. 5 WRT.NOT
  • Page 11204. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15 00021 WRT R0.1 3 W R0.1 00022 RD F1.1 4 R Y1.2 00023 WRT R1.1 5 W R1.2 6 AE (Sequential alter end command) ³ *AS MODE* display disappears from the lower right part of the screen. c) Wiring change function All of address us
  • Page 1121B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION 00001 SUB1 00001 SUB1 00002 RD X0.1 00002 RD X1.7 00003 WRT R1.3 00003 WRT R1.2 00004 RD R1.2 00004 RD R1.2 00005 WRT R1.3 00005 WRT R1.3 00006 RD X0.1 00006 RD X1.7 00007 WRT R1.4 00007 WRT R1.4 00008 RD R1.3 00008 RD R1.2 00009 SUB 8 00009
  • Page 11224. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15 Then, it may be impossible to return a ladder program ii to a ladder program i by an operation 2. (Special use of wiring All address used in ladder program of specified line number of change function) subsequent, is changed a new address inde
  • Page 1123B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION 00020 RD Y200.0 2 R.S R200.1 00021 WRT R300.7 3 R.S R200.2 4 R 5 5 P 9 6 IE (Sequential insert end command) ³ *IS MODE* display disappears from the lower right part of the screen. 4.3.5 i) Delete every instruction Del
  • Page 11244. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15 iii) Search by instruction (Search by symbol) Key in “L@@@@@ R ACT NL”. Instruction to be searched (ACT: Symbol name) Line number with which the search is to be started CAUTION This search applies to such a case as the address of the instruct
  • Page 1125B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION 4.3.7 The ladder diagram can be displayed on the programmer function EDIT Display of Ladder screen. Diagram Set the screen to EDIT screen (LADDER PROGRAM LIST) a) Turn on F4 key. b) Depress key The ladder diagram is displayed on the scre
  • Page 11264. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15 Example) * LADDER DIAGRAM * 1 From ’EDIT=’ IN the left figure, key in as follows. ’ISO NL’ END1 ’R X1.0 NL’ ’W Y1.0 NL’ ’IE NL’ Y0.0 X0.0 2 Press R0 key to display the ’LADDER PROGRAM LIST’ screen. Two lines ’RDX1.0’ AND ’WRT Y1.0’ are added
  • Page 1127B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION 4.4 INPUT OF PROGRAM 4.4.1 Read source programs (parameters, titles, Source Program symbols, ladders, messages, and I/O modules) from an input unit designated by an F key on the menu screen, and load them into SYSTEM P series memory. (1) Pape
  • Page 11284. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15 (2) Input method from PPR reader 1 Turn on F1 key. 2 Key in menu number “2 ”. 3 The screen is switched, and the entry of a source program is started. 4 After the source program has been normally entered, the screen is automatically reset
  • Page 1129B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION 6 The following procedure is the same as in 4.4.1 2) 4. 7 A file name is inputtable up to maximum 17 characters. All characters on the SYSTEM P series keyboard are employable for this entry. The kinds of capitals are not limited. “@” (at mark
  • Page 11304. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15 SELECT THE TYPE OF ROM MODULE ACCORDING TO THE FOLLOWING NO. ROM MODULE 0:A 1:B, 2:C, 3:D NO.= By means of the above–described operations, the program transfer is started. The transfer screen is displayed on the SYSTEM P Series screen and the
  • Page 1131B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION 5 The screen is switched and the message shown below is displayed. SET EPROM OR ROM MODULE & KEY IN ‘OK’ OR ‘NO’ KEY IN= 6 Check the above message. For the PMC–SA1/SA2/SB, insert the EPROM for the PMC into the FA Writer or PMC Writer. For the
  • Page 11324. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15 4.5 OUTPUT OF PROGRAM 4.5.1 By selecting ’04 ’ (OUTPUT LADDER PROGRAM) from menu no.4, the following detail menu is displayed. Source Program SET I/O KEY & KEY IN ONE OF THE FOLLOWING NO.S WHICH YOU WANT. NO. ITEMS 01 OUTPUT ALL DATA. 02
  • Page 1133B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION Example) Key in ’L1, 100 NL’ Output end liner number (If this parameter is omitted, data are output to the last one.) Output start line number (5) OUTPUT MESSAGE DATA Message data are output to a device specified by an F key. Turn on an F key
  • Page 11344. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15 Example) Key in ’L1,100 ’ Output end line number (If this parameter is omitted, data are output to the last one.) Output start line number ITEMS * ALL ADDRESS ’ALL’ * HEAD CHARACTER ’G’ * ADDRESS ’G14.6’ * ADDRESS TO ADDRESS ’G14.6,R142.5
  • Page 1135B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION *** CROSS REFERENCE LIST *** PAGE=1 ADDRESS SYMBOL COMMENT DATA G0000.0 *IT 653 G0000.1 *CST 653 G0000.4 *ESP 22 568 901 912 1177 1189 1288 2800 G0000.5 *SP 45 2802 G0000.7 ERS 3435 3512 G0001.0 *AIT 656 NOTE 1 When the same address performs
  • Page 11364. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15 4.5.3 (1) Transfer of sequence program into PMC–SA1/SA2/SB/SC ROM Format Program A generated sequence program is transferred into PMC–SA1/SA2/SB/SC. Connect SYSTEM P series to CNC by using a Reader/Puncher interface cable for the connection m
  • Page 1137B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION (2) Output method to floppy 1 Turn on F7 key. (Also turn on F12 key when the C language program is included.) 2 Set the floppy to the disk. 3 Key in menu number “5 ”. 4 The screen is switched and the following message is displayed: SET FD
  • Page 11384. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15 *** TRANSFER ROM DATA TO PMC WRITER *** 01 MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME 02 MACHINE TOOL NAME 03 PMC & NC NAME 04 PMC PROGRAM NO 05 EDITION NO 06 PROGRAM DRAWING NO 07 DATE OF PROGRAMING 08 PROGRAM DESIGNED BY 09 ROM WRITTEN BY 10 REMARKS PMC CON
  • Page 1139B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION 4.6 COLLATION OF PROGRAM 4.6.1 Enter source programs from the designated input unit, and compare them. The operation method is the same as source program entry, except that ”6” Collation of Source shall be designated as the menu number. Progr
  • Page 11404. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15 4.7 Delete ladder programs, symbols, message, titles, and I/O module data being loaded into SYSTEM P series memory according to the following DELETION OF procedure. PROGRAMS 1 Put the screen to menu screen. 2 Key in menu No. “9 ”. 3 The s
  • Page 1141B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION 4.8 Key in alone at the menu screen to display the R key menu screen. Key in R3 at the R screen, and the display ’REQUEST=’ will appear at SPECIAL USES OF bottom left of the screen, making key inputs possible. Key in on THE R3 KEY t
  • Page 11424. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15 4.9 DIRECT EDITING BY LADDER DIAGRAM 4.9.1 Using the P–G Mate/Mark II software keys (in the case of P–G Mate, the Outline F keys), sequence program creation and editing can be performed directly by the ladder diagram. In the following explana
  • Page 1143B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION R0 : PROGRAMMER R1 : EDIT R2 : UNUSED R3 : REQUEST Press the key R keys menu screen FUNCTN or or COMAND [ COMAND ] [ COMAND ] INSNET DELNET INSERT ADRESS SEARCH COPY MOVE 1 2 3 4 5 1 [ DELNET ] EXEC CANCEL SEARCH C–DOWN C–UP 2 [ INSERT ]
  • Page 11444. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15 4.9.4 In order to input the sequence program, press the key from the R Sequence Program key menu. The soft key menu program is displayed, and in the case that the sequence program has not yet been input, only the left and right Input ver
  • Page 1145B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION 8 Press the soft key [ ] to input a horizontal line When inputting the horizontal bar key [ ], by keying in a numerical value and pressing this bar key, a horizontal line for the frequency will be drawn. However, this horizontal line will not
  • Page 11464. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15 NOTE 3 Case of exceeding the highest rank WRT in 1 NET B A C Section B is erased (2) Case of functional instruction program input To input a functional instruction, input the soft key [FUNCTN], and then input the functional instruction name o
  • Page 1147B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION 1 Input a control condition. Press soft key [ ], input the address and bit data, and then press the key. The cursor shifts rightward. 2 Input an instruction Press the soft key [FUNCTN], input SUB number 8, and then press the key. A
  • Page 11484. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15 When a vertical line influences the addition ÕÕÕ Case of adding ÕÕÕ Cursor 1 Move the cursor to the above position. 2 Press the soft key [ ] in order to erase the upper left vertical line. The upper left line, vertical to the cursor disappear
  • Page 1149B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION 4 Pressing the [INSNET] key with keying in numeric values will cause the line to be inserted the number of times specified by the numeric value input. 5 After setting the cursor to a position to which you want to add, press the soft key [ ].
  • Page 11504. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15 If the [INSELM] key is pressed with the cursor in the position on the left, the state shown in the diagram on the right will occur. ÕÕÕ a ÕÕÕ Cursor ÕÕÕ b ÕÕÕ If the character ”A” is keyed in and the [INSELM] key is pressed with the cursor in
  • Page 1151B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION 4.9.8 Search a sequence program by using the following soft keys. Searching a Sequence (1) Soft key [TOP] Program When this key is pressed, the start of the sequence program is desplayed on the screen and the cursor also sifts to the program
  • Page 11524. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15 If no corresponding relay coil is found as a result of the search, an error occurs. INSNET DELNET INSERT ADRESS SEARCH COPY MOVE TOP BOTTOM SRCH W–SRCH N–SRCH F–SRCH C–DOWN C–UP ÕÕÕ Y1.2 ÕÕÕ X2.0 R20.1 R6.4 R0.5 When you want to search the sa
  • Page 1153B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION D Key in the functional instruction name or functional instruction number starting with “S” and press the cursor key to start searching the functional instruction. Example) Key in “END1” or “S1” and press the cursor to search functional instr
  • Page 11544. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15 4.9.10 A sequence program with multiple NETS is moved in units of NETs. Moving a Sequence Specify the NET to be moved and specify the move position with the cursor. When moving, the number of moves can also be specified. Program 1 Moving Move
  • Page 1155B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION 4.9.11 (1) Symbol and comment data display Symbol Data Display Symbol data and comment are displayed together with a ladder diagram on the screen as follows. When symbol data and comment are defined in signal addresses in the program, the sig
  • Page 11564. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15 4.9.12 The main function of each soft key can be directly selected from the Compressed Input by [COMAND] key. [COMAND] Key After keying in the characters shown below, press the [COMAND] key. [ ] shows parts that can be omitted. Further, the ”
  • Page 1157B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION 4.10 INPUT/OUTPUT OF LADDER PROGRAM WITH P–G AND FLOPPY CASSETTE/FA CARD 4.10.1 The ladder program can be stored in or fetched out of a floppy cassette/FA General card by connecting P–G and floppy cassette adapter/FA card adapter by using thi
  • Page 11584. OPERATION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15 7 The screen changes, and reading the program from the floppy cassette/FA card starts. 8 When the program reading ends normally, the screen will automatically return to the programmer menu. If any error is detected during the program reading,
  • Page 1159B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 4. OPERATION 4.10.5 1 Turn on F13 key. Program Collation (Turn on F12 too, when C language program is included.) 2 Key in the menu No. ‘7 [NL]’. 3 The following operations are the same as those after 3 in ‘Program input’. CAUTION For the program which is
  • Page 11605. FILE EDITING FUNCTION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15 5 FILE EDITING FUNCTION 1126
  • Page 1161B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 5. FILE EDITING FUNCTION 5.1 This function edits floppy disk data in the unit of file. When key in only the menu screen of R key appears key in R3 key on the R key menu. GENERAL ’REQUEST=’ will be displayed on the left below part of the screen to sho
  • Page 11625. FILE EDITING FUNCTION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15 Set the floppy disk and key in as follows. OK INT. P , [/date] [drive] [@ file name] ADD NP NO KILL When reading, the following floppy set request message is displayed. Set FD, and key in ’OK’, KILL, or ’NO’. FD=OK <@name
  • Page 1163B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 5. FILE EDITING FUNCTION Parameter Function Notes INT When writing, write from the head of When omitted, it is regarded as the floppy ADD. If INT is specified to protection file, an error generaters. ADD When writing, add after exising fie P Prepare as pr
  • Page 11645. FILE EDITING FUNCTION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15 5.2 (1) General form of command CONFIGURATION OF Operation Space Operand COMMAND Command name or its _ List of one or more parameters delimited abbreviated form by delimiter symbol ’ , ’ (comma). (4 leading characters) A command n
  • Page 1165B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 5. FILE EDITING FUNCTION 5.3 This command displays the attributes of files in the floppy disk, such as file name, file size, etc. FDLIST COMMAND — FILE ATTRIBUTE a) Input format DISPLAY [D,] [P,] [S,] [F,] FDLIST [L,] @ file name [Drive No.] : file No. b)
  • Page 11665. FILE EDITING FUNCTION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15 5.4 This command designates a change of the file name, file creation date, and the designation of protection file. RENAME COMMAND — FILE ATTRIBUTE a) Input format CHANGE @ file name P RENAME [drive No.] [,/date] [@ new file name]
  • Page 1167B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 5. FILE EDITING FUNCTION 5.5 This command deletes files of floppy disk. SCRATCH COMMAND a) Input format — DELETION OF @ file name SCRATCH [drive No.] FILES : file No. b) Function This command deletes the designated file. Even if the file name is displayed
  • Page 11685. FILE EDITING FUNCTION PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) B–61863E/15 5.7 This command copies files to another floppy disk by using two floppy disk units. REMOVE COMMAND a) Input format — FILE COPY M input drive @ file name INT , P , [/date] , @ new file REMOVE A, No. file No. ADD NP name Input desi
  • Page 1169B–61863E/15 PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series) 5. FILE EDITING FUNCTION Output designation : File name is ”NEW”, drive No.1 floppy disk with protection ii) The system asks every file to check if the file is to be copied or not. (M designation) (Ex. 2) REMOVE M,1 @ A In this example, the system as
  • Page 1170
  • Page 1171APPENDI
  • Page 1172
  • Page 1173A. ERROR CODES LIST B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (FOR FANUC LADDER P–G) A ERROR CODES LIST (FOR FANUC LADDER P–G) Error codes Details of errors 01 Sequence program area over 02 No. of divisions has exceeded 99. 03 High level program time over 05 An error block was detected. 07 No designated step number is f
  • Page 1174A. ERROR CODES LIST (FOR FANUC LADDER P–G) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 Error codes Details of errors 52 Input data error 53 Comment data are in error. 54 Symbol table over 55 Comment data area over 56 Designated symbol name is already employed. 57 Symbol table sequence is in error. 58 Designated symbol nam
  • Page 1175A. ERROR CODES LIST B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (FOR FANUC LADDER P–G) Error codes Details of errors 154 Write error (EPROM or ROM module is defective.) 155 Verifyerror (EPROM or ROM module is defective.) 156 Data output level error (EPROM or ROM module is defective.) 157 Timer test error is ROM writer (RO
  • Page 1176B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 B WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/ SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) 1142
  • Page 1177B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.1 This window function is a functional instruction by which the data on the CNC is read or is written. FUNCTION B.2 In the way to process, there are window function high speed a
  • Page 1178B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 B.3 LIST OF WINDOW FUNCTIONS Number Description Function code R/W 1 Read CNC system information 0 R 2 Read the tool offset 13 R 3 Write a tool offset :Low–speed response 14 W 4 Re
  • Page 1179B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) Number Description Function code R/W Entering data on the program check screen :low–speed response 37 150 W *PM *21T 38 Reading clock data (date and time) 151 R 39 Writing torque
  • Page 1180B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 Number Description Function code R/W Writing tool life management data (tool radius offset number 1) 70 230 W :low–speed response *TM 71 Writing tool life management data (tool in
  • Page 1181B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4 (1) In the explanation of the window functions, minuses (–) in the data structure fields indicate that input data need not be set in these fields FORMATS AND or that output da
  • Page 1182B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 B.4.1 [Description] Reading CNC System System information peculiar to the CNC can be read. Such system Information information includes the series name of the CNC (16 as series na
  • Page 1183B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 0 2 (Completion code) 0 (Always terminates normally.) 4 (Data length) 14 6 (Data number) — 8 (Data attribute) — Value 10 AS
  • Page 1184B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 B.4.2 [Description] Reading a Tool Offset A tool offset value recorded in the CNC can be read. Wear offset data, geometry offset data, cutter compensation data, and tool length of
  • Page 1185B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) [Completion codes] 0 : The tool offset has been read normally. 3 : The offset number specified for reading is invalid. (This completion code is returned when the specified offset
  • Page 1186B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 B.4.3 [Description] Writing a Tool Offset The tool offset value can be directly written into the CNC. (:Low–speed Wear offset data, geometry offset data, cutter compensation data,
  • Page 1187B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) Input data unit Increment Increment Input system system IS–B system IS–C Machining center mm, deg 0.001 0.0001 system system Power Mate–D, F inch system 0.0001 0.00001 Radius 0.00
  • Page 1188B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 B.4.4 [Description] Reading a Workpiece The workpiece origin offset recorded in the CNC can be read. Origin Offset Value A workpiece origin offset is provided for each controlled
  • Page 1189B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) [Completion codes] 0 : The workpiece origin offset has been read normally. 3 : The specified data number is invalid because the number is not from 0 to 6. 4 : The specified data a
  • Page 1190B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 B.4.5 [Description] Writing a Workpiece Data can be written directly as a workpiece origin offset value in the CNC. Origin Offset Value A workpiece origin offset is provided for e
  • Page 1191B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) [Completion codes] 0 : The workpiece origin offset has been written normally. 2 : The specified data length is invalid. 3 : The data number is invalid because the specified number
  • Page 1192B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 B.4.6 [Description] Reading a Parameter Parameter data in the CNC can be read. (:Low–speed There are four types of parameters in the CNC: Bit parameters having a Response) definit
  • Page 1193B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) [Completion codes] 0 : Parameter data has been read normally. 3 : The parameter number specified for reading is invalid. 4 : The specified data attribute is invalid because it is
  • Page 1194B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 B.4.7 [Description] Writing a Parameter Data can be written in a parameter in the CNC. (:Low–speed There are four types of parameters in the CNC: Bit parameters having a Response)
  • Page 1195B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) [Completion codes] 0 : Parameter data has been written normally. 2 : The data byte length of the parameter specified for writing is invalid. 3 : The parameter number specified for
  • Page 1196B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 B.4.8 [Description] Reading Setting Data The CNC setting data can be read. (:Low–speed There are four types of setting data in the CNC: Bit setting data having Response) a definit
  • Page 1197B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) [Completion codes] 0 : Setting data has been read normally. 3 : The setting number specified for reading is invalid. 4 : The specified data attribute is invalid because it is neit
  • Page 1198B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 B.4.9 [Description] Writing Setting Data Data can be written as setting data in the CNC. (:Low–speed For details of setting data, refer to the Operator’s manual of the CNC. Respon
  • Page 1199B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) [Completion codes] 0 : Setting data has been written normally. 2 : The byte length of the setting data specified for writing is invalid. 3 : The setting data number specified for
  • Page 1200B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 B.4.10 [Description] Reading a Custom A custom macro variable in the CNC can be read. Macro Variable Custom macro variables may or may not be read depending on the variable type.
  • Page 1201B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) [Input data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 21 2 (Completion code) — (Need not be set) 4 (Data length) — (Need not be set) 6 (Data number) N (N = Custom macro variable
  • Page 1202B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 21 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of the completion codes.) 4 (Data length) L = 6: Custom macro B L The mantiss
  • Page 1203B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.11 [Description] Writing a Custom Data can be written in a custom macro variable in the CNC. Macro Variable For details of common variables, refer to the Operator’s manual of
  • Page 1204B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : The custom macro variable has been written normally. 2 : The specified data length is invalid because it is not 6. 3 : A custom macro variable number that c
  • Page 1205B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.12 Reading the CNC Alarm Status B.4.12.1 [Description] Except Power Mate When the CNC is in the alarm status, the alarm status data can be read. The following alarm status dat
  • Page 1206B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 (2) Second byte of alarm status data 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 APAL SPA (Not used) (Not used) (Not used) (Not used) (Not used) (Not used) APAL: APC alarm SPA : Spindle alarm [Input data str
  • Page 1207B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.12.2 (1) Overview For Power Mate–D/F/H PMC application programs can read CNC alarm information. (Low–speed type) (2) Alarm information 1) Alarm status Information concerning t
  • Page 1208B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 Bit 3 : A P/S alarm (PS) other than those described above has been issued. (Up to 255) Bit 4 : Stroke limit alarm (OTS) Bit 5 : Overheat alarm (OH) Bit 6 : Servo alarm (SV) Bit 7
  • Page 1209B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) (5) Completion code 0 : CNC alarm status has been read normally. [Completion codes] 0 : This alarm status in the CNC has been read normally. [Output data structure] Top address +
  • Page 1210B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 B.4.13 [Description] Reading the Current The program number of a machining program being executed or selected Program Number on the CNC can be read. When a subprogram is executed
  • Page 1211B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 24 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation above.) 4 (Data length) 4 6 (Data number) — 8 (Data attribute) — Value 10 Cur
  • Page 1212B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 B.4.14 [Description] Reading the Current The sequence number of a machining program being executed on the Sequence Number CNC can be read. If sequence numbers are not assigned to
  • Page 1213B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) [Completion codes] 0 : The current sequence number has been read normally. [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 25 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of
  • Page 1214B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 B.4.15 [Description] Reading the Actual The actual velocity of a movement on CNC–controlled axes can be read. Velocity of Controlled Note that the read speed is the composite velo
  • Page 1215B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) [Completion codes] 0 : The actual velocity for the controlled axes has been read normally. [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 26 2 (Completion code) ? (See th
  • Page 1216B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 B.4.16 [Description] Reading the Absolute The absolute coordinates of the CNC–controlled axes for movement can Position (Absolute be read. The absolute coordinates indicate those
  • Page 1217B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 27 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of the completion codes.) 4 (Data length) L (L = 4*n, n is the number of axes
  • Page 1218B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 B.4.17 [Description] Reading the Machine The machine coordinates of CNC–controlled axes for movement can be Position (Machine read. The read value equals the machine coordinate in
  • Page 1219B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 28 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of the completion codes.) 4 (Data length) L (L = 4*n, n is the number of axes
  • Page 1220B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 B.4.18 [Description] Reading a Skip When a block of the skip operation (G31) is executed by the CNC and the Position (Stop Position skip signal goes on to stop the machine, the ab
  • Page 1221B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 29 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of the completion codes.) 4 (Data length) L (L = 4*n, n is the number of axes
  • Page 1222B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 B.4.19 [Description] Reading the Servo The servo delay, which is the difference between the specified coordinates Delay for Controlled of CNC–controlled axes and the actual servo
  • Page 1223B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) [Completion codes] 0 : The servo delay for the controlled axes have been read normally. 4 : The data specified as the data attribute is invalid because it is neither –1 nor a valu
  • Page 1224B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 B.4.20 [Description] Reading the The acceleration/deceleration delay, which is the difference between the Acceleration/ coordinates of controlled axes programmed in the CNC and th
  • Page 1225B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 31 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of the completion codes.) 4 (Data length) L (L = 4*n, n is the number of axes
  • Page 1226B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 B.4.21 [Description] Reading Modal Data Modal information can be read from the CNC. (1) Format and types of modal data for the G function Data corresponding to the specified ident
  • Page 1227B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) (2/2) Data type Data Data type Data Identification G code for machining Code in a G code for lathe (T, G) Code in a code center (M) group A series B series C series group :G40 0 G
  • Page 1228B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 (2) Format and types of modal data for other than the G function Data 4 bytes FLAG1 1 byte FLAG2 1 byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 – Number of input digits 0: Positive 1: Negative 0: A decim
  • Page 1229B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) CAUTION The Power Mate–D/F is not provided with the second auxiliary function. [Input data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 32 2 (Completion code) — (Need not be set) 4
  • Page 1230B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : Modal information has been read normally. 3 : Invalid data is specified as the data number. 4 : Invalid data is specified as the data attribute. [Output dat
  • Page 1231B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.22 [Description] Reading Diagnosis The information displayed on the diagnosis data screen in the CNC can Data (:Low–speed be read. Response) [Input data structure] Top address
  • Page 1232B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : Diagnosis data has been read from the CNC normally. 3 : The specified diagnosis data number is invalid. 4 : The data specified as the data attribute is inva
  • Page 1233B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.23 [Description] Reading A/D The digital value converted from the load current of the CNC–controlled Conversion Data axis can be read. The input data from the general–purpose
  • Page 1234B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 (b) Specifying a CNC–controlled axis (data attribute) Specify a CNC–controlled axis for which the voltage conversion data for the load current is to be read. Data must be specifie
  • Page 1235B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 34 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of the completion codes.) 4 (Data length) 2 6 (Data number) N (Input data) 8
  • Page 1236B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 Servo amplifier module Applicable motor model Nominal current limit Model Connected axis SVM1–12 12Ap SVM2–12/12 L and M axes SVM2–12/20 L axis α 0.5/3000 SVM2–12/40 L axis α 1/30
  • Page 1237B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.24 [Description] Reading Tool Life By specifying a tool No., the No. of the tool group to which the specified Management Data tool belongs can be read from tool life managemen
  • Page 1238B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : The tool group No. has been read normally. 4 : The value specified for the data attribute is invalid. 5 : The specified tool No. was not found. 6 : The tool
  • Page 1239B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.25 [Description] Reading Tool Life The number of tool groups in tool life management data can be read. Management Data The number of tool groups that can be registered varies
  • Page 1240B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : The number of tool group Nos. has been read normally. 6 : The tool life management option has not been added. [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Funct
  • Page 1241B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.26 [Description] Reading Tool Life By specifying a tool group No., the number of tools that belong to the tool Management Data group can be read from tool life management data
  • Page 1242B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 CAUTION If 0 is specified for the tool group No., the number of tools that belong to the tool group currently used is read. In this case, if a tool group No. has not been specifie
  • Page 1243B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.27 [Description] Reading Tool Life By specifying a tool group No., the life of tools belonging to the tool Management Data group can be read from tool life management data. (T
  • Page 1244B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : The tool life has been read normally. 3 : The specified tool group No. is invalid. 6 : The tool life management option has not been added. [Output data stru
  • Page 1245B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.28 [Description] Reading Tool Life By specifying a tool group No., the tool life counter for the specified tool Management Data group can be read from tool life management dat
  • Page 1246B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : The tool life has been read normally. 3 : The specified tool group No. is invalid. 6 : The tool life management option has not been added. [Output data stru
  • Page 1247B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.29 [Description] Reading Tool Life By specifying a tool group No. and a tool No., the tool length Management Data compensation No. for the specified tool can be read from tool
  • Page 1248B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : The tool length compensation No. has been read normally. 3 : The specified tool group No. is invalid. 4 : The specified tool No. is invalid. 5 : The specifi
  • Page 1249B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.30 [Description] Reading Tool Life By specifying a tool group No. and tool order No., the tool length Management Data compensation No. for the specified tool can be read from
  • Page 1250B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : The tool length compensation No. has been read normally. 3 : The specified tool group No. is invalid. 4 : The specified tool order is invalid. 5: The tool h
  • Page 1251B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.31 [Description] Reading Tool Life By specifying a tool group No. and a tool No., the cutter compensation Management Data No. for the specified tool can be read from tool life
  • Page 1252B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : The cutter compensation No. has been read normally. 3 : The specified tool group No. is invalid. 4 : The specified tool No. is invalid. 5 : The specified to
  • Page 1253B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.32 [Description] Reading Tool Life By specifying a tool group No. and a tool order No., the cutter compensation Management Data No. for the specified tool can be read from too
  • Page 1254B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : The cutter compensation No. has been read normally. 3 : The specified tool group No. is invalid. 4 : The specified tool order No. is invalid. 5: The tool ha
  • Page 1255B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.33 [Description] Reading Tool Life By specifying a tool group No. and a tool No., the information for the Management Data specified tool can be read from tool life management
  • Page 1256B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : The tool group No. has been read normally. 3 : The specified tool group No. is invalid. 4 : The specified tool No. is invalid. 5 : The specified tool No. wa
  • Page 1257B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.34 [Description] Reading Tool Life By specifying a tool group No. and a tool order No., the information for Management Data the specified tool can be read from tool life manag
  • Page 1258B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : The tool group No. has been read normally. 3 : The specified tool group No. is invalid. 4 : The specified tool order No. is invalid. 5: The tool having the
  • Page 1259B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.35 [Description] Reading Tool Life By specifying a tool group No. and a tool order No., the No. of the Management Data corresponding tool can be read from tool life management
  • Page 1260B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : The tool No. has been read normally. 3 : The specified tool group No. is invalid. 4 : The specified tool order No. is invalid. 6 : The tool life management
  • Page 1261B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.36 [Description] Reading the Actual The actual speed of the spindle can be read from the CNC. Spindle Speed [Input data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 50 2 (Comple
  • Page 1262B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : The actual speed of the spindle has been read normally. [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 50 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanatio
  • Page 1263B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.37 [Description] Entering Data on the On the program check screen of the CNC, data can be entered for the Program Check Screen spindle tool No. (HD.T) and the next tool No. (N
  • Page 1264B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : Data has been entered on the program check screen normally. 2 : The data length in bytes is invalid. 3 : The data No. is invalid. [Output data structure] To
  • Page 1265B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.38 [Description] Reading Clock Data The current date (year, month, day) and time (hours, minutes, seconds) (Date and Time) can be read from the clock built into the CNC. (not
  • Page 1266B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 151 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of the completion codes.) 4 (Data length) 6/12 6 (Data number) N (Input data
  • Page 1267B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.39 [Description] Entering Torque Limit Torque limit values for the digital servo motor can be entered. Data for the Digital Servo Motor (:Low–speed Response) [Input data struc
  • Page 1268B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : Torque limit data has been entered normally. 4 : The specified data attribute is invalid. That is, a value other than 1 to n (number of axes) was specified,
  • Page 1269B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.40 [Description] Reading Load Load information of the serial spindle can be read. Information of the The equation to normalize the load information is shown below Spindle Moto
  • Page 1270B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : Load information of the serial spindle has been read normally. [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 153 2 (Completion code) ? (See the ex
  • Page 1271B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) When three axes are specified 8 (Data attribute) — Value 10 First axis in the load information of the Unsigned binary, 2 bytes long serial spindle 12 Second axis in the load infor
  • Page 1272B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 B.4.41 [Description] Reading a Parameter Parameter data in the CNC can be read directly from the CNC via the (not available for FANUC bus. Power Mate–D/F, This function is basical
  • Page 1273B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.42 [Description] Reading Set Data Set data stored in the CNC can be read directly from the CNC via the (not available for FANUC bus. Power Mate–D/F, This function is basically
  • Page 1274B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 B.4.43 [Description] Reading Diagnosis Data displayed on the diagnosis data screen of the CNC can be read Data (not available for directly from the CNC via the FANUC bus. Power Ma
  • Page 1275B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.44 [Description] Reading a Character In a machining program being executed on the CNC, the block currently String of the CNC executed, the next block, and the next block but o
  • Page 1276B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : The character string of the CNC program being executed in the buffer has been read normally. 4 : The value specified for the data attribute is invalid. [Out
  • Page 1277B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.45 [Description] Reading the Relative The relative coordinates of the machine moving along an axis controlled Position on a by the CNC can be read. Controlled Axis [Input data
  • Page 1278B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 74 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of the completion codes.) 4 (Data length) L (L = 4*n. n is the number of spec
  • Page 1279B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.46 [Description] Reading the Remaining The remaining travel of the machine along an axis controlled by the CNC Travel can be read. The read value equals the remaining travel i
  • Page 1280B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 75 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of the completion codes.) 4 (Data length) L (L = 4*n. n is the number of spec
  • Page 1281B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.47 [Description] Reading CNC Status Status information (status indication on the screen) can be read from the Information CNC. The types of status information that can be read
  • Page 1282B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : CNC status information has been read normally. [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 76 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of the
  • Page 1283B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.48 [Description] Reading Value of the This function gets the value of variable for Macro–compiler (P–code P–code Macro Variable macro variable) of specified number. (:Low–spee
  • Page 1284B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : Success to read the value of P–code macro variable. 3 : The P–code macro variable specified by ’Data number’ is not able to be read. 5 : The value of the P–
  • Page 1285B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.49 [Description] Writing Value of the This function stores the value into the variable for Macro–compiler P–code Macro Variable (P–code macro variable) of specified number. (:
  • Page 1286B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : Success to store the value into P–code macro variable. 2 : The data length has illegal data (is not 6). 3 : The P–code macro variable specified by ’Data num
  • Page 1287B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.50 [Description] Reading the Tool Life This function gets the Tool life counter type of specified tool group in the Management Data Tool life management data. (M series only)
  • Page 1288B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : Success to read the Tool life counter type. 3 : The Tool group number is out of range from 0 to 512, or exceeds the maximum number of registered Tool group.
  • Page 1289B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.51 [Description] Registering the Tool This function registers the Tool group in Tool life management data, with Life Management Data Tool number, length of life and Tool life
  • Page 1290B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 163 +2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation above) +4 (Data length) 8 (Same as input data) +6 (Data number) — (Same as
  • Page 1291B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.52 [Description] Writing the Tool Life This function sets the length of Tool life of the specified Tool group in the Management Data Tool life management data. (Tool Life) (:L
  • Page 1292B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : Success to set the length of Tool life. 3 : The Tool group number is out of range from 1 to 512, or exceeds the maximum number of registered Tool group. 5 :
  • Page 1293B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.53 [Description] Writing the Tool Life This function sets the Tool life counter in the specified Tool group in the Management Data Tool life management data. (Tool Life Counte
  • Page 1294B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : Success to set the Tool life counter. 3 : The Tool group number is out of range from 1 to 512, or exceeds the maximum number of registered Tool group. 5 : T
  • Page 1295B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.54 [Description] Writing the Tool Life This function sets the Tool life counter type of specified Tool group in the Management Data Tool life management data. (M series only)
  • Page 1296B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : Success to set the Tool life counter type. 3 : The Tool group number is out of range from 1 to 512, or exceeds the maximum number of registered Tool group.
  • Page 1297B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.55 [Description] Writing the Tool Life This function sets the Tool length offset number of the specified Tool Management Data group in the Tool life management data. (M series
  • Page 1298B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : Success to set the Tool length offset number. 3 : The Tool group number is out of range from 1 to 512, or exceeds the maximum number of registered Tool grou
  • Page 1299B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.56 [Description] Writing the Tool Life This function sets the Tool length offset number of the Tool of the Management Data specified Tool operation sequence number in the Tool
  • Page 1300B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : Success to set the Tool length offset number. 3 : The Tool group number is out of range from 1 to 512, or exceeds the maximum number of registered Tool grou
  • Page 1301B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.57 [Description] Writing the Tool Life This function sets the Cutter compensation number of the specified Tool Management Data group in the Tool life management data. (M serie
  • Page 1302B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : Success to set the Cutter compensation number. 3 : The Tool group number is out of range from 1 to 512, or exceeds the maximum number of registered Tool gro
  • Page 1303B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.58 [Description] Writing the Tool Life This function sets the Cutter compensation number of the Tool of the Management Data specified Tool operation sequence number in the Too
  • Page 1304B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : Success to set the Cutter compensation number. 3 : The Tool group number is out of range from 1 to 512, or exceeds the maximum number of registered Tool gro
  • Page 1305B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.59 [Description] Writing the Tool Life This function sets the Tool condition of the specified Tool group in the Management Data Tool life management data.(M series only) (Tool
  • Page 1306B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : Success to set the Tool condition. 3 : The Tool group number is out of range from 1 to 512, or exceeds the maximum number of registered Tool group. 4 : The
  • Page 1307B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.60 [Description] Writing the Tool This function sets the Tool condition of the Tool of the specified Tool Management Data operation sequence number in the Tool life management
  • Page 1308B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : Success to set the Tool condition. 3 : The Tool group number is out of range from 1 to 512, or exceeds the maximum number of registered Tool group. 4 : The
  • Page 1309B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.61 [Description] Writing the Tool Life This function registers a tool to the specified Tool group in the Tool life Management Data management data. (Tool Number) (:Low–speed R
  • Page 1310B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : Success to register the Tool number. 3 : The Tool group number is out of range from 1 to 512, or exceeds the maximum number of registered Tool group. 4 : Th
  • Page 1311B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.62 Reading the Estimate Power FS20 FS18 FS16 Mate Disturbance Torque ∆ ∆ ∆ Data ∆ : The support is decided by CNC series : No support CAUTION The unexpected disturbance torque
  • Page 1312B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : The estimate disturbance torque data have been read normally. 4 : The data specified as the data attribute is invalid because it is neither –1 nor a value f
  • Page 1313B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) (2) spindle axis [Description] The load torques except a necessary torque for acceleration/ deceleration of the serial spindle axis are read. [Input data structure] Top address +
  • Page 1314B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : The estimate disturbance torque data have been read normally. 4 : The data specified as the data attribute is invalid because it is neither – 1 nor a value
  • Page 1315B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.63 [Description] Reading the Current This function reads CNC program numbers extended to 8 digits from the Program Number usual 4 digits. (8–digit Program Basically, this func
  • Page 1316B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Output data structure] Top address 0 (Function code) 90 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of the completion codes, above.) 4 (Data length) 8 6 (Data number) – 8 (Data at
  • Page 1317B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.64 [Description] Reading Tool Life This function reads the tool group number to which the tool number is Management Data currently registered. (Tool Group Number) [Input data
  • Page 1318B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : The tool group number was read successfully. 4 : The tool number in ’Data Attribute’ has a wrong value. 5 : The tool number is not registered. 6 : The tool
  • Page 1319B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.65 [Description] Reading Tool Life This function reads the tool length offset number according to the Management Data specified tool group number and tool number. (M series on
  • Page 1320B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : The tool length offset number was read successfully. 3 : The specified tool group number is incorrect. 4 : The specified tool number is incorrect. 5 : The s
  • Page 1321B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.66 [Description] Reading Tool Life This function reads the tool radius offset number according to the Management Data specified tool group number and tool number. (M series on
  • Page 1322B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : The tool radius offset number was read successfully. 3 : The specified tool group number is incorrect. 4 : The specified tool number is incorrect. 5 : The s
  • Page 1323B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.67 [Description] Reading Tool Life This function reads the tool information (status) according to the specified Management Data tool group number and tool number. (Tool Inform
  • Page 1324B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : The tool information was read successfully. 3 : The specified tool group number is incorrect. 4 : The specified tool number is incorrect. 5 : The specified
  • Page 1325B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.68 [Description] Writing (Registering) This function registers the tool group number to tool life management Tool Life Management data. Set the tool number, life value and lif
  • Page 1326B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : The tool group was registered successfully. 3 : The tool group number exceeded the range 1 to 512 or maximum number of registered groups. 4 : The tool numbe
  • Page 1327B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) NOTE 1 This cannot be used with those models that do not have the tool life management function. 2 Tool life management data is not applied to the T mode of the compound machining
  • Page 1328B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 B.4.69 [Description] Writing Tool Life This function sets the tool length offset number of a specified tool group Management Data in the tool life management data. (M series only)
  • Page 1329B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) [Completion codes] 0 : The tool length offset number was written successfully. 3 : The tool group number exceeded the range 1 to 512 or maximum number of registered groups. 4 : Th
  • Page 1330B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 B.4.70 [Description] Writing Tool Life This function sets the tool radius offset number of a tool belonging to a Management Data specified tool group in the tool life management d
  • Page 1331B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) [Completion codes] 0 : The tool radius offset number was written successfully. 3 : The tool group number exceeded the range 1 to 512 or maximum number of registered groups. 4 : Th
  • Page 1332B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 B.4.71 [Description] Writing Tool Life This function sets the tool information of a tool belonging to a specified Management Data tool group in the tool life management data. (M s
  • Page 1333B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) [Completion codes] 0 : The tool information was written successfully. 3 : The tool group number exceeded the range 1 to 512 or maximum number of registered groups. 4 : The specifi
  • Page 1334B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 NOTE 1 This cannot be used with those models that do not have the tool life management function. 2 Tool life management data is not applied to the T mode of the compound machining
  • Page 1335B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.72 (1) Actual spindle speed Reading Actual Spindle [Description] Speeds This function reads the actual speed of the No.1 to No.4 serial spindles. [Input data structure] Top ad
  • Page 1336B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Output data structure] Top address +0 (Function code) 138 +2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation above.) +4 (Data length) L (L=4 n) +6 (Data number) – +8 (Data attribute) M
  • Page 1337B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) (2) Position coder–less actual spindle speed [Description] This function reads the actual spindle speed (position coder–less actual spindle speed) obtained by calculating the spin
  • Page 1338B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Output data structure] Top address +0 (Function code) 138 +2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation above.) +4 (Data length) L (L=4 n) +6 (Data number) – +8 (Data attribute) M
  • Page 1339B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.73 [Description] Reading Fine Torque This function reads the statistical calculation results (average value, Sensing Data maximum value, distribution) in the fine torque sensi
  • Page 1340B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Output data structure] Top address +0 (Function code) 226 +2 (Completion code) ? (See the above explanation.) +4 (Data length) L (L=6 n) +6 (Data number) – +8 (Data attribute) M
  • Page 1341B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.74 (1) Store counter Reading Fine Torque [Description] Sensing Data This function reads the number of stored torque data items. (Store Data) [Input data structure] Top address
  • Page 1342B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Output data structure] Top address +0 (Function code) 232 +2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation above.) +4 (Data length) 4 +6 (Data number) 0 (Entered data) +8 (Data attrib
  • Page 1343B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) (2) Stored torque data (latest data) [Description] This function reads the latest stored data among stored torque data. [Input data structure] Top address +0 (Function code) 232 +
  • Page 1344B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Output data structure] Top address +0 (Function code) 232 +2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation above.) +4 (Data length) L (L=2 or 10) +6 (Data number) N (Entered data) +8
  • Page 1345B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) (3) Stored torque data (any data) [Description] This function reads the arbitrary data among stored torque data. [Input data structure] Top address +0 (Function code) 232 +2 (Comp
  • Page 1346B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 NOTE The valid range of data number n is calculated as follows: 0 v n v (524288 1 1 a b)–1 where, 1: Number of target axes 1 a= 2: Number of target axes 2 4: Number of target axes
  • Page 1347B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) [Output data structure] Top address +0 (Function code) 232 +2 (Completion code) ? (See the above explanation.) +4 (Data length) L (L=6 + number of data items I 2) +6 (Data number)
  • Page 1348B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 NOTE 1 When the number of actually stored data items is exceeded even though data number n is in the valid range, data is not output and processing ends successfully by number of
  • Page 1349B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.75 [Explanation of data] Specifying the Number Specify the number of the program to be input/output using the data of the Program for I/O input/output function with I/O Link.
  • Page 1350B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Output data structure] Top address +0 (Function code) 194 +2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of completion codes, above.) +4 (Data length) 2 (Data at input time) +6 (Dat
  • Page 1351B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.76 [Description] Preset of relative The preset data is set to the relative coordinate controlled by CNC. If 0 coordinate is set as preset data it becomes to origin. (:Low–spee
  • Page 1352B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 Case of writing data on all axes (controlled axes are 4). Top address +0 (Function code) 249 +2 (Completion code) – (Need not be set.) +4 (Data length) 16 +6 (Data number) 0 Value
  • Page 1353B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) [Output data structure] Top address +0 (Function code) 249 +2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation above) +4 (Data length) L (Same as input data) +6 (Data number) 0 (Same as i
  • Page 1354B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 B.4.77 [Description] Deleting the Tool life The function deletes the specified Tool group in the Tool life management Management Data data. In short, it makes the condition that T
  • Page 1355B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) [Completion codes] 0 : Success to delete the Tool group number. 3 : The Tool group number is out of range from 1 to 512,or exceeds the maximum number of registered Tool group. 6 :
  • Page 1356B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 B.4.78 Deleting the Tool life [Description] Management Data The function deletes the Tool data of the Tool of the specified Tool (Tool data) operation sequence number in the Tool
  • Page 1357B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) [Completion codes] 0 : Success to delete the Tool group number. 3 : The Tool group number is out of range from 1 to 512,or exceeds the maximum number of registered Tool group. 4 :
  • Page 1358B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 B.4.79 Deleting the Tool life [Description] Management Data The function clears the Tool life counter and all Tool condition of the (Tool life counter and specified Tool group in
  • Page 1359B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) [Completion codes] 0 : Success to clear the Tool life counter and the Tool condition. 3 : The Tool group number is out of range from 1 to 512, or exceeds the maximum number of reg
  • Page 1360B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 B.4.80 Writing the Tool life [Description] Management Data This function sets Arbitrary group number of the specified Tool group in (Arbitrary group the Tool life management data.
  • Page 1361B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) [Completion codes] 0 : Success to set the Arbitrary group number. 3 : The Tool group number is out of range from 1 to 512, or exceeds the maximum number of registered Tool group.
  • Page 1362B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 B.4.81 [Description] Writing the Tool life This function sets the length of Remaining Tool life of the specified Tool Management Data group in the Tool life management data. (Rema
  • Page 1363B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) [Completion codes] 0 : Success to set the length of Remaining tool life. 3 : The Tool group number is out of range from 1 to 512, or exceeds the maximum number of registered Tool
  • Page 1364B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 B.4.82 Reading the Current [Description] Screen Number The current screen number to display can be read. [Input data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 120 +2 (Completion
  • Page 1365B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) [Completion codes] 0 : Reading the current screen number has been read normally. 1 : This function can not be used because series and edition of CNC or PMC system software is not
  • Page 1366B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [The screen number of Power Mate i–D/H ] Table B.4.82 Large classification Small classification 00 POSITION 00 ABSOLUTE 01 RELATIVE 02 ALL 03 HANDLE INTERRUPT 04 OPERATING MONITOR
  • Page 1367B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.83 Reading Detailed [Description] Alarm Information If the CNC is in the alarm status, the details can be read. Detailed (:Low–speed type) information includes the following:
  • Page 1368B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : Reading the CNC alarm status has terminated normally. [Output data structure] Top address +0 (Function code) 186 +2 (Completion code) – (See the explanation
  • Page 1369B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) (2) Reading detailed alarm information [Input data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 186 +2 (Completion code) – (Need not to be set) +4 (Data length) – (Need not to be se
  • Page 1370B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : Reading the CNC alarm status has terminated normally. [Output data structure] Top address +0 (Function code) 186 +2 (Completion code) – (See the explanation
  • Page 1371B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.84 [Description] Reading the Servo Actual speed of servo motor of CNC–controlled axes can be read. Data of Control Axes [Input data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code)
  • Page 1372B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : The actual speed of servo motor has been read normally. 4 : Data specified as the data attribute is invalid because it is neither –1 nor a value from 1 to n
  • Page 1373B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.85 [Description] Exchange of Tool This function exchanges tool management data number in a pair of pots Management Data of specified magazine. Number in the When the magazine
  • Page 1374B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion codes] 0 : Normal end 5 : Specified magazine number / pot number is not registered. 6 : No required option. [Detail completion code] This code is 0 except completion c
  • Page 1375B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) NOTE 1 [Command of special magazine at multipath system] The tool management data and the magazine management table are common to all path. But the spindle position table and wait
  • Page 1376B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 B.4.86 [Description] Search of Empty Pot This function searches the nearest empty pot, which is expressed as tool (:Low–speed management data is 0, from specified pot in the magaz
  • Page 1377B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) [Completion codes] 0 : Normal end 3 : Error of magazine number/pot number 4 : Error of search direction 6 : No required option. 8 : No empty pot [Detail completion code] This code
  • Page 1378B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 B.4.87 [Description] New–register of a Tool This function registers new tool data according to specified magazine and Management Data pot number. The tool data was registered at t
  • Page 1379B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) X X Top address + 14 Tool type number (4byte) +18 Tool life counter (4byte) +22 Maximum of tool life (4byte) +26 Previous notice tool life (4byte) +30 State of Tool life (1byte) +
  • Page 1380B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 X X Top address + 54 (reserve) (20byte) X 0 X +74 Customizing data 1 (4byte) +78 Customizing data 2 (4byte) +82 Customizing data 3 (4byte) +86 Customizing data 4 (4byte) +90 Custo
  • Page 1381B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) [Detail completion code] This code is 0 except completion code is 5. Completion code = 5 1 : Error of tool type number 2 : Error of tool life counter 3 : Error of maximum of tool
  • Page 1382B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 331 +2 (Completion code) Refer to above description +4 (Data length) 76 or 140 +6 (Data number) Magazine number +8 (Data at
  • Page 1383B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) B.4.88 [Description] Writing a Tool This function writes a tool data according to specified magazine and pot Management Data number. If the pot has no tool (if tool management dat
  • Page 1384B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 X X Top address + 22 Maximum of tool life (4byte) +26 Previous notice tool life (4byte) +30 State of Tool life (1byte) +31 Customizing data 0 (1byte) +32 Tool information (2byte)
  • Page 1385B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) X X Top address + 78 Customizing data 2 (4byte) +82 Customizing data 3 (4byte) +86 Customizing data 4 (4byte) +90 Customizing data 5 (4byte) +94 Customizing data 6 (4byte) X X +15
  • Page 1386B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Detail completion code] This code is 0 except completion code is 3 or 5. Completion code = 3 21 : Error of magazine number 22 : Error of pot number 23 : Error of tool management
  • Page 1387B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 332 +2 (Completion code) Refer to above description +4 (Data length) 76 or 140 +6 (Data number) Magazine number +8 (Data at
  • Page 1388B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 B.4.89 [Description] Deletion of a Tool This function deletes a tool management data according to specified Management Data magazine and pot number. (:Low–speed If the pot has no
  • Page 1389B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) [Detail completion code] This code is 0 except completion code is 3. Completion code = 3 21 : Error of magazine number 22 : Error of pot number 23 : Error of tool management data
  • Page 1390B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 B.4.90 [Description] Reading a Tool This function reads a tool management data according to specified Management Data magazine and pot number. If the pot has no tool (if tool mana
  • Page 1391B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) [Detail completion code] This code is 0 except completion code is 3. Completion code = 3 21 : Error of magazine number 22 : Error of pot number [Output data structure] Top address
  • Page 1392B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 X X Top address + 31 Customizing data 0 (1byte) +32 Tool information (2byte) +34 Tool length compensation number H (2byte) Machining and +36 Lathe (Compound) system Cutter compens
  • Page 1393B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) X X Top address + 90 Customizing data 5 (4byte) +94 Customizing data 6 (4byte) X X 150 Customizing data 20 (4byte) 1359
  • Page 1394B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 B.4.91 [Description] Writing Each Tool Data This function writes specified data into tool management data. (:Low–speed The type of written data is input to the data attribute area
  • Page 1395B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) NOTE 1 Customizing data 5 – 20 can be read when the option ”Additional customized data on tool management function” exists. 2 See Note of B.4.85 for the command of special magazin
  • Page 1396B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Detail completion code] This code is 0 except completion code is 3 or 5. Completion code = 3 21 : Error of magazine number 22 : Error of pot number 23 : Error of tool management
  • Page 1397B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 335 +2 (Completion code) Refer to above structure +4 (Data length) 1, 2, 4 +6 (Data number) Magazine number +8 (Data attrib
  • Page 1398B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 B.4.92 [Description] Search of Tool This function searches the tool by customizing data. Management Data This function searches whether there is corresponding data to the (:Low–sp
  • Page 1399B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) [Detail completion code] This code is 0 except completion code is 3. Completion code = 3 1 : Too small customizing data number (under 0) 2 : Too large customizing data number (ove
  • Page 1400B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 B.4.93 [Description] Shift of Tool This function shifts the magazine management table. Management Data This function shifts tool management table for the fixed pot number type (:L
  • Page 1401B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ B–61863E/15 APPENDIX SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 367 +2 (Completion code) Refer to above description +4 (Data length) 0 +6 (Data number) Magazine number +8 (Data attribute)
  • Page 1402C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 C WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) 1368
  • Page 1403C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) C.1 This window function is a functional instruction by which the data on the CNC is read or is written. FUNCTION Option (FS15B : A02B–0162–J917, FS15i : A02B–0261–J950) of NC window is necessary. 1369
  • Page 1404C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 C.2 In the way to process, there are window function high speed and one processed at low speed. LOW–SPEED RESPONSE AND In case of a low–speed response, The data is read or written by the control between CNC and PMC. HIGH–SPEED Ther
  • Page 1405C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) C.2.1 Functional Instruction WINDR 0 CTL0 Function code 2 Completion code 4 Data length 6 CTL1 Data number 8 CTL2 Axis specification 10 DATA Data area * Data length Depends on the function X X part1 Type of Type of control data Dat
  • Page 1406C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 part2 Type of Type of control data Data Data type processing length CTL0 CTL1 CTL2 Tool life management data Tool group No. (low) 38 0 Tool No. 4 byte Number of tool groups (low) 39 Tool group No. 0 4 byte Number of tools (low) 40
  • Page 1407C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) C.2.2 Functional Instruction WINDW 0 CTL0 Function code 2 Completion code 4 Data length 6 CTL1 Data number 8 CTL2 Axis specification 10 DATA Data area * Data length Depends on the function Y Y part1 Type of Type of control data Dat
  • Page 1408C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 part2 Type of Type of control data Data Data type processing length CTL0 CTL1 CTL2 Tool life management data (Note) Tool group number (low) 202 0 Tool number (4 bytes) 6 bytes (supporting 8–digit tool numbers) Tool length compensat
  • Page 1409C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) C.3 (1) See the description of the window function. The data item marked with a dash (–) in the description of the data structure need not be FORMAT AND entered. DETAILS OF THE (2) The length of all data blocks and data items is re
  • Page 1410C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 (Note 1) Offset format M series (machining center system) T series (lathe system) Data type Format Offset number Data type Format Offset number (CTL+2, 3) (CTL+2, 3) Tool compensation A Tool compensation A Compensation 1 Offset num
  • Page 1411C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) C.3.2 [Description] Reading a Workpiece The offset from the workpiece origin of the current coordinate system Origin Offset Value (including a shared offset) of the CNC is read. The offset from the workpiece origin for each axis ca
  • Page 1412C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 C.3.3 Reading a Parameter (Setting Data) [Description] (Low–speed Response) A parameter of the CNC is read. Set data Read data 0 0 Function code Function code 17 17 2 2 Completion code Completion code — 4 4 Data length Data length
  • Page 1413C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) C.3.4 [Description] Reading a Custom A custom macro variable is read from the CNC. Macro Variable (Low–speed Response) NOTE The position of the decimal point must be specified beforehand. Set data Read data 0 0 Function code Functi
  • Page 1414C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 C.3.5 Reading the CNC Alarm Status [Description] (Low–speed Response) If the CNC is in the alarm state, the details of the alarm are read. Set data Read data 0 0 Function code Function code 23 23 2 2 Completion code Completion code
  • Page 1415C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) C.3.6 Reading the Current Program Number [Description] (Low–speed Response) The number of a running machining program is read from the CNC. Set data Read data 0 0 Function code Function code 24 24 2 2 Completion code Completion cod
  • Page 1416C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 C.3.7 [Description] Reading the Current The sequence number of the running machining program is read from the Sequence Number CNC. If the blocks of the running machining program have no sequence (Low–speed Response) numbers, the se
  • Page 1417C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) C.3.8 [Description] Reading the Actual The actual speed of the feed axes controlled by the CNC is read. Velocity of Controlled The composite speed of the controlled axes is read. If the X–, Y–, and Axes Z–axes, the basic three axes
  • Page 1418C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 Data specification Kind of data Data specification Current position 1) Indicates the current position in the workpiece coordinate system. The current position is calculated by the following simple expression. The read current posit
  • Page 1419C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) C.3.10 Reading the Machine Position (Machine [Description] Coordinates) of The machine position (machine coordinates) on a feed axis controlled by Controlled Axes the CNC is read. Set data Read data 0 0 Function code Function code
  • Page 1420C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 C.3.11 Reading a Skip Position (Stop Position of Skip Operation (G31)) of Controlled [Description] Axes (Low–speed Response) The absolute coordinates of the skip position specified in the CNC are read. Set data Read data 0 0 Functi
  • Page 1421C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) C.3.12 Reading the Servo [Description] Delay for Controlled A servo delay, which is the difference between the specified position on Axes a controlled axis and the actual servo position, is read from the CNC. Set data Read data 0 0
  • Page 1422C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 C.3.14 [Description] Reading Modal Data The continuous–state data is read from the CNC. (Low–speed Response) The continuous–state data can be broadly classified into two types: Data of the preparatory function and data of other fun
  • Page 1423C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) (2) Continuous–state data of a function other than the preparatory function The following eleven data items of an NC part program can be read: addresses D, E, H, L, M, N, O, S, T, and F, and second miscellaneous function. Set data
  • Page 1424C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 (3) Data specification Kind of data Data specification Modal data 1) Modal data of G function The relationship between the numbers specified in the CTL1 (kinds of data), modal data codes is shown below. Into CTL2 (the specified blo
  • Page 1425C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) Kind of data Data specification Modal data G code for lathe Specified number in G code for machining Code fetched in system CTL1 (kinds of data) center system DATA + 0 (G code system B) 11 G66 G66 1 G67 G66 0 G66.1 G66.1 2 12 G96 G
  • Page 1426C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 Kind of data Data specification Modal data Table — 1 of G code system for a lathe system G code system *1) Function A B C G00 G00 G00 Positioning G01 G01 G01 Linear interpolation G02 G02 G02 Circular interpolation CW G03 G03 G03 Ci
  • Page 1427C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) Kind of data Data specification Modal data Table — 2 of G code system for a lathe system G code system *1) Function A B C G72 G72 G74 Stock removal in facing G73 G73 G75 Pattern repeating G74 G74 G76 Peck drilling Z axis G75 G75 G7
  • Page 1428C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 C.3.15 Reading Diagnosis Data [Description] (Low–speed Response) The data on the diagnostic data screen of the CNC is read. Set data Read data 0 0 Function code Function code 33 33 2 2 Completion code Completion code — 4 4 Data len
  • Page 1429C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) C.3.16 [Description] Reading A/D 1. The load current for an axis controlled by the CNC is converted to Conversion Data for adigital value and the digital value is read. the Feed Motor 2. The analog data input to the CNC is converte
  • Page 1430C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 a) In the case of peak current [Ao–p] of load current is calculated. (READ DATA) * 128 LOAD CURRENT[Ao–p] + [Ao–p] (COEFFICIENT) b) In the case of ratings currents [Arms] of load current are calculated. (READ DATA) * 128 LOAD CURRE
  • Page 1431C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) [Hardware] When general analog input data is read, one of the following hardware items is required: 1 Sub–CPU board 2 Analog I/O module on the additional axis board For details of the relationship between input numbers and connecto
  • Page 1432C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 C.3.18 Reading the Tool Life Management Data (Number of Tool [Description] Groups) The number of tool groups contained in the tool life management data is (Low–speed Response) read. Set data Read data 0 0 Function code Function cod
  • Page 1433C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) C.3.20 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life) [Description] (Low–speed response) The tool life of the specified tool group is read. Set data Read data 0 0 Function code Function code 41 41 2 2 Completion code Completion code
  • Page 1434C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 C.3.22 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life Counter Type) [Description] (Low–speed Response) The tool life counter type of the specified tool group is read. Set data Read data 0 0 Function code Function code 160 160 2 2 Com
  • Page 1435C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) C.3.23 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length [Description] Compensation No.1) A tool length compensation number is read according to the specified tool (Low–speed Response) group number and tool number. Set data Read data
  • Page 1436C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 C.3.24 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length [Description] Compensation No.2) A tool length compensation number is read according to the specified tool (Low–speed response) group number and tool order number. Set data Read
  • Page 1437C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) C.3.25 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Compensation [Description] No.1) A cutter compensation number is read according to the specified tool (Low–speed Response) group number and tool number. Set data Read data 0 0 Functi
  • Page 1438C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 C.3.26 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Compensation [Description] No.2) A cutter compensation number is read according to the specified tool (Low–speed Response) group number and tool order number. Set data Read data 0 0
  • Page 1439C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) C.3.27 Reading Tool Life Management Data [Description] (Tool Information 1) The tool information (status) is read according to the specified tool group (Low–speed Response) number and tool number. Set data Read data 0 0 Function co
  • Page 1440C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 C.3.28 Reading Tool Life Management Data [Description] (Tool Information 2) The tool information (status) is read according to the specified tool group (Low–speed Response) number and tool order number. Set data Read data 0 0 Funct
  • Page 1441C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) C.3.30 [Description] Reading Clock Data The current data (year, month, day) and current time (hours, minutes, (Low–speed Response) seconds) can be read from the clock built into the CNC. Set data Read data 0 0 Function code Functio
  • Page 1442C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 C.3.31 Reading the Relative [Description] Position on a The relative position (relative coordinates) on a feed axis controlled by Controlled Axis the CNC is read. Set data Read data 0 0 Function code Function code 74 74 2 2 Complet
  • Page 1443C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) C.3.32 [Description] Reading the Remaining The remaining traveling distance on a feed axis controlled by the CNC is Travel read. Set data Read data 0 0 Function code Function code 75 75 2 2 Completion code Completion code — 4 4 Dat
  • Page 1444C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 C.3.33 [Description] Reading an Estimate 1) The load torques except a necessary torque for acceleration/ Disturbance Torque deceleration of the torques of the servo axis are read. Data 2) The load torques except a necessary torque
  • Page 1445C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) C.3.34 Reading the Machining Time [Description] (Low–speed Response) The machining time currently specified for a program is read. Set data Read data 0 0 Function code Function code 178 178 2 2 Completion code Completion code — 4 4
  • Page 1446C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 C.3.35 Reading the Load [Description] Current (A/D The load current for the spindle (spindle motor) is converted to a digital Conversion Data) for value and the digital value is read. (See Subsection C.3.16, ”Reading the the Spindl
  • Page 1447C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) C.3.36 Reading the Tool Offset Data According to the [Description] Specified Tool Number The tool number is spedified and the tool offset data is read. Set data Read data 0 0 Function code Function code 213 213 2 2 Completion code
  • Page 1448C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 C.3.37 [Explanation of data] Reading Tool Life The tool group number in which a tool number is registered is read. Management Data Note that the tool number area is four bytes in length so that a tool number (Tool Group Numbers) of
  • Page 1449C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) C.3.38 [Explanation of data] Reading Tool Life The tool length compensation number corresponding to the specified tool Management Data group number and tool number is read. (Tool Length Note that the tool number area is four bytes
  • Page 1450C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 C.3.39 [Explanation of data] Reading Tool Life The cutter compensation number corresponding to the specified tool Management Data group number and tool number is read. (Cutter Compensation Note that the tool number area is four byt
  • Page 1451C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) C.3.40 [Explanation of data] Reading Tool Life The tool information (state) corresponding to the specified tool group Management Data number and tool number is read. (Tool Information 1) Note that the tool number area is four bytes
  • Page 1452C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 C.3.41 Reading Real [Explanation of data] Parameters Real parameters are read from the CNC. (Low–speed Type) [Input data structure] Settings After reading 0 0 Function code Function code 321 321 +2 +2 Completion code Completion cod
  • Page 1453C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) C.3.42 Reading the actual [Description] Machine Position The machine position (machine coordinates) on a feed axis controlled by (Machine Coordinates) the CNC can be read. of Controlled Axes. The machine position value includes the
  • Page 1454C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 C.3.43 Reading Fine Torque [Description] Sensing Data This function reads the statistical calculation results (average value, (Statistical Calculation maximum value and distribution) in the fine torque sensing function. Results). [
  • Page 1455C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) C.3.44 (1) Store Counter Reading Fine Torque [Description] Sensing Data (Store This function reads the number of stored torque data items. (Store Data) Counter) [Structure] Set data Read data 0 0 Function code Function code 232 232
  • Page 1456C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 (2) Stored torque data (newest data) [Description] This function reads the newest stored data among stored torque data [Structure] Set data Read data 0 0 Function code Function code 232 232 2 2 Completion code Completion code — 4 4
  • Page 1457C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) (3) Stored torque data (any data) [Description] This function reads the newest stored data among stored torque data [Structure] Set data Read data 0 0 Function code Function code 232 232 2 2 Completion code Completion code — 4 4 Da
  • Page 1458C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 NOTE 1. The valid area of data number m is as follows: 0 ≤ m ≤ (524288 × 1/a × 1/b) – 1 1 : the number of the axes for Fine Torque Sensing is 1 for a = 2 : the number of the axes for Fine Torque Sensing is 2 4 : the number of the a
  • Page 1459C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) C.3.45 Reading detailed [Description] information of CNC This function reads detailed information of CNC alarm. alarm. The detailed information of CNC alarm is as follows. D axis number D alarm type D alarm number [Structure] Set d
  • Page 1460C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Structure of detailed alarm information] 2 byte 4 byte 2 byte 2 byte 8 byte 8 byte Number Axis information Alarm Alarm of read type number ..... alarm 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 31 30 29 28 27 26
  • Page 1461C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) 2. In case that all alarms are read. Set data Read data 0 0 Function code 330 Function code 330 2 2 Completion code — Completion code 0 4 4 Data length — Data length 34 6 6 Number of alarm 10 Number of alarm 10 8 8 Alarm type –1 Al
  • Page 1462C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 C.4 (1) See the description of the window function. The data item marked with a dash (–) in the description of the data structure need not be FORMAT AND entered. DETAILS OF THE When output, the data item has no meaning. CONTROL DAT
  • Page 1463C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) C.4.1 [Description] Writing a Tool Offset The data is directly written into the tool offset value (tool compensation) Data area of the CNC. Set data 0 Function code 14 2 Completion code 4 Data length 4 6 Offset number 8 Offset form
  • Page 1464C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 C.4.2 [Description] Writing a Parameter The data is written into the parameter area of the CNC. (Setting Data) The parameters of the CNC are classified into four types according to the smallest unit that has a meaning. Bit paramete
  • Page 1465C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) C.4.3 Writing a Custom [Description] Macro Variable The data is written into the custom macro variable area of the CNC. Set data 0 Function code 22 2 Completion code 4 Data length 6 6 Custom macro number 8 Data attribute 0 10 Custo
  • Page 1466C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 C.4.4 [Description] Writing a Data on the The data to be displayed on the program check screen of the CNC is Program Check Screen rewritten. Set data 0 Function code 150 2 Completion code 4 Data length 2, 4 6 Data type 8 Data attri
  • Page 1467C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) C.4.5 Writing the Torque [Description] Limit Override The torque limit override of the specified feed axis is rewritten. Set data 0 Function code 152 2 Completion code 4 Data length 2 6 Data type 0 8 Axis number Value 10 Un–signed
  • Page 1468C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 C.4.6 Writing the Tool Life [Description] Management Data The tool number and the tool life value are written into the specified tool (Tool Group Number) group. Set data 0 Function code 163 2 Data type Specification Completion code
  • Page 1469C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) C.4.8 Writing the Tool Life [Description] Management Data The data is written into the tool life counter area of the specified tool (Tool Life Counter) group. Set data 0 Function code 165 2 Completion code — 4 Data length 4 6 Tool
  • Page 1470C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 C.4.10 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool [Description] Length Compensation The data is written into the tool length compensation number area Number 1) specified by the tool group number and tool number. Set data 0 Functio
  • Page 1471C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) C.4.12 Writing the Tool Life Management Data [Description] (Cutter Compensation The data is written into the cutter compensation number area specified by Number 1) the tool group number and tool number. Set data 0 Function code 169
  • Page 1472C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 C.4.14 Writing the Tool Life [Description] Management Data The data is written into the tool information (status) area specified by the (Tool Information 1) tool group number and tool number. Set data 0 Function code 171 2 Completi
  • Page 1473C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) C.4.16 Writing the Tool Life [Description] Management Data A tool number is written into (added to) the area specified by the tool (Tool Number) group number and tool order number. Set data 0 Function code 173 2 Completion code — 4
  • Page 1474C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 C.4.17 Writing the Tool Offset Data According to the [Description] Specified Tool Number The tool number is specified and the tool offset data is written. Set data 0 Function code 214 2 Completion code — 4 Data length 4 6 Data form
  • Page 1475C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) C.4.18 Writing the [Description] Superposition Move After the axes for manual handle feed are selected in the manual handle Command feed mode, the traveling distances (number of pulses) corresponding to three manual pulse generator
  • Page 1476C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 (2) For four axes Set data 0 Function code 215 2 Completion code 4 Data length 8 6 Axis specification mode 8 Axis number 10 Superposition move command (8 byte) 18 Axis specification mode 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 #0 : Mode selection (0: The
  • Page 1477C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) C.4.19 [Description] Writing the Feedrate Feedrate writing can be specified only in the feed–per–minute mode. The velocity command is specified with F 10–d. A flag is provided to validate either the command of the PMC or the feedra
  • Page 1478C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 C.4.20 [Explanation of data] Writing Tool Life A tool number and a tool life value are written to a specified tool number. Management Data Note that the tool number area is four bytes in length so that a tool number (Tool Group Num
  • Page 1479C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) C.4.21 [Explanation of data] Writing Tool Life Data is written to the tool length compensation number specified by a tool Management Data (Tool group number and a tool number. Length Compensation Note that the tool number area is f
  • Page 1480C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 C.4.22 [Explanation of data] Writing Tool Life Data is written to the cutter compensation number specified by a tool Management Data group number and a tool number. (Cutter Compensation Note that the tool number area is four bytes
  • Page 1481C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) C.4.23 [Explanation of data] Writing Tool Life Data is written to the tool information (state) specified by a tool group Management Data number and a tool number. (Tool Information 1) Note that the tool number area is four bytes in
  • Page 1482C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 C.4.24 Writing Real [Explanation of data] Parameters Real parameters are written to the CNC. (Low–speed Type) [Input data structure] Settings 0 Function code 323 +2 Completion code — +4 Data length 6 +6 Parameter number +8 +10 Data
  • Page 1483D. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (FS16/16i–LA/16i–LB) D WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (FS16/16i–LA/16i–LB) 1449
  • Page 1484D. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (FS16/16i–LA/16i–LB) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 D.1 The following function is added to PMC–CNC window function for FS16–LA. OUTLINE (1) Transferring a processing condition file in non–volatile memory to data area in CNC memory, and vice versa. (2) Reading a comment command i
  • Page 1485D. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (FS16/16i–LA/16i–LB) D.2 FUNCTION D.2.1 (1) Transfer from data area to non–volatile memory. (% low–speed type) Transfer Between Data Area and Non–volatile Memory [Contents of data] The data can be transferred from the data area in CNC to PMC non–vo
  • Page 1486D. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (FS16/16i–LA/16i–LB) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 (2) Transfer from non–volatile memory to data area (% low–speed type) [Contents of data] The data can be transferred from the processing condition file registered in non–volatile memory to the data area in CNC by PMC–SC applica
  • Page 1487D. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (FS16/16i–LA/16i–LB) (3) Data structure of data area (a) Processing data set Address Data item Byte No. 0 Feed–rate 4 4 Peak power 2 6 Pulse frequency 2 8 Pulse duty 2 10 Assist gas pres. 2 12 Assist gas select 2 14 Assist gas settling time 2 16 Re
  • Page 1488D. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (FS16/16i–LA/16i–LB) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 NOTE Example of data set The address in Data is set as follows, for example, in case of the following data structure of processing condition file in non–volatile memory. Data structure of data area The example of data structure
  • Page 1489D. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (FS16/16i–LA/16i–LB) D.2.2 The data in the parentheses is written in the comment area, if the following Reading of the M–code is commanded in a part program. This comment can be read from PMC. Comment Mxxx (* * * * * * *) ; Less than 24 characters,
  • Page 1490D. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (FS16/16i–LA/16i–LB) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 D.2.3 (1) Reading the laser command data and laser setting data Reading and Writing (:high–speed type) the Laser Command Data and Laser Setting [Contents of the data] Data The laser command data and laser setting data for CNC c
  • Page 1491D. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (FS16/16i–LA/16i–LB) (2) Writing the laser command data and laser setting data (:low–speed type) [Contents of the data] The data can be written to the laser command data for CNC by PMC–SC application. The data are separated to groups and can be wri
  • Page 1492D. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (FS16/16i–LA/16i–LB) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 (3) The data structure of the laser command data and laser setting data Group No. Address Top Byte No. Data length Item add. + for every item Byte No. 0 10 2 4 Power control duty const 12 2 Power control minimum duty 1 10 2 10
  • Page 1493E. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (FS16–W) E WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (FS16–W) 1459
  • Page 1494E. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (FS16–W) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 E.1 [Description] READING THE WIRE The wire diameter offset value recorded in the CNC can be read. DIAMETER OFFSET [Input data structure] Top address (Function) 13 +2 (Completion) — +4 (Data length) — Offset Corner–R Clearance Condition +6
  • Page 1495E. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (FS16–W) [Data number] 0–15 : Reads the Offset value. 0–16 : Reads the Corner–R value. 0–17 : Reads the Clearance value. [Data attribute] 0 : Reads the Offset value, Corner–R value or Clearance value. 1 : Reads the condition. [Contents of data] a)
  • Page 1496E. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (FS16–W) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 E.2 [Description] WRITING THE WIRE The wire diameter offset value can be written into the CNC. DIAMETER OFFSET (:LOW–SPEED RESPONSE) [Input data structure] Top address (Function) 14 +2 (Completion) — Offset Corner–R Clearance Condition +4
  • Page 1497E. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (FS16–W) [Data number] 0–15 : Writes the Offset value. 0–16 : Writes the Corner–R value. 0–17 : Writes the Clearance value. [Data attribute] 0 : Writes the Offset value, Corner–R value or Clearance value. 1 : Writes the condition. [Contents of data
  • Page 1498E. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (FS16–W) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 E.3 [Description] READING THE Parameter data in the CNC can be read. PARAMETER There are four types of parameters in the CNC: Bit parameters having a (:LOW–SPEED definite meaning for each bit, byte parameters holding 1–byte data, word para
  • Page 1499E. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (FS16–W) N = 16000 to 16255 : Pitch error compensation value of the 6th (W) axis N = 17000 to 17255 : Pitch error compensation value of the 7th (A) axis N = 18000 to 18255 : Pitch error compensation value of the 8th (E) axis [Data attribute] When t
  • Page 1500E. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (FS16–W) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 E.4 [Description] WRITING THE Parameter data in the CNC can be written. PARAMETER There are four types of parameters in the CNC: Bit parameters having (:LOW–SPEED a definite meaning for each bit, byte parameters holding 1–byte data, word p
  • Page 1501E. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (FS16–W) N = 12000 to 12511 : Pitch error compensation value of the 2nd (Y) axis N = 13000 to 13127 : Pitch error compensation value of the 3rd (U) axis N = 14000 to 14127 : Pitch error compensation value of the 4th (V) axis N = 15000 to 15255 : Pi
  • Page 1502E. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (FS16–W) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Types of parameters] In the B908 system, data type of ( ) are used. No. Length No. Data type No. Data type No. Data type 0000 Bit 0070 Byte 0140 Byte 0210 2W(––) 0001 Bit 0071 Byte 0141 Byte 0211 — 0002 Bit 0072 Byte 0142 Byte 0212 — 0003
  • Page 1503E. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (FS16–W) No. Length No. Data type No. Data type No. Data type 0280 — 0350 2words 0620 Byte 0690 Word 0281 — 0351 Byte 0621 Byte 0691 Word 0282 — 0352 Byte 0622 Byte 0692 Word 0283 — 0353 Byte 0623 Byte 0693 Word 0284 — 0354 Byte 0624 Word 0694 Word
  • Page 1504E. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (FS16–W) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 No. Length No. Data type No. Data type No. Data type 0760 2words 0810 2words 0860 Word 0910 — 0761 2words 0811 Byte 0861 Bit 0911 — 0762 2words 0812 Byte 0862 Bit 0912 — 0763 2words 0813 Byte 0863 Byte 0913 — 0764 2words 0814 Byte 0864 Byt
  • Page 1505E. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (FS16–W) E.5 READING SETTING [Data contents] DATA Setting data on the CNC can be read. [Input data structure] [Output data structure] Top address Top address (Function code) (Function code) 19 19 +2 +2 (Completion code) (Completion code) – ? +4 +4
  • Page 1506E. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (FS16–W) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 E.6 WRITING SETTING DATA [Data contents] (LOW–SPEED TYPE) Setting data on the CNC can be written. [Input data structure] [Output data structure] Top address Top address (Function code) (Function code) 20 20 +2 +2 (Completion code) (Complet
  • Page 1507E. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (FS16–W) Setting Data List Setting data Screen Data number Data length Bit name X mirror image Handy 1 1 Bit 0 Y mirror image Handy 1 1 Bit 1 Axis switching Handy 1 1 Bit 2 TV check Handy 1 1 Bit 3 Output code Handy 1 1 Bit 4 Input unit Handy 1 1 B
  • Page 1508E. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (FS16–W) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 Setting Data List Setting data Screen Data number Data length Bit name OP. BLOCK SKIP /0 Others 38 1 Bit 0 OP. BLOCK SKIP /1 Others 38 1 Bit 1 OP. BLOCK SKIP /2 Others 38 1 Bit 2 OP. BLOCK SKIP /3 Others 38 1 Bit 3 OP. BLOCK SKIP /4 Others
  • Page 1509E. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (FS16–W) E.7 [Description] READING THE CNC When the CNC is placed in the alarm status, the alarm status data can be ALARM STATUS read. [Input data structure] [Output data structure] Top address Top address (Function) (Function) 23 23 +2 +2 (Complet
  • Page 1510E. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (FS16–W) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 E.8 [Description] READING MODEL Modal information in the CNC can be read. DATA (1) Format and types of modal data for the G function Data with a specified identification code is read and stored in the data area. Whether the data is located
  • Page 1511E. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (FS16–W) (2) Format and types of modal data for other than the G function Data : 4 bytes Flag : 1 byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 — — 1 byte Number of input digits 0 : Positive 1 : Negative 0 : Not specified in the current block 1 : Specified in the current b
  • Page 1512E. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (FS16–W) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Output data structure] Top address (Function code) 32 +2 (Completion code) ? +4 (Data length) L +6 (Data number) Input data +8 (Data attribute) Input data + 10 (Data area) Modal data of oth- Modal data of Modal data of Modal data of er th
  • Page 1513E. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (FS16–W) [Completion code] –1 : The modal data read command could not be executed. This means that, because the modal data was being updated on the CNC, the command could not be executed. 0 : Modal data read operation terminated normally. 3 : An in
  • Page 1514E. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (FS16–W) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 E.9 READING [Data contents] MACHINING The distance (machining distance) from the machining start point to the DISTANCES current point, and the distance (whole distance) from the machining start point to the point where M02 or M30 is specif
  • Page 1515E. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (FS16–W) E.10 [Description] READING THE The measured point that are get by positioning can be read. Also, the slit MEASURED POINT width by slitting and the hole diameter by centering can be read. [Input data structure] Top address (Function) 185 +2
  • Page 1516E. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (FS16–W) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Data unit] Metric system input : 10–3 [mm] (In case the incremental system is 1/10, output data unit is 10–4 [mm].) Inch system input : 10–5 [inch] [Completion codes] 0 : The measured point has been read normally. 3 : Invalid data is spec
  • Page 1517E. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (FS16–W) E.11 WRITING THE MEASURED POINT [Description] (:LOW–SPEED The measured point that are get by positioning can be written. Also, the RESPONSE) slit width by slitting and the hole diameter by centering can be written. [Input data structure] [
  • Page 1518F. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (FS16/16i/0i–P) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 F WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (FS16/16i/0i–P) 1484
  • Page 1519F. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (FS16/16i/0i–P) F.1 [Description] READING OF TOOL Various Tool setting data recorded in the CNC can be read. SETTING DATA [Input data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 188 2 (Completion code) — (Need not be set) 4 (Data length) — (Need not
  • Page 1520F. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (FS16/16i/0i–P) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 188 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of codes) 4 (Data length) ? (See F.1.1) 6 (Data Number) N (N : Input data) 8 (Data attribute) M (M : Input data) 10 (Data area) ?
  • Page 1521F. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (FS16/16i/0i–P) F.1.1 Data number, data attribute, data length and data area of various tool Data Number, setting data are as follows. Data Attribute, Data Length, Data Area Various tool setting data Data number (N) Data attribute (M) Data length D
  • Page 1522F. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (FS16/16i/0i–P) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 data unit Machine Input of IS–A Input of IS–B Tool position mm 0. 01 0. 001 compensation inch 0. 001 0. 0001 Input unit Input of IS–A Input of IS–B Tool shape and mm 0. 01 0. 001 angle for graphic inch 0. 001 0. 0001 Tool angle for
  • Page 1523F. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (FS16/16i/0i–P) F.2 [Description] WRITING OF TOOL The various tool setting data can be directly written into the CNC. SETTING DATA (:LOW–SPEED RESPONSE) [Input data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 189 2 (Completion code) — (Need not be s
  • Page 1524F. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (FS16/16i/0i–P) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 189 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of codes) 4 (Data length) ? (See F.1.1) 6 (Data Number) N (N : Input data) 8 (Data attribute) M (M : Input data) 10 (Data area) ?
  • Page 1525F. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (FS16/16i/0i–P) F.3 READING TOOL [Description] SETTING DATA BY Setting data for a tool (such as registration order, tool punch count, and SPECIFYING TOOL tool shape) can be read by specifying the tool number. NUMBER [Input data structure] Top addre
  • Page 1526F. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (FS16/16i/0i–P) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 [Completion code] 0: The tool setting data has been read normally. 3: The specified data number is invalid. 4: The specified data attribute is invalid. 6: For the tool setting data specified for reading, an additional option (graphi
  • Page 1527F. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (FS16/16i/0i–P) F.4 The FS16–PA supports the following window functions, described in Appendix B of this manual. OTHER WINDOW FUNCTIONS Number Function code 1 Reading CNC system information 0 2 Reading a tool offset 13 3 Writing a tool offset :low–
  • Page 1528G. SIGNAL ADDRESS CONVERSION (FROM THE PMC–MODEL L/M TO THE PMC–MODEL SB/SC) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 G SIGNAL ADDRESS CONVERSION (FROM THE PMC–MODEL L/M TO THE PMC–MODEL SB/SC) 1494
  • Page 1529G. SIGNAL ADDRESS CONVERSION (FROM THE PMC–MODEL L/M TO B–61863E/15 APPENDIX THE PMC–MODEL SB/SC) G.1 DI/DO signals used in the PMC–MODEL L/M can be converted to signals for the PMC–MODEL SB/SC using the FANUC LADDER GENERAL program for the PMC–MODEL SB/SC. G.2 The DI/DO signals used between the NC
  • Page 1530G. SIGNAL ADDRESS CONVERSION (FROM THE PMC–MODEL L/M TO THE PMC–MODEL SB/SC) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 G.4 The above operation terminates the conversion. Check the converted program. If an error occurs in the conversion, modify the program. MODIFYING THE CONVERTED Enter 1 on the programmer menu to change
  • Page 1531H. CONNECTING THE OPERATOR’S PANEL FOR FS 0 WITH FS16, B–61863E/15 APPENDIX FS18, FS21, OR Power Mate H CONNECTING THE OPERATOR’S PANEL FOR FS 0 WITH FS16, FS18, FS21, OR Power Mate 1497
  • Page 1532H. CONNECTING THE OPERATOR’S PANEL FOR FS 0 WITH FS16, FS18, FS21, OR Power Mate APPENDIX B–61863E/15 H.1 The Series 0 operator’s panel consists of key switches, LEDs, a rotary switch, and so on. Because the states of key switches and lamps are coded, GENERAL the number of the signal lines required
  • Page 1533H. CONNECTING THE OPERATOR’S PANEL FOR FS 0 WITH FS16, B–61863E/15 APPENDIX FS18, FS21, OR Power Mate The operator’s panel is made up of the following keys, LEDs, etc. D Key switch (Seat key) D 42 keys (0–TC) D 46 keys (0–MC) D LEDs (red) .......................Prepared for all key switches D Overri
  • Page 1534H. CONNECTING THE OPERATOR’S PANEL FOR FS 0 WITH FS16, FS18, FS21, OR Power Mate APPENDIX B–61863E/15 (Coordinate) Fig. H.1 (d) External view of operator’s panel for 9″ CRT/MDI with full–keyboard (0–TC) (Coordinate) Fig. H.1 (e) External view of operator’s panel for 9″ CRT/MDI with full–keyboard (0–
  • Page 1535H. CONNECTING THE OPERATOR’S PANEL FOR FS 0 WITH FS16, B–61863E/15 APPENDIX FS18, FS21, OR Power Mate H.2 CONNECTION H.2.1 Connecting the I/O Unit CNC (Series 16 or 18) MAIN CPU I/O unit Series 0 operator’s panel I/O Link JD1A JD1B DI M1A (I/O Link) module CP32 PSU DO M2A CP6 JD1A module 24 VDC Anot
  • Page 1536H. CONNECTING THE OPERATOR’S PANEL FOR FS 0 WITH FS16, FS18, FS21, OR Power Mate APPENDIX B–61863E/15 H.3 SIGNALS FOR CONNECTING THE OPERATOR’S PANEL H.3.1 This signal is used for the fixed address directly monitored by the CNC. Emergency Stop Signal For connecting the signal, refer to the descripti
  • Page 1537H. CONNECTING THE OPERATOR’S PANEL FOR FS 0 WITH FS16, B–61863E/15 APPENDIX FS18, FS21, OR Power Mate H.3.4 Specify the LED signals at PMC address R using the user PMC ladder LED Signals (Ym) program in the form of a bit image. PMC management software changes the bit image LED signals to the coded o
  • Page 1538H. CONNECTING THE OPERATOR’S PANEL FOR FS 0 WITH FS16, FS18, FS21, OR Power Mate APPENDIX B–61863E/15 Table H.3.4 (c) Bit image addresses of key switch and LED signals (for the operator’s panel with the full keyboard) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 KEY/LED E1 C1 A1 E6 D6 C6 B6 A6 Rk/Rl E2 C2 A2 E7 D7 C7 B7
  • Page 1539H. CONNECTING THE OPERATOR’S PANEL FOR FS 0 WITH FS16, B–61863E/15 APPENDIX FS18, FS21, OR Power Mate H.4 The following section describes how to specify key switch and LED signal addresses and the bit image addresses. SPECIFYING ADDRESSES H.4.1 Parameter Menu (PMC–SB7) KEY IN ONE OF THE FOLLOWING NO
  • Page 1540H. CONNECTING THE OPERATOR’S PANEL FOR FS 0 WITH FS16, FS18, FS21, OR Power Mate APPENDIX B–61863E/15 4) Specify bit image addresses. For example, to specify R900 and R910, enter R900,R910 and press the [NL] key. Then, the current display returns to the original parameter menu, and the following mes
  • Page 1541I. EDITING FOR Power Mate–MODEL D B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–PA1/PA3) I EDITING FOR Power Mate–MODEL D (PMC–PA1/PA3) 1507
  • Page 1542I. EDITING FOR Power Mate–MODEL D (PMC–PA1/PA3) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 I.1 Ladder diagram editing function for FANUC PMC–MODEL PA1/PA3 has high compatibility in a basic specification between ladder diagram OUTLINE editing function for FANUC PMC–MODEL SA1/SA2. Following abbreviations are used in this c
  • Page 1543I. EDITING FOR Power Mate–MODEL D B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–PA1/PA3) I.3 This function is used to set PMC system parameters and also generate and execute sequence programs by using soft keys a on the CRT/MDI unit or PMC PROGRAMMER PDP/MDI unit. You can not use following function because FANUC (CRT/M
  • Page 1544I. EDITING FOR Power Mate–MODEL D (PMC–PA1/PA3) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 I.3.1.1 (1) Editing card Component units This is used for editing sequence program. If this card is inserted in CNC at the time of its power–on, PMC displays the programmer menu. When you want to put on and take off, you must turn
  • Page 1545I. EDITING FOR Power Mate–MODEL D B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–PA1/PA3) I.3.1.2 Feed the editing card into connector CNMC of the CNC. Connection of When you want to put on and take off, you must turn off the CNC power. components (Refer to the fig. I.3.1.2) Fig. I.3.1.2 I.3.1.3 Please set bit 1 in K17
  • Page 1546I. EDITING FOR Power Mate–MODEL D (PMC–PA1/PA3) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 I.3.2 FANUC Power Mate–MODEL D can set only COUNTER DATA TYPE. Specification and The meaning of this parameter is same as PMC–SA1/SA2. Display of System Parameters (SYSPRM) PMC SYSTEM PARAMETER COUNTER DATA TYPE = BINARY/BCD [BINAR
  • Page 1547I. EDITING FOR Power Mate–MODEL D B–61863E/15 APPENDIX (PMC–PA1/PA3) Message Message Message 10.0KB 10.0KB 10.0KB Symbol/Comment Symbol/Comment Executed Symbol/Comment 19.1KB 18.9KB Condense 18.9KB Symbol/ Comment 0.2KB 19.0KB Delete 20.0KB (Unused area 1.1KB) (Unused area 0.1KB) (Unused area 0.9KB)
  • Page 1548I. EDITING FOR Power Mate–MODEL D (PMC–PA1/PA3) APPENDIX B–61863E/15 I.4 SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF SOFT KEY PCLAD PCDGN PCPRM NEXT STOP EDIT I/O SYSPRM RETURN TITLE LADDER SYMBOL MESAGE NEXT MODULE CROSS CLEAR Fig. I.4 (a) TITLE LADDER SYMBOL MESAGE FUNCTN RETURN NEXT COMAND INSNET DELNET INSERT ADRESS SEAR
  • Page 1549B–61863E/15 APPENDIX J. APPLICABLE FANUC LADDER EDITIONS J APPLICABLE FANUC LADDER EDITIONS The following tables list the editions of offline programs required to program each PMC model. 1515
  • Page 1550J. APPLICABLE FANUC LADDER EDITIONS APPENDIX B–61863E/15 J.1 Body of FANUC LADDER (PC–9801) A08B–9200–J502#JP FANUC LADDER, Body of FANUC LADDER (IBM PC/AT) A08B–9201–J502#EN FANUC LADDER–II, PMC–SA module (PC–9801) A08B–9200–J603#JP PMC–SA module (IBM PC/AT) A08B–9201–J603#EN FANUC LADDER–III, PMC–
  • Page 1551B–61863E/15 APPENDIX J. APPLICABLE FANUC LADDER EDITIONS Model PMC– PMC– PMC– PMC– PMC– PMC– PMC– PMC– PMC– PMC– SB4 SB5 SB6 SB7 SC SC3 SC4 NB NB2 NB6 Drawing number A08B–9200–J502#JP 7.1 8.5 8.5 – 1.0 5.0 7.1 6.1 8.5 – A08B–9201–J502#EN and later and later and later and later and later and later an
  • Page 1552J. APPLICABLE FANUC LADDER EDITIONS APPENDIX B–61863E/15 J.2 A08B–0035–J595#E (P–G Mark II): FANUC LADDER PMC–SA1/SA2 FANUC LADDER A08B–0036–J595#E (P–G Mate): (SYSTEM P SERIES) Model PMC– PMC– PMC– PMC– PMC– Edition PA1 PA3 SA1 SA2 SA3 1.1 and later Ę 2.1 and later Ę Ę n 3.1 and later Ę 4.1 and lat
  • Page 1553B–61863E/15 APPENDIX J. APPLICABLE FANUC LADDER EDITIONS NOTE The edition of FANUC LADDER adopted for the PMC–SA2 or PMC–SB2 can be used to program the PMC–SA3 or PMC–SB3 as long as some functional instructions including structured programming are not used (as long as FANUC LADDER is used within the
  • Page 1554K. LEVEL UP OF INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION WITH MEMORY CARD APPENDIX B–61863E/15 K LEVEL UP OF INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION WITH MEMORY CARD 1520
  • Page 1555K. LEVEL UP OF INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX WITH MEMORY CARD K.1 The function is leveled up, that is Input/Output function with Memory Card by CNC or Offline Programmer. The leveled up contents are as OUTLINE OF follows. LEVELED UP (1) The time is reduced in Inputing/Outputing between
  • Page 1556K. LEVEL UP OF INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION WITH MEMORY CARD APPENDIX B–61863E/15 K.2 OPERATION K.2.1 (1) Operation of CNC CNC ³ Offline 1) On PMC I/O screen, specify M–CARD as “DEVICE”, WRITE Programmer as “FUNCTION”, LADDER as “DATA KIND”, any file name, which is omissible, as “FILE NO.” (See Fig. K.2.1
  • Page 1557K. LEVEL UP OF INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX WITH MEMORY CARD 5) Select [READ] (PROGRAMMER ← Memory Card). (See Fig. K.2.1 (c).) I/O (M_CARD) PMC–RA1 [A:¥FLADDER¥ ] F1 KEY : WRITE (PROGRAMMER –> Memory Card) F2 KEY : READ (PROGRAMMER <– Memory Card) F10 KEY : END WRITE READ END Fig.
  • Page 1558K. LEVEL UP OF INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION WITH MEMORY CARD APPENDIX B–61863E/15 K.2.2 (1) Operation of Offline Programmer (FANUC LADDER for Personal Offline Programmer ³ computer) CNC 1) Mount a Memory Card interface on the personal computer. 2) Compile a source program and create a ROM format file. 3) R
  • Page 1559K. LEVEL UP OF INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX WITH MEMORY CARD K.2.3 Sequence programs which are output from leveled up CNC or Offline Note Programmer to Memory Card can not be input to non leveled up CNC or Offline Programmer. (Refer to the table of K.1) (1) (4) (2) (3) CNC Offline Prog
  • Page 1560K. LEVEL UP OF INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION WITH MEMORY CARD APPENDIX B–61863E/15 · In case of (3) Output operation : Output sequence programs by setting the output format to 1 (:S–FORMAT) on the following SETUP screen PMC I/O. The default output format is 0 (:BINARY). PMC I/O PROGRAM MONIT STOP CHANNEL =
  • Page 1561K. LEVEL UP OF INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION B–61863E/15 APPENDIX WITH MEMORY CARD K.3 Ladder data can be transferred by using a memory card. NB/NB2 DATA Two data formats are used: COMPATIBILITY – Handy file format – Memory card format The handy file format defines the S format data used with RS–232C. The m
  • Page 1562K. LEVEL UP OF INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION WITH MEMORY CARD APPENDIX B–61863E/15 K.3.3 Data Transfer Between NB (4047 Series) and NB (4048 Series) PMC I/O screen Transfer in handy file format PMC I/O screen NB (4047) NB (4048) Transfer in handy file format FANUC LADDER Transfer in memory card format (pers
  • Page 1563L. MIGRATION OF LADDER PROGRAMS B–61863E/15 APPENDIX BETWEEN DIFFERENT MODELS L MIGRATION OF LADDER PROGRAMS BETWEEN DIFFERENT MODELS 1529
  • Page 1564L. MIGRATION OF LADDER PROGRAMS BETWEEN DIFFERENT MODELS APPENDIX B–61863E/15 L.1 The PMC–SB5/SB6 for the Power Mate i–D/H are upward–compatible with the PMC–PA1/PA3 for the Power Mate–D/H, according to their MIGRATION OF basic specifications. Because, however, sequence programs are not LADDER PROGR
  • Page 1565L. MIGRATION OF LADDER PROGRAMS B–61863E/15 APPENDIX BETWEEN DIFFERENT MODELS Model PMC address type Power Mate–D Power Mate–D/H Power Mate i–D/H PMC–PA1 PMC–PA3 PMC–SB5 PMC–SB6 Inner relay (R) R0 to R999 R0 to R999 R0 to R1499 R0 to R2999 R9000 to R9099 R9000 to R9117 R9000 to R9117 R9000 to R9199
  • Page 1566L. MIGRATION OF LADDER PROGRAMS BETWEEN DIFFERENT MODELS APPENDIX B–61863E/15 L.2 If you previously used the Series 15–B PMC–NB/NB2, you must convert from the PMC–NB/NB2 to the PMC–NB6. The conversion procedure is MIGRATION FROM as described below. THE PMC–NB/NB2 TO (1) Model change from the PMC–NB/
  • Page 1567L. MIGRATION OF LADDER PROGRAMS B–61863E/15 APPENDIX BETWEEN DIFFERENT MODELS L.3 MIGRATION FROM THE PMC–SA5/ SB5/SB6 TO THE PMC–SB7 L.3.1 (1) Differences between PMC–SA5/SB5/SB6 and PMC–SB7 Compatibility of PMCs The following list shows the difference of each PMC models. It is for Series possible t
  • Page 1568L. MIGRATION OF LADDER PROGRAMS BETWEEN DIFFERENT MODELS APPENDIX B–61863E/15 D If you want to change the model PMC–SA5/SB5/SB6 to model PMC–SB7, change the item ”PMC TYPE” to ”PMC–SB7”. D If the mnemonic file has insufficient parameters for PMC–SB7, the initial values are set with conversion for th
  • Page 1569L. MIGRATION OF LADDER PROGRAMS B–61863E/15 APPENDIX BETWEEN DIFFERENT MODELS – The PMC parameters output from PMC–SB7 cannot be input to PMC–SA5/SB5/SB6. The extra relay address (E) is available as PMC address. The PMC parameters for PMC–SB7 contain the E addresses. When the PMC parameters for PMC–
  • Page 1570L. MIGRATION OF LADDER PROGRAMS BETWEEN DIFFERENT MODELS APPENDIX B–61863E/15 (8) Addition/Change of Setting Parameters/System Keep Relays The following setting parameters and keep relays are added. 16i/18i/21i–A 16i/18i/21i–B Keep relays Applied Software PMC–SA1/SA5/SB5/SB6 PMC–SA1/SB7 K901.6/K18.6
  • Page 1571L. MIGRATION OF LADDER PROGRAMS B–61863E/15 APPENDIX BETWEEN DIFFERENT MODELS (9) Addition of PMC alarm (PMC–SB7) The number of groups of I/O Link defined in the sequence program is compared with the number of groups of actually connected I/O devices. If the selectable I/O link assignment function i
  • Page 1572L. MIGRATION OF LADDER PROGRAMS BETWEEN DIFFERENT MODELS APPENDIX B–61863E/15 D Action for modifications of library function specification The following functions in ”III PMC LIBRARY” are not available to Series 16i/18i/21i–B because PMC memory is extended for PMC–SB7 on Series 16i/18i/21i–B and bec
  • Page 1573L. MIGRATION OF LADDER PROGRAMS B–61863E/15 APPENDIX BETWEEN DIFFERENT MODELS The contents of NC Parameter No.24 NC Parameter Meaning on 16i/18i/21i–A Meaning on 16i/18i/21i–B No.24 Disables ”RS–232C” and enables ”HIGH SPEED The settings on the online monitor setting screen I/F”. are effective. 0 Ho
  • Page 1574L. MIGRATION OF LADDER PROGRAMS BETWEEN DIFFERENT MODELS APPENDIX B–61863E/15 L.3.2 PMC Parameter Format L.3.2.1 This is the specification for the format to output the PMC nonvolatile General parameter to I/O device. L.3.2.2 (1) Timer (T) Format for PMC–MODEL [Format] SA1/SA5/SB5/SB6 N60xxx Pnnnnn;
  • Page 1575L. MIGRATION OF LADDER PROGRAMS B–61863E/15 APPENDIX BETWEEN DIFFERENT MODELS P: The value of the keep relay with binary numeric. The effective values from N62000 to N62019are from 00000000 to 11111111. The effective values from N62900 to N62909 are also from 00000000 to 11111111. (Example) N620000
  • Page 1576L. MIGRATION OF LADDER PROGRAMS BETWEEN DIFFERENT MODELS APPENDIX B–61863E/15 (Example) N63000 P2; N63002 P00000000; N63003 P0; N63004 P10; N63006 P0; N63010 P00000001; N63011 P0; N63012 P10; N63014 P10; (ii)Data Table [Format] N64xxx Pnnnnn; N: The offset of the Data Table address plus 64000. The r
  • Page 1577L. MIGRATION OF LADDER PROGRAMS B–61863E/15 APPENDIX BETWEEN DIFFERENT MODELS (Example) N600000 P1; Timer Number 1 T0 N600002 P20; Timer Number 2 T2 ...... N600498 P32767; Timer Number 250 T498 N609000 P0; T9000 N609002 P0; T9002 ...... 609498 P0; T9498 *Note: The area from N609000 to N609498 is res
  • Page 1578L. MIGRATION OF LADDER PROGRAMS BETWEEN DIFFERENT MODELS APPENDIX B–61863E/15 N620900 P00000000; K900 N620901 P11111111; K901 ...... N620919 P10101010; K919 (5) Data(D) (i) Data Table Control [Format] N630000 Pnn; Number of Table group (1 to 100) N630002 Pnnnnnnnn; Parameter of the group 1(Binary fo
  • Page 1579L. MIGRATION OF LADDER PROGRAMS B–61863E/15 APPENDIX BETWEEN DIFFERENT MODELS P: The value of the Data Table address with signed decimal numeric. The ranges of the value depend on the data type of the Data Table and are from –128 to 127 with the 1–byte type, from –32768 to 32767 with the 2–byte type
  • Page 1580L. MIGRATION OF LADDER PROGRAMS BETWEEN DIFFERENT MODELS APPENDIX B–61863E/15 L.4 MIGRATION FROM THE Series 0 AND Series 21–B TO Series 0i–A L.4.1 The object and the source of the ladder program are not compatible between PMC–SA1/SA3 for Series 0i–A and PMC–L/M for Series 0. Compatible With Therefor
  • Page 1581L. MIGRATION OF LADDER PROGRAMS B–61863E/15 APPENDIX BETWEEN DIFFERENT MODELS 3. The difference of the addresses – Converting of the addresses except F/G/X addresses Please correct the range of the address when the address which is out of range in PMC–SA1/SA3 is used. (Example) The below address can
  • Page 1582L. MIGRATION OF LADDER PROGRAMS BETWEEN DIFFERENT MODELS APPENDIX B–61863E/15 The converter file is stored in ”OAppendix” of the installed directory of FANUC LADDER. FS0M–CNV.SYM: For converting to Series 0i–MA from Series 0M FS0T–CNV.SYM: For converting to Series 0i–TA from Series 0T (6) Replace th
  • Page 1583L. MIGRATION OF LADDER PROGRAMS B–61863E/15 APPENDIX BETWEEN DIFFERENT MODELS (3) Convert to the mnemonic form file from source program of (2). (**B) Select the ”MNEMONIC EDIT”, and specify the ”SOURCE PROGRAM → MNEMONIC FILE”. The empty mnemonic form file is made. (4) Exit FANUC LADDER–II, and star
  • Page 1584L. MIGRATION OF LADDER PROGRAMS BETWEEN DIFFERENT MODELS APPENDIX B–61863E/15 *A Original mnemonic file Converter file **B Converted mnemonic file (PMC–M) FS0T–CNV.SYM (PMC–SA3) %@A %@2 %@A %@0 G000.0 G100.0 %@0 1 400 G000.1 G100.1 2 BINARY 20 G000.2 G100.2 3 NO 30 G000.3 G100.3 4 PMC–RA3 40 ... % 5
  • Page 1585L. MIGRATION OF LADDER PROGRAMS B–61863E/15 APPENDIX BETWEEN DIFFERENT MODELS L.4.3 The PMC specification of Series 0i–A is the same as PMC–SA1/SA3 for Limited Function Series 21–B. However, the following function is not supported. – The memory card cannot be used on the I/O Screen of PMC. In other
  • Page 1586M. ALARM MESSAGE LIST APPENDIX B–61863E/15 M ALARM MESSAGE LIST 1552
  • Page 1587B–61863E/15 APPENDIX M. ALARM MESSAGE LIST M.1 ALARM MESSAGE (PMC–PA1/PA3/SA1/ SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/ SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/ SB6/SC/SC3/SC4/NB/ NB2/NB6) Alarm messages 1 (alarm screen) Message Contents and solution ALARM NOTHING Normal status or NO ALARM (In case of PMC–NB6) ER00 PROGRAM DATA ERROR (ROM) The seq
  • Page 1588M. ALARM MESSAGE LIST APPENDIX B–61863E/15 Message Contents and solution ER10 OPTION AREA NOTHING The PMC–SB management software is not transferred. (SERIES–NAME) (solution) There is a mismatch between the order and delivered the soft- ware. Contact FANUC. ER11 OPTION AREA NOTHING The PMC C language
  • Page 1589B–61863E/15 APPENDIX M. ALARM MESSAGE LIST Alarm messages 2 (alarm screen) Message Contents and solution ER18 PROGRAM DATA ERROR BY I/O Transferring the sequence program from offline programmer was interrupted by the power off etc. (solution) Please clear the sequence program and transfer the se- qu
  • Page 1590M. ALARM MESSAGE LIST APPENDIX B–61863E/15 Message Contents and solution ER33 SLC ERROR The LSI for I/O Link is defective. or Display of ”CH2” means the defectiveness of I/O Link channel 2. ER33 SLC ERROR(CH2) (solution) Please exchange the module of PMC engine. ER34 SLC ERROR(xx) The communication
  • Page 1591B–61863E/15 APPENDIX M. ALARM MESSAGE LIST Alarm messages 3 (alarm screen) Message Contents and solution WN01 LADDER MAX SIZE ERROR The MAX LADDER AREA SIZE in the system parameter is illegal. (solution) Set the correct value to MAX LADDER AREA SIZE and restart the system. WN02 OPERATE PANEL ADDRESS
  • Page 1592M. ALARM MESSAGE LIST APPENDIX B–61863E/15 Message Contents and solution WN24 TASK ENTRY ADDR ERROR The selector of the entry address to the user task is out of range. (solution) Please correct the table of GDT in build file to the value within 32(20H)–95(5FH). WN25 DATA SEG ENTRY ERROR The entry ad
  • Page 1593B–61863E/15 APPENDIX M. ALARM MESSAGE LIST Alarm messages 4 (alarm screen) Message Contents and solution WN40 PROGRAM DATA ERROR BY I/O Language program read operation was interrupted. (LANG.) (solution) Reenter the language program. WN41 LANGUAGE TYPE UNMATCH There is a C program type mismatch. (so
  • Page 1594M. ALARM MESSAGE LIST APPENDIX B–61863E/15 M.2 ALARM MESSAGE (PMC–SB7) Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents ER01 PROGRAM DATA ERROR 1) Re–input the sequence program. The sequence program is invalid. 2) Replace the master printed circuit board. ER02 PROGRAM SIZE OVER 1) Reduce the
  • Page 1595B–61863E/15 APPENDIX M. ALARM MESSAGE LIST Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents ER16 RAM CHECK ERROR Replace the master printed circuit board The initialization of the memory used to (PROGRAM RAM) store the sequence program failed. ER17 PROGRAM PARITY 1) Re–input the sequence prog
  • Page 1596M. ALARM MESSAGE LIST APPENDIX B–61863E/15 Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents ER39 MAX SETTING INPUT DATA Modify the total amount of input data in The I/O Link I/O area is insufficient. OVER (xx) each group to 128 bytes or less. (The allocation of any group after group xx on the
  • Page 1597B–61863E/15 APPENDIX M. ALARM MESSAGE LIST Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents WN09 NO OPTION 1) Contact FANUC to have a step Though there was no step sequence (STEP SEQUENCE) sequence option specified. option, execution of step sequence 2) Chang to the sequence program for funct
  • Page 1598M. ALARM MESSAGE LIST APPENDIX B–61863E/15 Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents WN29 COMMON MEM SEG TYPE Change the value according to the When a PMC C board is used, the ERROR segment setting in the link control shared memory segment type is invalid. statement and build file. The
  • Page 1599B–61863E/15 APPENDIX M. ALARM MESSAGE LIST M.3 SYSTEM ALARM MESSAGES (PMC–SC) Message STATUS LED Contents and solution PC1nn CPU INTERPT xxxx yyyyyy A CPU error (abnormal interrupt) occurred. nn : CPU exception handling code It is an exception code of i80386. For details, please refer to the manual
  • Page 1600M. ALARM MESSAGE LIST APPENDIX B–61863E/15 STATUS LED (green) are LED1, LED2 on PMC–SC. CAP–II is LED3 and LED4. j : Off J : On lL : Blinking NOTE The system error on PMC–SA1,SA2,SA3,SB,SB2 and SB3 is displayed as a system error on the CNC side. (Refer to the “FANUC Series 16–MA Operator’s Manual (B
  • Page 1601B–61863E/15 APPENDIX M. ALARM MESSAGE LIST M.4 SYSTEM ALARM MESSAGES (C LANGUAGE FUNCTION FOR PMC–NB/NB2/NB6) Message STATUS LED Contents and solution RAM ERROR bbcc xxxx: yyyyyyyy: PC010 The parity error occurs on the debugging RAM of PMC. a : RAM which generates RAM parity. B BASIC RAM O OPTIO
  • Page 1602M. ALARM MESSAGE LIST APPENDIX B–61863E/15 M.5 SYSTEM ALARM MESSAGES (PMC–SB5/SB6/NB6) Message Contents and solution PC0nn CPU INTERRUPT xxxxxxxx CPU error nn :Exception code xxxxxxxx :Address at which an error occurred PC004 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy A CPU error occurred on the PMC. PC006 CPU ERR x
  • Page 1603B–61863E/15 APPENDIX M. ALARM MESSAGE LIST Message Contents and solution PC060 FBUS xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy A bus error occurred on the PMC. PC061 FL–R xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy aa, xxxxxxxx, and yyyyyyyy represent an internal error code. PC062 FL–W aa:xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy This error may be caused by a hardware fail
  • Page 1604M. ALARM MESSAGE LIST APPENDIX B–61863E/15 M.6 PMC SYSTEM ALARM MESSAGES (PMC–SB7) Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents PC004 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy 1) Replace the master printed circuit A CPU error occurred in the PC006 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy board. PMC.xxxxxxxx and yyyyyyy
  • Page 1605B–61863E/15 APPENDIX M. ALARM MESSAGE LIST Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents PC092 USER TRAP aa:xxxxxxxx 1) Replace the master printed circuit The TRAP instruction, which is not used board. in the PMC management software, was 2) If the error recurs even after the executed. repl
  • Page 1606N. EXAMPLE OF STEP SEQUENCE PROGRAMS APPENDIX B–61863E/15 N EXAMPLE OF STEP SEQUENCE PROGRAMS The CNC is connected two or three Power Mate units. CNC Connection Unit. I/O Unit X0.0:Safety switch Y0.0:Safety switch Y1.0:Ready end#1 Y1.1:Drive start#1 Y2.0:Ready end#2 Y2.1:Drive start#2 Y3.0:Ready end
  • Page 1607N. EXAMPLE OF STEP SEQUENCE B–61863E/15 APPENDIX PROGRAMS The following flowchart illustrates the interface with the Power Mate units. CNC Power Mate x When the ready and signal is off, the driving start common is not sent. The start signal (STx) is set on. STx The start signal (STx) is set off afte
  • Page 1608N. EXAMPLE OF STEP SEQUENCE PROGRAMS APPENDIX B–61863E/15 Example 1 The Step sequence program for three sequentially driven Power Mate units: Main program L1 The input signal is set the LED. The input signal is 1 (true). Drive Power Mate#1 Dummy trasition Drive Power Mate#2 Dummy trasition Drive Pow
  • Page 1609N. EXAMPLE OF STEP SEQUENCE B–61863E/15 APPENDIX PROGRAMS Example 2 The Step Sequence program for three simultaneously driven Power Mate units: Main program L1 The input signal is set the LED. The input signal is 1 (true). Drive Power Drive Power Drive Power Mate#1 Mate#2 Mate#3 Dummy trasition Star
  • Page 1610O. STEP SEQUENCE CORRESPONDED C LANGUAGE APPENDIX B–61863E/15 O STEP SEQUENCE CORRESPONDED C LANGUAGE 1576
  • Page 1611O. STEP SEQUENCE CORRESPONDED B–61863E/15 APPENDIX C LANGUAGE O.1 The operation is continued while the condition is true. WHILE STATEMENT Format L1 condition The condition is false. The condition is true. operation Operation finished. L1 1577
  • Page 1612O. STEP SEQUENCE CORRESPONDED C LANGUAGE APPENDIX B–61863E/15 Examples L1 S1 (P10) P11 P12 S2 (P20) P21 L1 P10 P11 R9091.1 COMPB 1 30 R10 R9000.0 TRSET P12 R9091.1 COMPB 1 30 R10 R9000.0 TRSET P20 R9091.0 R0.0 MULB 1 ( ) R10 R9091.1 5 R12 R9091.0 R0.0 ADDB 1 ( ) R10 R9091.1 1 R10 P21 R9091.1 TRSET 1
  • Page 1613O. STEP SEQUENCE CORRESPONDED B–61863E/15 APPENDIX C LANGUAGE O.2 The operation is continued while the condition is true after executing the operation. DO–WHILE STATEMENT The difference between do–while and while is that the operation is executed at least one time. Format L1 operation condition The
  • Page 1614O. STEP SEQUENCE CORRESPONDED C LANGUAGE APPENDIX B–61863E/15 Examples L1 S1 (P20) P21 S2 (P10) P11 P12 L1 P10 P11 R9091.1 COMPB 1 30 R10 R9000.0 TRSET P12 R9091.1 COMPB 1 30 R10 R9000.0 TRSET P20 R9091.0 R0.0 MULB 1 ( ) R10 R9091.1 5 R12 R9091.0 R0.0 ADDB 1 ( ) R10 R9091.1 1 R10 P21 R9091.1 TRSET 1
  • Page 1615O. STEP SEQUENCE CORRESPONDED B–61863E/15 APPENDIX C LANGUAGE O.3 After the initial data is set, the operation is continued while the condition is true. FOR STATEMENT Format Set the initial data. L1 operation condition The condition is false. The condition is true. L1 1581
  • Page 1616O. STEP SEQUENCE CORRESPONDED C LANGUAGE APPENDIX B–61863E/15 Examples S1 (P1) P2 L1 S2 (P20) P21 S3 (P10) P11 P12 L1 P1 R9091.1 NUMEB 1 0 R10 P2 R9091.1 TRSET P20 R9091.0 R0.0 MULB 1 ( ) R10 R9091.1 5 R12 P21 R9091.1 TRSET P10 R9091.0 R0.0 ADDB 1 ( ) R10 R9091.1 1 R10 P11 R9091.0 COMPB 1 30 R10 R90
  • Page 1617O. STEP SEQUENCE CORRESPONDED B–61863E/15 APPENDIX C LANGUAGE O.4 If the condition is true, the operation 1 is executed and if the condition is false, the operation 2 is executed. IF ELSE STATEMENT Format condition The condition is true. The condition is false. operation1 operation2 1583
  • Page 1618O. STEP SEQUENCE CORRESPONDED C LANGUAGE APPENDIX B–61863E/15 Examples S1 (P10) P11 P12 S2 S3 (P20) (P22) P21 P23 P1 0 P1 1 R9091.0 COMPB 1 30 R10 R9000.0 TRSET P12 R9091.0 COMPB 1 30 R10 R9000.0 TRSET P20 R9091.0 R0.0 MULB 1 ( ) R10 R9091.1 8 R12 P21 R9091.1 TRSET P22 R9091.0 R0.0 MULB 1 ( ) R10 R9
  • Page 1619O. STEP SEQUENCE CORRESPONDED B–61863E/15 APPENDIX C LANGUAGE O.5 The operation connected to the condition is executed. SWITCH STATEMENT Format condition condition1 condition2 condition3 operation1 operation2 operation3 1585
  • Page 1620O. STEP SEQUENCE CORRESPONDED C LANGUAGE APPENDIX B–61863E/15 Examples S1 (P10) P11 P12 P13 S2 S3 S4 (P20) (P22) (P24) P21 P23 P25 P1 0 P1 1 R9091.1 COMPB 1 30 R10 R9000.0 TRSET P12 R9091.0 COMPB 1 40 R10 R9000.0 TRSET P13 R9091.1 TRSET P20 R9091.0 R0.0 MULB 1 ( ) R10 R9091.1 5 R12 P21 R9091.1 TRSET
  • Page 1621O. STEP SEQUENCE CORRESPONDED B–61863E/15 APPENDIX C LANGUAGE P23 R9091.1 TRSET P24 R9091.0 R0.0 MULB 1 ( ) R10 R9091.1 15 R12 P25 R9091.1 TRSET 1587
  • Page 1622P. CHINESE CHARACTER CODE, HIRAGANA CODE, AND SPECIAL CODE LIST APPENDIX B–61863E/15 P CHINESE CHARACTER CODE, HIRAGANA CODE, AND SPECIAL CODE LIST Pronun Shift Segment and point JIS ciation JIS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F hThe characters with mark h cannot be displayed on FANUC Series 16/18–MOD
  • Page 1623P. CHINESE CHARACTER CODE, HIRAGANA B–61863E/15 APPENDIX CODE, AND SPECIAL CODE LIST Pronun Shift Segment and point JIS ciation JIS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F shows the character which is impossible to display. 1589
  • Page 1624P. CHINESE CHARACTER CODE, HIRAGANA CODE, AND SPECIAL CODE LIST APPENDIX B–61863E/15 Pronun Shift Segment and point JIS ciation JIS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F shows the character which is impossible to display. 1590
  • Page 1625P. CHINESE CHARACTER CODE, HIRAGANA B–61863E/15 APPENDIX CODE, AND SPECIAL CODE LIST Pronun Shift Segment and point JIS ciation JIS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F shows the character which is impossible to display. 1591
  • Page 1626P. CHINESE CHARACTER CODE, HIRAGANA CODE, AND SPECIAL CODE LIST APPENDIX B–61863E/15 Pronun Shift Segment and point JIS ciation JIS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 93BE shows the character which is impossible to display. 1592
  • Page 1627P. CHINESE CHARACTER CODE, HIRAGANA B–61863E/15 APPENDIX CODE, AND SPECIAL CODE LIST Pronun Shift Segment and point JIS ciation JIS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F shows the character which is impossible to display. 1593
  • Page 1628
  • Page 1629B–61863E/15 Index Note Volume 1 : Up to Page 834 / Volume 2 : Page 835 and later ƠAơ ƠBơ About connection log of Ethernet, 616, 963 Block step, 997 About the FS15i PMC–NB6 programmer, 510 Brief screen, 887 About the FS16i/18i/21i/0i–B PMC–SA1/SB7 programmer, 510 ADD (addition), 249 ADDB (binary addi
  • Page 1630Index B–61863E/15 Note Volume 1 : Up to Page 834 / Volume 2 : Page 835 and later Condense command – release of deleted area, 1133 Data transfer between NB (4047 series) and NB (4048 series), 1528 Configuration and operation of step–sequence programs, 988 Data transfer between NB/NB2 (4048 series) an
  • Page 1631B–61863E/15 Index Note Volume 1 : Up to Page 834 / Volume 2 : Page 835 and later DSCH (data search), 234 Examples of structured programming, 381 DSCHB (binary data search), 237 Exclusive control for functional instructions, 1011 DUMP display on ladder diagram, 493 Execution method, 386 Execution of
  • Page 1632Index B–61863E/15 Note Volume 1 : Up to Page 834 / Volume 2 : Page 835 and later Functional instructions, 135 Input/output method to office programmer (P–G Mate/Mark II) (fixed 9600bit/sec.), 635 Functions for displaying memory areas and debugging the program (MONIT), 589 Input/output of ladder prog
  • Page 1633B–61863E/15 Index Note Volume 1 : Up to Page 834 / Volume 2 : Page 835 and later LBL (label), 347 MOVOR (data transfer after logical sum), 206 Level up of input/output function with memory card, 1520 MOVW (transfer of 2 bytes), 313 Limitations in SYSTEM P Mate, 1108 MUL (multiplication), 257 Limitat
  • Page 1634Index B–61863E/15 Note Volume 1 : Up to Page 834 / Volume 2 : Page 835 and later Output of program, 1098 Program input, 1123 Output of result of trace, 937 Program list editor screen, 760, 916 Output signal processing, 52 Program list viewer screen, 753, 885, 1036 Outputting to and inputting from fl
  • Page 1635B–61863E/15 Index Note Volume 1 : Up to Page 834 / Volume 2 : Page 835 and later Reading clock data (low–speed response), 1407 Reading the relative position on a controlled axis, 1243, 1408 Reading CNC status information, 1247 Reading the remaining travel, 1245, 1409 Reading CNC system information,
  • Page 1636Index B–61863E/15 Note Volume 1 : Up to Page 834 / Volume 2 : Page 835 and later Reading tool life management data (tool length offset number 1) (not Search of empty pot (*low–speed response), 1342 available for Power Mate–D/F, Series 21–TA), 1285 Search of sequence program, 540 Reading tool life ma
  • Page 1637B–61863E/15 Index Note Volume 1 : Up to Page 834 / Volume 2 : Page 835 and later Shift of tool management data (*low–speed response), 1366 Storage to a memory card, 575 Signal address conversion (from the PMC–MODEL L/M to the Storage to Flash ROM, 573 PMC–MODEL SB/SC), 1494 Storing the sequence prog
  • Page 1638Index B–61863E/15 Note Volume 1 : Up to Page 834 / Volume 2 : Page 835 and later Trace function (TRACE), 441 Writing of tool setting data (*low–speed response), 1489 Trace screen, 443, 652 Writing real parameters (low–speed type), 1448 Transfer between data area and non–volatile memory, 1451 Writing
  • Page 1639B–61863E/15 Index Note Volume 1 : Up to Page 834 / Volume 2 : Page 835 and later Writing tool life management data (tool group numbers), 1444 Writing, reading, and comparing sequence programs and PMC pa- rameters, 778 Writing tool life management data (tool information 1), 1447 Writing, reading, and
  • Page 1640
  • Page 1641                  !    "  # #$ # %#  "  & $  '  ()*+!  , - & .       !  "    
  • Page 1642
  • Page 1643TECHNICAL REPORT (MANUAL) NO. TMN 04/030 E Date 10. May, 2004 General Manager of Software Laboratoy FANUC PMC-MODEL SA1/SB7 Supplemental Programming Manual (LADDER Language) 1. Communicate this report to: O Your information only O GE Fanuc-A, GE Fanuc-E FANUC Robotics CINCINNATI MILACRON O Machine t
  • Page 1644FANUC PMC-MODEL SA1/SB7 Supplemental Programming Manual (LADDER Language) Type of applied technical documents FANUC PMC-MODEL PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/SB2/SB3/ Name SB4/SB5/SB6/SC/SC3/SC4/NB/NB2/NB6 Programming Manual(LADDER Language) Spec. No. /Ed. B-61863E/15 Summary of Change New, Add, Group Na
  • Page 1645FANUC Series 0i-MODEL C, 0i Mate-MODEL C PMC-SA1/SB7 Supplemental Ladder Programming Manual Contents 1. SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................. 3 2. APPLIED SOFTWARE.....................................
  • Page 16461. Summary This document contains specifications of the PMC-MODEL SA1/SB7 for the Series 0i-MODEL C / 0i Mate-MODEL C and corrections of the PMC-MODEL SA1/SB7 for the Series 0i-MODEL B / 0i Mate-MODEL B . Please refer to following manual to develop ladder program, too. Manual Spec. Reference item FA
  • Page 16473. PMC-SA1/SB7 3.1. Specifications of PMC Replace the Table 1.1 PMC specifications (15) in "I.1.1 SPECIFICATION OF PMCs" with follows. Table 1.1 PMC specifications (15) Series 0i-B/C Series 0i Mate-A/B/C Control type PMC-SA1 PMC-SB7 PMC-SA1 Programming method Ladder Ladder Ladder Number of ladder le
  • Page 1648Note 1. This is the number of ladder steps for the program only with basic instructions. The use of functional instructions may vary the number of ladder steps. 2. These have no limit of size for each. However, the total size of sequence program (the sum total of ladder, symbols/comments, messages,
  • Page 16493.2. PMC Addresses Replace the Table 3 Alphabetic Characters for PMC Address Number (14),(15) in "I.3 ADDRESS" with follows. Table 3 Alphabetic Characters for PMC Address Number (14) Control type Address Type of signal Series 0i-B/C PMC-SA1 PMC-SB7 X Input signal from machine X0 to X127 X0 to X127 t
  • Page 1650Note 1 This area is reserved for PMC. I/O can not be assigned to it. Don’t use it in sequence program. 2 This area contains PMC reserve. Actual available addresses depend on the configuration of CNC system. 3 This area is for PMC reserve. Don’t use it in sequence program. 4 This area is used for PMC
  • Page 1651Table 3 Alphabetic Characters for PMC Address Number (15) Control type Address Type of signal Series 0i Mate-A/B/C PMC-SA1 X Input signal from machine X0 to X127 tool to PMC (MT→PMC) Y Output signal from PMC to Y0 to Y127 machine tool (PMC→MT) F Input signal from NC to PMC F0 to F255 (NC→PMC) G Outp
  • Page 16523.3. Functional Instructions Replace the Table 5(a) Types and processing of functional instructions(9),(10) in "I.5 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS" with follows. Table 5(a) Types and processing of functional instructions (9) Part1 Command SUB Type Name Number Description Series 0i-MODEL B/C PMC-SA1 PMC-SB7
  • Page 1653Table 5(a) Types and processing of functional instructions (9) Part2 Command SUB Type Name Number Description Series 0i-MODEL B/C PMC-SA1 PMC-SB7 COMP 15 Comparison O O COMPB 32 Binary comparison O O COIN 16 Coincidence check O O SFT 33 Shift register O O DSCH 17 Data search O O DSCHB 34 Binary data
  • Page 1654Table 5(a) Types and processing of functional instructions (9) Part3 Command SUB Type Name Number Description Series 0i-MODEL B/C PMC-SA1 PMC-SB7 EOR 59 Exclusive OR X O AND 60 Logical AND X O OR 61 Logical OR X O NOT 62 Logical NOT X O END 64 End of ladder program X O CALL 65 Conditional subprogram
  • Page 1655Table 5(a) Types and processing of functional instructions (10) Part1 Command SUB Type Name Number Description Series 0i Mate-MODEL A/B/C PMC-SA1 END1 1 1st Level program end O END2 2 2 Level program end nd O END3 48 3rd Level program end X TMR 3 Timer O TMRB 24 Fixed timer O TMRC 54 Timer O DEC 4 D
  • Page 1656Table 5(a) Types and processing of functional instructions (10) Part2 Command SUB Type Name Number Description Series 0i Mate-MODEL A/B/C PMC-SA1 XMOV 18 Indexed data transfer O XMOVB 35 Binary indexed data transfer O ADD 19 Addition O ADDB 36 Binary addition O SUB 20 Subtraction O SUBB 37 Binary Su
  • Page 1657FANUC PMC-MODEL SB7 Supplemental PMC Programming Manual (LADDER Language) Type of applied technical documents FANUC PMC-MODEL PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/SB2/SB3/ Name SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4/NB/NB2/NB6 Programming Manual (LADDER Language) Spec. No. /Ed. B-61863E/15 Summary of Change New, Add, Gro
  • Page 1658FANUC PMC-MODEL SB7 Supplemental PMC Programming Manual (LADDER Language) Contents 1 SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................................... 3 2 APPLIED SOFTWARE ....................................................
  • Page 16591 SUMMARY The following functions have been added to FANUC PMC MODEL-SB7 for Series 16i/18i/21i-B. • Address alternation Function • Add an operation to abandon changes and exit screen, at LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen and NET EDITOR screen. This document is a supplemental manual concerning the additi
  • Page 16602 APPLIED SOFTWARE The new features will be applied to the following software. - PMC Managing software Software Series Edition Series 16i/18i/21i-MODEL B 406G 14 or later. PMC-SB7 System Software FANUC PMC-MODEL SB7 Supplemental Programming Manual (LADDER Language) 01 04.09.30 Mochizuki New registra
  • Page 16613 ADDRESS ALTERATION FUNCTION In this section, the explanation of the Address Alteration Function is described. The description of other features of LADDER Editing function has been published in the following manual: ● “FANUC PMC-MODEL PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/SB2/ SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4/N
  • Page 1662Replace the first figure in “V FS16i/18i/21i/0i-B PMC-SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION; 5.3 SCREEN OPERATION” with the figure below: Soft keys on the Ladder Diagram Editor screen Program List Add new net Make changes effective Cut nets Paste nets Change to search soft keys Edit net Select multiple nets Delete n
  • Page 1663Replace the first figure in “V FS16i/18i/21i/0i-B PMC-SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION; 5.5.2 Screen Operations” with the one below: Soft keys on the Net Editor screen Left vertical Go to A contact Normal coil Functional Instructions connection next net B contact Inverted coil Horizontal connection Delete Right
  • Page 1664Insert the following section as “V FS16i/18i/21i/0i-B PMC-SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION; 5.10 ADDRESS ALTERATION FUNCTION”, and shift the numbering of current section 5.10 and after accordingly: 5.10 ADDRESS ALTERATION FUNCTION You can alter the address used in a ladder program with another address. To perfo
  • Page 16655.10.1 Screen Structures LADDER diagram display area Key input line Message display line Address input line ● Key input line Area in which characters are displayed as you key in. ● Message display line Area in which confirmation and error messages are displayed. ● Address input line Enter the addres
  • Page 16665.10.2 Operating on the Screen (a) Entering an address You can enter an address by entering “character string” followed by INPUT key. • Address specification using a wildcard You can use wildcard (*) in the bit portion of a bit address. Example: “X100.*” represents all of X100.0 to X100.7. The follo
  • Page 1667The following messages are displayed at the start and the completion of alteration process. • Confirmation message before alteration DO YOU ALTER ALL OLD ADDRESS IN GLOBAL? DO YOU ALTER ALL OLD ADDRESS IN LOCAL? • At the completion n ADDRESS(ES) WERE ALTERED. If the address in “NEW ADDRESS” is read-
  • Page 166810. [<] Exits from the address alternation function Exits from the address alteration function and returns you to the ladder edit functions. To use the address alteration function again, press the [CHANGE] key while the ladder edit functions are displayed. FANUC PMC-MODEL SB7 Supplemental Programmin
  • Page 1669Add the table below to “V FS16i/18i/21i/0i-B PMC-SA1/SB7 MANIPULATION; 5.11 ALARM MESSAGE AND COUNTERMEASURE” in the tail: Error messages at Address Alteration Function on the PMC LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen Error message Contents Faulty location/corrective action BIT ADDRESS IS REQUIRED. An attemp